02d.2 Schedule A Part 3 Annex1

STATE OF QATAR SCHEDULE A: PROJECT BRIEF
ASHGHAL PART 3: PROJECT DATA

ANNEXURE 1: PROJECT SPECIFIC CODES & STANDARDS
ANNEXURE 1
PROJECT SPECIFIC CODES AND STANDARDS
Project ID: IA 2018 C 075 G Schedule A: Part 3: Annexure 1 Rev. 0

Design and Construction of Industrial and Mubaireek Interchanges
CONTENTS
PROJECT SPECIFIC SPECIFICATIONS

This documents contains the amendments for incorporation into the Qatar Construction
Specification (2014).
Section 1 – General
Section 3 – Ground Investigation
Section 5 – Concrete
Section 6 – Roadworks
Section 8 – Drainage Works
Section 9 – M&E Equipment
Section 13 – Masonry
Section 16 – Structural Steelworks
Section 17 – Metalwork
Section 18 – Carpentry, Joinery and Ironmongery
Section 19 – Plumbing
Section 20 – Drainage Works For Buildings
Section 21 – Electrical Works
Section 24 – Finishes to Building
Section 27 – External Works
Section 28 – Landscaping
Section 31 – Highway Structures
Project ID: IA 2018 C 075 G Schedule A: Part 3: Annexure 1: Contents Rev. 0

SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

The following paragraphs delete, substitute, amend, supplement, or are additional to the paragraphs
in the various sections of QCS 2014, as amended or added to by the IANs.
PART 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
Add new Clause 3 to Part 1.1.2 as follows:
1.1.2 Scope of the Qatar Construction Specification
3 Interim Advice Notes (IANs) may be issued by the Authority from time to time.
They define specific requirements for works on Authority projects only,
subject to any specific implementation instructions contained within each IAN.
These IANs provide information and guidance on amendments and additions
to Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS) 2014. These IAN’s take
precedence over QCS 2014. The following is a list of IANs that apply to this
Contract.
All work shall be executed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following
IANs published by the Authority:
IAN No Title
IAN 20 Road Tunnel Fire and Life Safety Systems Rev A2
PWA IAN 002 Rev A1 - Safety Barrier Performance Levels and Selection Criteria
PWA IAN 004 14 Rev A1 - Specification for Waterproofing of Cut and Cover Tunnel
PWA IAN 004 Rev A1 - Specification for Waterproofing of Cut and Cover Tunnel and
Underpass Highways
PWA IAN 005 14 Rev A1 - Specification for Excavation and Backfill for Highway
Structures
PWA IAN 006 14 Rev A1 - Specification for Bridge Bearings
PWA IAN 007 Rev A1 - Approval in Principle Documents for Highway Structures
PWA IAN 009 14 Rev A2 - Design Criteria for Highway Structures
PWA IAN 011 Rev A1 - Cycleway Design Guidelines
PWA IAN 013 14 Rev A1 - Amendments to QCS 2014
Project ID: IA 2018 C 075 G Schedule A: Part 3: Annexure 1: Section 1: Page 1 Rev. 0
SECTION 1: GENERAL
IAN No Title
PWA IAN 014 Rev A1 - Traffic Signs and Road Markings Guidance
PWA IAN 015 Rev A1 - Fibre Optic Ducts for Drainage
PWA IAN 016 Rev A1 - Pavement Design Guidelines
PWA IAN 017 Rev A1 - Traffic Signals Standard Details and Drawing Requirements
PWA IAN 018 Rev A1 - Kerb Inlet Gullies
PWA IAN 020 Rev A1 - Road Tunnel Fire and Life Safety Systems
PWA IAN 021 14 RevA1 - Cycleways and Footways Pavement Design Guidelines
PWA IAN 022 Rev A1 - Technical Approval of Highway Structures
PWA IAN 023 Rev A2 - Tunnel and Underpass Drainage
PWA IAN 024 14 Rev A1 - Specification for Mechanically Stabilised Earth Structures
PWA IAN 027 14 Rev A1 - Specification for Protective Coating for Above Ground
PWA IAN 028 14 Rev A1- Specification for Waterproofing of Concrete Slabs on
Highway Structures
PWA IAN 031 14 Rev A1 - Expansion Joints for Highway Structures
PWA IAN 100 Rev 0 - Amendments to Section 6 Parts 4 5 6 8 of QCS 2014
PWA IAN 101 Rev 1 - Amendments to QHDM
Should there be any conflict between the requirements of these IANs and these
Project Specifications, then the IANs shall take precedence.
Delete Parts 1.4.3 and 1.4.7 and substitute with the following:
1.4.3 The Contract
This Contract is between the Authority of the State of Qatar and the Contractor in
accordance with Authorities Requirements described in Schedule A [Project Brief] of
this document.
1.4.7 The Engineer

“Engineer” means the Director of the Infrastructure Affairs of the Public Works
Authority, P.O. Box No. 22188, Doha, State of Qatar or other Engineer appointed
from time to time by the Authority and notified in writing to the Contractor to act as
Engineer for the purpose of the Contract in place of the Engineer so designated.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
Add new Clause 1.7 as follows:
1.7 Other requirements
Refer PWA IAN 13 / 14 for additional Clauses.
Add new Part 1.8 as follows:
1.8 Programme
1 The Contract Programme includes, where specified, preparing the design of
the permanent works and securing approval for the design from the
Employer prior to construction commencement.
Primavera version 6 shall be used for producing the programme.
PART 1A GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES FOR UTILITY WORKS

1 The contractor shall be responsible for liaison with Public Utility Departments
with regards to the overall coordination and programming of utility works.
No trench or chamber excavation will be permitted until:-
(a) The locations and depth of all existing services have been established
by trial holes to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(b) The contractor has provided the Engineer with accurate setting out
information for the line and level of the proposed utility installation.
(c) The Engineer has confirmed the accurate setting information for the
line and levels of the proposed utility installation.
The contractor shall include for the requirements of this clause in his
programme of works and his Bill of Rates. The contractor shall be
responsible for arranging, providing and maintaining all road closures and
traffic diversions required by the works with the Traffic Police Department
and the Engineer.
The contractor shall be responsible for liaison with the concerned authorities
for obtaining all necessary building permits for any new building/structure
related to the public utility departments.
PART 3 SITE ACCESS AND ENTRY ONTO THE SITE

3.2 Access Roads
3.2.1 Temporary Access Roads
Refer PWA IAN 13 /14 for changes to this Clause.
3.3 Site Entry
3.3.1 Entry onto the Site
SECTION 1: GENERAL
PART 4 PROTECTION
4.5 Hoarding
4.5.1 Temporary Site Hoarding
Delete paragraph 2 in its entirety and replace as follows:
1 The site hoarding shall be as specified in Appendix 1 – Visual Design of
Branded-Hoarding and Signboards Specification, all to be to the approval of
the Engineer.
Supplemental PART 4.6 TO Section 1, Part 4
4.6 PROPERTY CONDITION SURVEY
4.6.1 Scope
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for conducting a Property Condition
Survey prior to the commencement of any works to document existing
conditions of adjacent properties and to establish a baseline for the project for
any damage to be assessed against. The provisions included within this
section are the minimum required, and the Contractor shall propose any
additional requirements deemed necessary in order to safeguard the adjacent
property owners, the Contractor and the Client.
2 As a minimum, the Property Condition Survey shall capture the following
details;
(a) Location
(b) Structural Form
(c) Function
(d) Foundation Type
(e) Defect assessment (including photos)
4.6.2 Extent of Property Condition Survey
1 The Contractor shall provide the extent to which the property condition survey
is developed. As a minimum it should provide a record of data for all
properties that are determined to be at risk from the works.
2 The Contractor shall conduct a preliminary damage assessment on any
structure within the zone of influence (a minimum distance of two (2) times
the excavation depth from the edge of excavation or 30m from the right of
way, whichever is the greater) and adjust the extent of the property condition
survey to account for any structures considered to be of potential risk.
3 Such property condition surveys shall be carried out in two (2) stages by the
Contractor all as the following:
(a) the first stage shall consist of pre-execution condition surveys
including photographic records which shall be carried out prior to the
commencement of the execution of the Works. Two copies of the pre-
execution condition survey records and reports shall be completed
and forwarded to the Engineer or his representative in advance of
commencing execution of the Works; and.
(b) the second stage shall consist of post-execution condition surveys
including photographic records to be carried out within four (4) weeks
of the completion of the Works or any Section.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
4.6.3 Engaging property owners prior to survey
1 Prior to conducting the survey, the contractor shall seek consent to enter any
building or enter private property with the property owner and occupier.
2 The contractor shall prepare and deliver an initial contact letter to each
property owner, which shall include the following information:
(a) Reason for the survey
(b) Duration of the survey
(c) Contain contact information (email and phone number)
(d) Explain how the survey will be undertaken
(e) List the steps required by the owner to arrange the survey3
(f) What will happen after the survey
(g) What will the property owner receive at the end of the survey works
(h) Request that the letter be forwarded to the property owner, or contact
the managing rental agent to forward on the letter to the owner (if
received by a non-owner property occupier)
3 The contractor shall prepare and deliver to each property owner from which a
response has not been received, a follow up contact letter which shall include
the following information:
(a) Further prompt the property owner to make arrangements for a survey
(b) List the steps required by the owner to arrange the survey
(c) Contain the same information as the initial contact letter
4 In cases where no response has been received to the initial and follow up
letters, the contractor shall make direct contact with the property owner as
follows:
(a) Involve a door knock for property owners who have not responded to
the 1st and 2nd letters
(b) Explain the process to the property owner
(c) Arrange a time to conduct the survey
4.6.4 Occupational Health and Safety Management
1 Prior to conducting any survey, the contractor shall prepare a Safe Work
Method Statement (SWMS) and submit this for approval five (5) working days
before commencement of the survey.
2 The Contractor shall undertake a risk/hazard assessment of each site/work
activity to determine the risks and treatments required to eliminate, or
significantly reduce so far as is reasonably practicable, those risks/hazards.
The details of the risk/hazard assessment shall be recorded in the Safe Work
Method Statement, highlighting work activities that are considered ‘high risk’.
3 The SWMS shall include but not be limited to:
(a) Addressing /responding to the requirements of this specification;
(b) Identifying procedures and responsibilities for the preparation,
implementation and verification of the SWMS and thereafter for its
monitoring and amendment;
SECTION 1: GENERAL
(c) Identifying procedures and responsibilities to ensure that all personnel
involved with the preparation and implementation of the SWMS are
appropriately trained, experienced and supervised;
(d) Identifying procedures to ensure that the public is not exposed to any
health or safety risks/hazards as a result of the Contractor’s
operations;
(e) Identifying a procedure for securing the site and immediately reporting
to the Superintendent any accident or incident;
(f) Emergency contacts including emergency services and other relevant
authorities; and
(g) Arrangements to ensure that subcontractors comply with the
requirements of the SWMS
4.6.5 Confidentiality
1 A property condition report shall be produced containing the required
information on each property within the zone of influence. The information to
be included in the report shall contain but not be limited to:
4.6.6 Report format and submission
1 A property condition report shall be produced containing the required
information on each property within the zone of influence. The information to
be included in the report shall contain but not be limited to:
(a) Owner signature – report verification
(b) Location information
(c) The required information listed above
(d) Internal and external structural defects
(e) Reference photographs
2 Each property owner shall receive a minimum of two (2) copies of the part of
the survey report which relates to their property and provide a verification
signature for each copy.
3 The owner shall keep one copy for their records and return the other copy to
the contractor.
4 The contractor shall deliver a draft and final copy of the full report two (2)
months prior to commencement of construction or otherwise as agreed with
the Engineer.
4.7 PROPERTY DAMAGE RISK ASSESMENT
4.7.1 Scope
1 A detailed property damage risk assessment shall be carried out by the
contractor following completion of the property condition survey. The
contractor shall submit for approval a proposed methodology for performing
the damage risk assessment.
2 The damage risk assessment shall include but not be limited to:
(a) Identification of any properties or structures at risk within and outside
of the zone of influence;
(b) Proposed instrumentation and monitoring plan;
SECTION 1: GENERAL
(c) Monitoring trigger levels and actions
(d) Proposed mitigation measures for any properties or structures
considered at risk;
3 A damage risk assessment report shall be prepared on the findings of the
damage risk assessment in draft and final copy at least two (2) months prior
to commencement of construction or otherwise as agreed with the Engineer.
4.7.2 Instrumentation and Monitoring Plan
1 The instrumentation and monitoring plan shall address the following
concerns:
(a) Provide confirmation of the predicted behaviour of the support system
during excavation.
(b) Assess the effect of the work on buildings, utilities and other
structures.
(c) Provide a record of performance.
(d) Enable construction to be carried out safely at every stage of the
works.
(e) Enable appropriate contingency measures to be implemented in time,
where required.
2 The Contractor shall include in the instrumentation and monitoring plan, the
location and type of instrumentation appropriate to the planned construction
works and presence of adjacent buildings, structures, utilities and tunnels
within and outside the zone of influence where properties, structures, utilities
and tunnels have been identified to be at risk.
3 The Contractor shall propose in the instrumentation and monitoring plan
appropriate instrumentation which may include:
(a) Vibration monitoring
(b) Noise Monitoring
(c) Surface settlement pins / markers
(d) Utility settlement markers
(e) Building settlement pins
(f) Tilt meters
(g) Inclinometers at excavations
(h) Extensometers
(i) Piezometers / water standpipes
(j) Crack meters
(k) Tunnel convergence pins
(l) Strain gauges
(m) Other types of instrument as required by the Contractor
4.7.3 Durability
1 The Contractor shall consider durability in the selection of materials and
instrumentation installed from the surface. Although it is not expected that the
SECTION 1: GENERAL
installations will have the durability of the permanent works, they must be of
sufficiently durable construction that they will remain serviceable for the
duration of the construction works.
4.7.4 Reading Frequency for Monitoring Instruments
1 The Monitoring and Instrumentation Plan shall have tables giving reading
frequencies for all instruments. The frequency of instrument readings may be
varied, depending on the type of instrument and the relationship between the
instrument and areas of current activity. Criteria for increasing or decreasing
the frequency of reading and for ceasing monitoring shall also be given,
subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.
4.7.5 Trigger levels and action plan
1 The Monitoring and Instrumentation Plan shall include trigger levels and an
appropriate action plan;
2 Two levels of monitoring thresholds (Trigger or Amber Level and Work Stop
or Red Level) should be established for each monitoring installation.
3 The trigger level is a reading at a predetermined level prior to the Work Stop
Level or required for compliance with the Contract or Authority’s Requirement.
4 The work stop level is defined as any highest or lowest (as appropriate)
reading anticipated based on the design at serviceability limit state.
5 Contingency measures shall be proposed in the event when the trigger level
is exceeded.
6 Contingency measures shall include but not limited to reviewing monitoring
frequencies, modifications to work sequences, additional support system or
other temporary works and in the event when the work stop levels are
reached, appropriate remedial measures shall be proposed in the action plan
to safeguard the works and any adjacent properties at risk.
4.8 INITIAL INSTALLATION AND SURVEY
4.8.1 Initial Installation and Survey of Instruments
1 Instrumentation should be installed and baseline readings taken prior to the
commencement of construction works. Wherever possible, monitoring should
be established well in advance of construction so that any seasonal and daily
variations can be established.
2 The Contractor’s personnel who read and monitor the instruments shall be
fully trained and familiar with the instrumentation, operation of the readout
units and recording of the readout data
3 Any measuring devices shall be appropriate for and compatible with the
particular instrument. As part of the Contractor’s Method Statement, it is
expected that recent calibration certificates will be supplied for all proposed
measuring devices. The same measuring devices shall be used for the same
instruments throughout the monitoring programme. If this becomes
impractical, new datum readings shall be taken immediately with a
replacement measuring device which shall be used for future readings.
4 A method statement shall be submitted, describing the proposals for
monitoring, including the types of equipment to be used, details of certification
and calibration of instruments.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
5 The Contractor shall ensure all instrumentation is accurately surveyed
immediately upon installation.
6 Following completion of installation of any instruments the Contractor shall
have their readings taken as soon as possible and at least once per day for a
period of two weeks thereafter. Where instruments appear not to have
stabilised, for example exhibiting a continued drift in the readings, the cause
shall be identified and the fault rectified and a new set of readings provided.
When all instruments are showing consistent results for a period of one (1)
week, readings shall be averaged to provide a datum reading. No works that
could affect the readings of the instruments shall be allowed to proceed
before a datum reading is agreed with the Engineer.
7 The Contractor shall prepare a brief factual report (in table format) for review
for the completed instruments containing the following information as a
minimum requirement;
(a) Reference number of instrument (ID of the instrument to be used in
the database) and location (coordinates and level);
(b) Names of personnel responsible for installation;
(c) Time and date for commencement and completion of instrument;
(d) Plant and labour used
(e) Ground conditions encountered (if applicable)
(f) Full as-built installation details including manufacturer’s
documentation/serial numbers etc, if appropriate;
(g) Instrument readings during installation, calibration and immediately
after installation are completed.
(h) Details of any breakdowns or delays
(i) Details of any instrument protection
(j) Testing procedures and baseline readings
(k) The instruments will not be accepted until the factual report for that
instrument has been received and non-objected by the Engineer.
4.9 REPORTING
4.9.1 Reporting of Instrumentation Data
1 All instruments and measurement data files shall be submitted to the
Engineer within twenty four (24) hours of the readings being taken. The
Contractor shall check the data files before submitting the files to the
Engineer.
2 Reporting of monitoring results shall include a plan showing the location of
the buildings, structures or utilities and instrumented lines and shall comprise
at least the following;
(a) Plots of measured parameters vs appropriate variables, for example,
settlement vs time, horizontal deflections vs time, settlement vs depth
of excavation etc.;
(b) List of construction activities and progress at the time of monitoring
(c) A comparison of data with predetermined review levels;
SECTION 1: GENERAL
(d) An interpretation of the data. The interpretation shall include a
summary of all monitored trends against predetermined review levels.
Any areas of concern or potential concern shall be highlighted within
the report. The report shall be assessed and commented by the
Engineer; and
(e) Recommendations for any protective and contingent measures, if any,
shall be made in the report.
PART 7 SUBMITTALS
7.6 PLANS
Add new Part 7.6.4 as follows:
7.6.4 Construction Environmental Management Plan
1. The Contractor is required to prepare a Construction Environmental
Management Plan (CEMP). No construction or mobilization activity at the
project site is allowed until a comprehensive CEMP is prepared and non-
objected by the Engineer.
2. Preparation of the CEMP shall be by an Environmental Consultant non-
objected by the Engineer. The Contractor is required to regularly update the
plan when required. Adherence of the works to the CEMP shall be supervised
and documented by the Contractor’s HSE Officers. The Contractor shall
appoint sufficient number of HSE Officers at its own costs to enable
permanent supervision of the works during its execution.
3. The CEMP shall contain the following minimum procedural requirements:
(a) Generator operations and control procedures;
(b) Traffic department procedures;
(c) Management of solid and liquid waste;
(d) Ground and surface water collection, treatment and disposal;
(e) Air pollution control procedures;
(f) Procedures to remove, clean and rehabilitate soil and ground water;
(g) Chemical material management;
(h) Construction waste removal procedures;
(i) Works site HSE-procedures;
(j) Slurry tailings disposal procedures; and,
(k) Flow diversion and over pumping procedures.
4. Preparation of CEMP shall consider all requirements set by Ministry of
Environment (MoE), the Environmental Impact Assessment Report (EIA) and
QCS 2010.
7.8 REPORTS
7.8.4 Soil and Groundwater Condition
SECTION 1: GENERAL
1 The contractor shall consider the findings of the existing geotechnical and
geo-environmental investigations and conduct any additional geotechnical
and geo-environmental investigations necessary to establish the expected
ground and groundwater conditions prior to construction for enabling
Contractor’s works.
2 Geo-environmental parameter analyses shall be conducted to internationally
recognized standards for both soil and groundwater such as USEPA or New
Dutch Standards.
3 The Contractor shall issue a plan and methodology for any additional
geotechnical and geo-environmental investigations, if required, prior to
execution of the works to the Engineer for approval. The need for any soil and
groundwater remediation shall be established via a Quantitative Risk
Assessment.
7.10 AS BUILT DOCUMENTS
The following Part 7.10.5 is to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014, Section 1, Part
7, Part 7.10 Drawings. The following provisions have precedence over the
corresponding provisions of QCS 2014.
7.10.5 Drawings to be provided by the Contractor
1 The Contractor shall be required to provide soft and hard copies submissions
of all As Built Documents prior to the issue of the Certificate of Completion as
per the relevant provisions detailed within the standards and specifications,
as cited within the Tender Documents. As Built Documents include As Built
Drawings and plans, As Built Survey Drawings and As Built Record
Drawings:-
2 As Built Record Drawings are drawings that show the Works as constructed
in all respects. They are in addition to the elements of the Works shown on
the As Built Survey Drawings, and should include, at least, all finished
horizontal and vertical alignments, chainages, setting out, levels, and details.
They shall also include all underground services, utilities, surface features,
and any additional information deemed necessary to comprehensively
represent the works.
3 No later than the date on which the Contractor shall apply by notice to the
Engineer for a Certificate of Completion, the Contractor shall supply to the
Engineer the As-Built Documents for all Design and for all Constructed
Elements, inclusive of:-
4 As Built drawings as specified in Appendix A herein (Information To Be
Supplied As part of As Built Documents).
5 For Road Structures, the As Built, Operational and Maintenance Records to
be in accordance with BD 62 of the UK DMRB, and for any road structure
designed, it should include a fully indexed and referenced set of Design and
Design Check calculations (certified by the Designer and Checker).
For all Elements, the following shall be provided:-
One copy of each of the drawings specified in Appendix A herein (Information
To Be Supplied As part of As Built Documents) on A1 size paper clearly
marked "As Built Drawing" in red, and
SECTION 1: GENERAL
6 Digital "soft" copies of all the As-Built Documents
surveys/drawings/records/schedules), in Autodesk AutoCAD and Civil 3D
format (and other deliverable file formats such as Microsoft Word, Excel or
Access as appropriate), in a suitable and as appropriate storage medium
(such as a CD-ROM) with a lifetime warranty, to enable transfer, upload and
integration to Authority’s GIS digital system (conforming to Authority’s CAD
and GIS standards) and MME CGIS's 3D City Model and its GIS system.
7 As-built 3 dimensional digital computer models in Autodesk Civil 3D that shall
be in a format suitable for input into the Authority’s GIS digital system.
8 All AutoCAD drawings and Civil 3D models must be provided in the Authority
prescribed data format for seamless integration into Authority GIS. This
includes:-
9 Layering to be in accordance with Authority layering system.
Block attributes provided (via appropriately populated tags).
Object Xdata (AutoCAD) and Object data (Civil 3D) shall be provided for all
objects that are required to be imported into GIS.
Models will be linked to a project database. All elements must therefore be
tagged appropriately.
10 If any design of roadway elements is undertaken, a completed Roads Design
Criteria certificate, for every designed section, in the form set out in Appendix
B herein.
11 An Execution and Completion Report identifying the actual types of materials
and execution that were used throughout the Works. The Execution and
Completion Report shall:-
12 Summarize the information obtained by the laboratory or field tests on the
road materials employed in the Works;
Comment on the remedial and corrective actions taken;
Discuss points of interest or the use of "unusual" and "special" materials and
methods of execution;
Contain a statement setting out the problems and defects encountered during
the execution of the Works and how they were overcome or rectified.
Record material compliance, such as certification, quality assurance, external
testing and otherwise; and
Form a complete record of sampling and testing data.
13 For the purposes of these As Built Documents, a defect shall mean a failure
of any component in the Works during the execution of the Works, including,
deterioration in the road pavement including chip loss, unexpected movement
of earthworks slopes, evidence of poor drainage and subsequent
identification of the use of materials within the Works that would not have met
the requirements of the Design and/or the Specification.
14. All As Built Documents shall be completed by the Contractor and submitted to
the Engineer prior to the issue of a Certificate of Completion.
15 All documents submitted in electronic format, including but not limited to CAD
files are to be carefully checked for computer viruses using the latest anti-
virus software available prior to submission.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
APPENDIX A – Information to Be Supplied As Part of As Built Documents
The drawings, plans, records, schedules and other information detailed herein shall
be provided as appropriate to form one or multiple composite document elements
incorporating information on individual structures making up the works. A separate
“group of as-built documents” would need to be established for major structures such
as a tunnel.
Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Contract, the format, media and numbers
of copies of the As Built Documents shall be agreed between the Contractor and the
client’s Representative.
The As Built Documents shall:-
Be compiled and delivered, no later than the date on which the Contractor shall apply
by notice to the Engineer for a Certificate of Completion of the overall project or on a
structure-by-structure basis as appropriate.
Be of sufficient details for the constructed assets, in terms of attributes coverage of
As Built Documents, to meet the needs of on-going operation and maintenance
management.
Contain an index listing of all drawings and other information provided with particular
reference to other records to which cross-referencing is made.
Where the project involves alterations or additions to roads, assets or other features
outside the ROW. The information pertaining to such, shall be separately identified
so that it can be passed to the "'owner" of the roads, assets or other features, (this
also includes Accommodation Works undertaken on other than private domestic
properties), in such cases it shall not be acceptable to cross-refer to other records
and the As Built Documents shall be submitted as standalone. This shall be
particularly so for structures where information to BD 62 of the UK DMRB needs to
be separately provided.
Be referenced to the general road network (as acceptable by the Client’s
Representative) so that it can be easily accessed and updated when future Works or
maintenance are undertaken.
Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Contract, The As Built Documents shall
cover as a minimum, As Built Drawings covering Schemes, General arrangement,
Drainage, Carriageway, pavement, structures, Fencing, Safety barrier systems, road
markings, Traffic Signs, Lighting, utilities networks, equipment, ITS, related
stakeholders ancillary assets such as utilities companies and any associated
legislative and approval documents acquired as part of works execution.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
APPENDIX B – As Built Roads Design Criteria Certificate
(Note, the completion of the below certificate is subject to the inclusion of designed
SECTION 1: GENERAL
PART 8 BUILDING DEMOLITION
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.5 Materials Arising
Add new Clause 8.2.9 Approval to Demolish as follows:
8.2.9 Approval to Demolish
1 The Contractor shall procure all necessary approvals and permits from
relevant authorities and submit to the Engineer for Approval to Demolish not
less than 2 weeks prior to commencement of demolition works. No Demolition
Works shall be undertaken without the express written approval of the
Engineer. Notwithstanding any other requirements of this Clause, the
Contractor shall:
(a) Produce an individual submission for Approval to Demolish for each
installation or building to be demolished.
(b) Each Submission shall include a Demolition Plan that fully describes
the proposed work methods, timings, and the proposed protection
methods for the general public, and adjacent infrastructure. It shall
fully describe the location of the building or infrastructure to be
demolished, including an aerial photograph that shows its location,
PIN number or other identifier as required by the Engineer.
(c) Where the building or infrastructure is to be demolished as a result of
a modification to the ROW boundary to facilitate the project, the
Contractor shall obtain the written confirmation and approval of MME
that demolition of such building or infrastructure is non-objected to
proceed.
(d) Where the building or infrastructure is not wholly contained within the
existing ROW or modified ROW, the Contractor shall obtain the
approval of MME and or the owner of the property, to enter the
property to demolish the remainder of the building or infrastructure not
contained within the ROW.
(e) The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage to adjacent
buildings or infrastructure and shall repair or replace damaged
buildings or infrastructure to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
PART 10 HEALTH AND SAFETY

10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Scope
10.7.5 Additional Environmental Protection and Pollution Control
1 The Contractor shall comply with all conditions of Environmental Clearance
issued for the Contract by the Ministry of Environment (MoE), and also where
relevant, the predecessor to the MoE, the Supreme Council for the
Environment and Natural Reserves.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
2 The Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations regarding
environmental protection and pollution control issued by the MoE, and also
where relevant, the predecessor to the MoE, the Supreme Council for the
Environment and Natural Reserves.
10.7.6 Plant and Equipment Test Certificates
1 Cranes, whether used to construct the Works or provided as part of the
permanent Works, must have a current test certificate.
2 Each sling, shackle or other item of loose lifting tackle, whether used to
construct the Works or provided as part of the permanent Works, must have
either a current manufacturer’s test certificate or a current test certificate.
3 Test certificates must be issued by a competent testing authority non-
4 The Contractor must have a copy of each test certificate on-site available for
inspection by the Engineer.
5 The following British Standards and Code of Practice shall be complied with:
(a) Mobile and Tower Cranes: BS 1757, BS 2799 and CP 3010
(b) Overhead Cranes: BS 466 and BS 5744
(c) Slings: BS 1290
(d) Chain Blocks: BS 3243
(e) Shackles: Alloy: BS 3551, High Tensile Steel: BS 3032
Part 11 ENGINEER’S SITE FACILITIES

11.2 ENGINEER’S SITE OFFICES
11.2.1 General
Replace paragraph 1 with the following:
1 The Contractor shall provide, maintain and remove on completion of the
Works the Engineer’s Site Offices Type 3. The position and location of the
site offices shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Refer PWA IAN 13 /14 for new Sub-Clause 11.2.5 - Type 3 Offices
11.3 UTILITY CONNECTIONS
11.3.4 Telephone
Delete paragraph 1 of Part11.3.4 and substitute with following:
1 The Contractor shall provide 10 land lines for the Engineer’s Site Office Type
3, two of which are for dedicated facsimile lines, for the sole use of the
Engineer.
11.3.5 Internet
Delete paragraph 1 and substitute with following:
SECTION 1: GENERAL
1 The Contractor shall arrange for the provision of a dedicated, uninterrupted
internet access to the Engineer’s offices during all working hours and at any
other time as requested by the Engineer for the duration of the Contract and
until the end of the Maintenance Period. The internet connection shall be
provided with a bandwidth running at a minimum of 8 mbps upload capacity.
11.4 PROVISIONS OF EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES

11.4.2 Photocopier
Delete paragraph 1 and substitute with the following:
1 The Contractor shall provide a new multi-functional digital A3 colour
photocopier with a minimum 60 copies/minute and 600 x 600 dpi resolution
for the sole use of the Engineer. (Authority and PMC staff.)
11.4.4 Measuring and Recording Equipment
Delete paragraph 1 and substitute as follows:
1 The Contractor shall supply the following equipment for the use of the
Engineer’s Representative for the duration of the Contract:
(i) Full set of Total Station Equipment.
Comprising:
Qty 4 No. Total Station with internal memory
Qty 8 Nos. Target Set (Tribrach, Adaptor and Prism with holder).
Qty 4 No. Pogo with single prism and prism holder
Qty16 Nos. Tripod (Wild GST 20 or equivalent)
Other accessories like Batteries, Cables, Battery chargers, Carrying
Case etc.
(ii) Levelling Instrument.
Comprising:
Qty 5 No. Automatic Sprit level.
Qty 5 No. Tripod (Wild GST 10 or equivalent)
Qty 10 Nos. Levelling staff with bubble. Target Set
(iii) Other Survey Accessories.
Qty 12 Nos. 50 metre steel tape
Qty 12 Nos. 30 metre steel tape
Qty 12 Nos. 30 metre Glass Fibre Plastic / Nylon Tape
Qty 50 Nos. 5 metre pocket tape
Qty 10 Nos. 1 metre folding measure
Qty 10 Nos. 1 metre spirit level
Qty 10 Nos. Thermometers
Qty 30 Nos. Ranging Rods
Surveying pins - Number as required
SECTION 1: GENERAL
Qty 8 Nos. Optical square
Qty 12 Nos. Lump hammer (4 lbs.);
Qty 12 Nos. Sledge hammer (7 lbs.);
Qty 12 Nos. Portable “surveying” safety sign
Surveying marking materials - Number as required
Qty 12 Nos. Surveying umbrella
Qty 12 Nos. Torch (9 volt);
Qty 12 Nos. Plumb bobs and lines;
String chalk lines - Number as required
Qty 12 Nos. Safety harness;
Surveyors’ field books - Number as required.
(iv) GPS Equipment.
Qty 3 Nos. - GPS Surveying Units suitable for use in static survey
mode for control observations and in Real Time Kinematic (RTK)
mode for detail surveying.
The units must be capable of achieving the following accuracies.
Measurement Performance & Accuracy
Accuracy (rms) Code differential with DGPS / RTCM 2
DGPS / RTCM: Typically 25 cm (rms)
Accuracy (rms) with Real-Time (RTK)
Standard of compliance: Compliance with ISO17123-8
Rapid static (phase): Horizontal: 5 mm + 0.5 ppm (rms)
Static mode after initialization: Vertical: 10 mm + 0.5 ppm (rms)
Kinematic (phase): Horizontal: 10 mm + 1 ppm (rms)
Moving mode after initialization: Vertical: 20 mm + 1 ppm (rms)
Accuracy (rms) with Post Processing
Static (phase) with long observations: Horizontal: 3 mm + 0.1 ppm (rms)
Vertical: 3.5 mm + 0.4 ppm (rms)
Static and rapid static (phase): Horizontal: 5 mm + 0.5 ppm (rms)
Vertical: 10 mm + 0.5 ppm (rms)
Kinematic (phase): Horizontal: 10 mm + 1 ppm (rms)
Vertical: 20 mm + 1 ppm (rms)
11.4.7 Telephones and Facsimile Machines
Add new paragraph 3 and 4 as follows:
3 For Type 3 Offices, the Contractor shall supply and install a telephone at each
desk, reception and the meeting room. Each telephone shall be connected to
a private address box exchange (PABX) system. The Contractor shall also
supply and install 2 facsimile machines as specified in paragraph 3. The
SECTION 1: GENERAL
telephones, PABX system and facsimile shall conform to the relevant
provisions of any Ooredoo standard or requirement.
4 The telephones, PABX system and facsimile machines shall be returned to
the contractor at the end of the maintenance period. The contractor shall be
responsible for the maintenance of the equipment by the manufacturers’
agent throughout the Work order. In addition, the contractor shall be
responsible for supply of all necessary toner, ink cartridges, plain white paper
and all other consumables required for the facsimile machines as required.
Add new Sub-clause 11.4.8 as follows:
11.4.8 Electronic Collaborative Document and Data Transfer Platform
1 As part of the initiative to use the most up-to-date technology for the
Expressway Programme, the Authority and the Engineer (PMC) intend to
implement an electronic cloud based document management and data
transfer platform. This system will facilitate the transfer of drawings, BIM
models, reports, schedules and other documents and enable all Programme
participants to have online access, based on their access rights.
The system will be provided by the Contractor and the costs shall be covered
under the Provisional Sum included in the Bills of Quantities on instruction by
the Engineer.
PART 13 SETTING OUT OF THE WORKS

13.3 LEVELS AND REFERENCE GRID
13.3.2 Site Grid
Delete paragraphs 1 and 2 and substitute with the following:
1 Should the Contractor choose to establish a local site grid then the grid shall
be tied to the Qatar National Grid and a survey report provided to the
Engineer which establishes the process for conversion between the two.
13.5 SETTING OUT
13.5.1 Setting Out of the Works
Delete paragraph 2 and substitute with the following
2 The Contractor shall be responsible for:
(a) True and proper settings out of the Works in relation to reference data
given in the Project Documentation including Civil 3D design model.
(b) Accurately setting out the positions, levels and dimensions of all parts
of the Works.
13.5.2 Setting Out of Works on Private Land
Add the following paragraphs after Paragraph 2:
3 MME are in the process of revising the ROW boundaries as required to
facilitate the project. The Contractor shall obtain the non-objected ROW
boundaries from MME electronically for the purposes of setting out.
4 The Contractor shall obtain approval from MME to enter such properties
where the ROW has been revised in order to set out the works.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
5 The Contractor will obtain any approvals or permits necessary to carry out
Works on Private Land or in any location that does not lie within the ROW and
within the Limit of Works.
PART 16 TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS
16.1 GENERAL
16.1.6 Traffic Safety and Control Officers
Refer PWA IAN 13 /14 for new Sub-Clause 16.1.6.
16.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC DIVERSIONS
16.2.1 General Requirements
Delete paragraph 3 and substitute with following:
3 Where paved carriageways, unpaved carriageways or ramps are required,
they shall be provided and maintained to a standard suitable in all respects
for the class or classes of traffic or pedestrians requiring to use them. The
surface provided shall be equivalent to the surface of the existing
carriageway or footway.
16.2.2 Maintenance of Traffic flow
Refer PWA IAN 13 / 14 for new Sub-Clauses 1 to 12
Add new paragraph 13 as follows:
13 The Contractor shall allow in his pricing for maintaining existing highways
within the Project Site is a safe condition at all times.
Add new Parts 16.2.3, 16.2.4 and 16.2.5 as follows:
16.2.3 Notice to Public on Road Closures
1 Upon approval from Engineer's Representative on any road closure for the
purpose of carrying out the Works of Authority, the Contractor shall place a
sufficient notification to the general public in local newspapers, coloured and
both in Arabic and English languages at least one (1) week and three (3) days
prior to the road closure. The contents of notification shall be non-objected by
the Engineer and the extent shall not be less than a half of the standard size
page of a reputed local newspaper. In order to evident the notification the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a copy as appeared on the
newspaper on the same day of the notification. Notice is to be sent to the
Engineer for approval ten (10) days prior.
16.2.4 Maintenance of Roads/Diversions
1 The Contractors shall maintain the roads and diversions together with road
signs and markings within the site in a safe condition until such time as the
Engineer issues instructions to remove them.
2 All costs in connection with maintenance of roads/diversions shall be included
for in the Contract Price.
16.2.5 Maintenance of Existing Roads within the Right of Way
1 The Contractor shall maintain all existing roads and highways that fall within
the Right of Way that forms part of the works site.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
PART 20 CLEARANCE OF SITE
20.2 FINAL CLEARING
20.2.3 The Site
Refer PWA IAN 13 /14 for changes to Paragraph 3(b).
PART 21 FINAL INSPECTION AND HANDOVER PROCEDURES

21.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR INSPECTION AND HANDOVER
21.1.2 Pre-requisite for final inspection
7 The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements contained in Appendix
2 – Asset Affairs Project Handover Procedural Document.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
APPENDIX 1
VISUAL DESIGN OF BRANDED-HOARDING AND SIGNBOARDS SPECIFICATION
SECTION 1: GENERAL
APPENDIX 1 – VISUAL DESIGN OF BRANDED-HOARDING AND SIGNBOARDS
SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 24
1.1 VISUAL DESIGN OF BRANDED-HOARDING SPECIFICATION ....................................... 24
1.1.1 Visual Design Requirements for Branded-Hoarding –
Construction Site ................................................................................................................ 25
1.1.2 Visual Design Requirements for Branded-Hoarding –
Site Office ............................................................................................................................ 28
1.2 VISUAL DESIGN OF SIGNBOARDS
SPECIFICATION .................................................................................................................. 30
SECTION 1: GENERAL
1. SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 VISUAL DESIGN OF BRANDED-HOARDING SPECIFICATION
The Visual Design of Branded-Hoarding Specification outlines the design requirements for
the branded-hoarding.
It is imperative that the Construction Contractor strictly adheres to the specifications below
when designing branded-hoardings as the consistent use across all Expressway Programme
project sites will help create a strong visual message, emphasise the high level of
investment by ASHGHAL in Qatar’s future whilst generating awareness and interest in these
important projects.
There are two-types of branded-hoarding:
1) construction site branded hoarding;
2) site office branded hoarding.
Construction site branded hoarding is to be provided as shown on the contract drawings.
The Construction Contractor must prepare a map that outlines the locations where the
branded-hoarding will be installed across the project site and include it within Appendix C of
the project’s Public Communications Plan for approval.
Site office branded hoarding as required under Schedule A [Project Brief] Part 4 [Project
Data] shall be provided as specified below.
Hoardings shall be made of marine quality film faced plywood or powder coated steel sheet
or similar non-objected material, supported by rails and soldiers and suitably back stayed to
resist wind loading. The contractor is to provide calculations to demonstrate the suitability of
his proposed hoarding structure for approval by the Engineer. The hoarding shall be 2.40
metres high continuous and be suitable for the fixing of advertising fabric.
The advertising fabric is to be securely and neatly bonded to the hoarding structure. It must
be visually designed by the Contractor according to the requirements below, and non-
objected by the Engineer prior to printing and installation. The non-objected visual design
must be printed in high resolution on advertising fabric suitable for outdoor use; the project
pictures to be electronically provided by the Engineer.
The Contractor must maintain the hoarding, keep it clean and repair any damage to the
approval of the Engineer.
From time to time as work progresses, it may be necessary to move hoardings due to re-
alignment of temporary traffic diversions and the like. The Contractor is to allow for all such
moves/relocations and ensure that the branded hoarding is maintained as non-objected by
the Engineer originally (in the correct sequence and to the correct visual design
requirements).
The Construction Contractor must also design the branded-hoarding according to the
specifications below and include the designs within Appendix D of the project’s Public
Communications Plan for approval.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
Note that this specification does not outline the requirements for other types of hoarding that
may need to be installed for project and safety purposes.
1.1.1 Visual Design Requirements for Branded-Hoarding – Construction Site

Dimension Panel dimension = 400cm length × 240 cm height.
s
For panels that require different dimensions to those outlined above,
please consult directly with the Engineer’s Public Communications team.
Panel Colour C M Y K Logo
backgroun choice
d colour
A C039 M100 Y040 K018
B C075 M001 Y039 K000
C C013 M018 Y038 K000
D C000 M000 Y000 K000
Do not mix the different colours together. Each panel (as per ‘Panel
sequence’ below) must follow a particular sequence and each sequence
(and panel) must be the same background colour. Once a sequence is
complete, if is fine to switch colours.
Graphic Panel 1: ASHGHAL logo
elements
Resolution 200 dpi at 100% size
Line 10cm, distance from the top – 70cm
thickness
Logo size 235cm x 135cm
SECTION 1: GENERAL
Spacing
Panel 2: Qatar Deserves The Best

thickness
Arabic Name: Frutiger LT Arabic 55 Roman
message
Size: 55 Roman 1065 pt
- Font
English Name: Frutiger LT Arabic 65 Bold
message
Size: 65 Bold 780 pt
- Font
Spacing
Panel 3: Image, website and project name

thickness
Image Size: 200cm x 140cm
Resolution: no less than 100 pixels/inch
SECTION 1: GENERAL
Website Name: Frutiger LT Arabic 65 Bold
- Font Size: Medium 350 pt
Project name Name: Frutiger LT Arabic 75 Black
- Font Size: 75 Black 320 pt
Leading: 500 pt
Spacing
Panel 4: Safety Messages

thickness
Arabic and Name: Frutiger LT Arabic 75 Black
English
Size: 75 Black 450 pt
message
Leading: 600 pt
- Font
Non-
objected key
messages
Spacing
SECTION 1: GENERAL
Panel Please do not mix the different colours together. Each panel (as per ‘Panel
sequence sequence’ below) must follow a particular sequence and each sequence
complete, if is fine to switch colours. See ‘Branded Hoarding Example’
below.
Panel 1 ASHGHAL logo
Panel 2 Qatar Deserves The Best
Panel 3 Image A, website and project name
Panel 4 Safety message
Panel 5 Image B, website and project name
Panel 6 Qatar Deserves The Best
Pattern continues as necessary – depending on the number of images.
1.1.2 Visual Design Requirements for Branded-Hoarding – Site Office
Dimension Panel dimension = 1.8 metres length for logo panel and 3.6 metres for
s image panel x 2.4 metres height
For panels that require different dimensions to those outlined above,
please consult directly with the Engineer’s Public Communications team.
Panel
backgroun
Colour C M Y K Logo
d colouring
choice
A C039 M100 Y040 K018
SECTION 1: GENERAL
B C075 M001 Y039 K000
C C013 M018 Y038 K000
D C000 M000 Y000 K000
Please do not mix the different colours together. Each panel (as per ‘Panel
sequence’ below) must follow a particular sequence and each sequence
complete, if is fine to switch colours. See ‘Branded Hoarding Example’
below.
Graphic ASHGHAL logo and project image
elements
Hoarding 1.8 metres long (logo panel) and 3.6 metres (image
dimension panel) × 2.4 metres high.
s
Logo 200 dpi at 100% size
resolution
Image Images (3D rendering) should not include other
transportation modes (e.g. planes, trains etc.)
Resolution 200 dpi
Spacing
Panel Panel 1 ASHGHAL logo and 3D rendered project image #A

sequence
Panel 2 ASHGHAL logo and 3D rendered project image #B
Panel 3 ASHGHAL logo and 3D rendered project image #C
Panel 4 ASHGHAL logo and 3D rendered project image #D
The pattern continues as necessary – depending on a number of non-
objected project images
SECTION 1: GENERAL
Branded
Hoarding
example
1.2 Visual Design of Signboards Specification

The Visual Design of Signboards Specification has been developed using content directly
from the ASHGHAL Brand Guidelines and outlines the visual design requirements for
Expressway Programme signboards.
The Contractor must visually design the project’s signboards according to the figure below
and include the design within Appendix E of the project’s Public Communications Plan for
approval. The Construction Contractor must also develop a map that outlines the locations
for where the signboards will be installed across the project site in accordance with the
contract drawings and include it within Appendix C of the project’s Public Communications
Plan for approval.
In addition to the requirements set-out below, the project-specific image selected by the
Contractor must be a resolution of 200dpi (at least). Note that this specification does not
outline the engineering/design requirements for the installation of the physical structure.
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
APPENDIX 2
ASSET AFFAIRS PROJECT HANDOVER PROCEDURAL DOCUMENT
SECTION 1: GENERAL
APPENDIX 2 – ASSET AFFAIRS PROJECT HANDOVER PROCEDURAL DOCUMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 4
2 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS .................................................................................. 6
3 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ..................................................................................................... 7
4 PROJECT AND HANDOVER PROCESS FLOWCHART ...................................................... 9
5 ASSETS AFFAIRS PROJECT AND HANDOVER REQUIREMENTS ................................. 15
6 KEY SUCCESS FACTORS ................................................................................................. 21
APPENDIX A – COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................................. 22
APPENDIX B – CONTACT DETAILS .................................................................................. 24
APPENDIX C – ROADS O&M CHECKLISTS ..................................................................... 25
APPENDIX D – DRAINAGE O&M CHECKLISTS ............................................................... 42
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 1: GENERAL
SECTION 3: GROUND INVESTIGATION
SECTION 3: GROUND INVESTIGATION
PART 3 PITS AND TRENCHES

3.2 PITS AND TRENCHES GENERALLY
3.2.5 Backfilling and Restoration
5
Geophysical surveys to be conducted with reference to QHDM – Volume 2 – Part 15
Guidelines for Bore Hole depths and their spacing with reference to Table 4.1 and
4.2 of QHDM – Volume 2 – Part 15 Content 8.
Sampling techniques to comply with QHDM – Volume 2 – Part 15 Content 8, Table
4.5.
Minimum number of samples to be tested from particular soil and rock strata should
be in compliance with Table 4.6 and 4.7 of QHDM – Volume 2 – Part 15
Content 8.
Design considerations, Engineering parameters and testing requirements to comply
with Table 4.80 QHDM – Volume 2 – Part 15 Content 8.
MASW test also to be conducted for roads
PART 4 SOIL SAMPLING

4.4 GROUNDWATER SAMPLES
1 Groundwater samples shall be taken from each exploratory hole where
groundwater is encountered. Where more than one groundwater level is
found, each one shall be sampled separately. Where water has been
previously added, the water shall be bailed out before sampling so that only
groundwater is present. The sample volume shall not be less than 0.25 litres.
Where groundwater is to be sampled from rotary drilled holes using water
flush the sample shall, where practicable, be taken at the start of the
subsequent shift; the hole having been bailed out at the end of the previous
shaft. A sample of the flushing water shall be taken for analysis at the same
time.
Ground water sample properties determined from Laboratory tests should be
in compliance with QHDM – Volume 2 – Part 15 Content 8 Table 4.80
PART 5 IN-SITU TESTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING

5.2 TESTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING GENERALLY
5.2.2 Instrumentation and Monitoring
6 Previously constructed boreholes and piezometers within the Right of Way as
well as those put down by the Contractor shall be suitably marked and
SECTION 4: FOUNDATION AND RETAINING WALLS
protected for as long as practicable during the execution of the Works. The
Engineer’s written agreement shall be obtained before any of these are
destroyed. Any instrumentation destroyed without prior agreement shall
immediately be replaced by the Contractor. Regular monitoring of water levels
in these piezometers and boreholes is to be conducted throughout the entire
period of the Works. The regularity of the monitoring shall be to the written
approval of the Engineer
Typical instrumentation to be done with reference to QHDM – Volume 2 – Part 15
Content 8 Table 4.15.
5.3 TESTS
5.3.2 Tests in accordance with BS 5930
Table 3.10
S.NO Recommended Tests Testing Standard Remarks

1 Cone Penetration Test QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content7.3
2 Dynamic Cone Penetration Test QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content7.4
3 Pressure meter Tests QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 7.6
4 Packer Tests QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 7.7

5 Permeability test Rising/ Falling/ Constant QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 7.8
6 Infiltration Testing QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 7.9
7 Seismic Test QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 8.3
8 Electrical Resistivity QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 8.4
9 Ground Penetrating Radar QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 8.5
10 Micro Gravity QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 8.6
11 Bore Hole Geophysics QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 8.7
12 Procurement of Geophysical survey work QHDM ‐ Volume 2 ‐ P‐art 15 Content 8.8

SECTION 4: FOUNDATION AND RETAINING WALLS
Table 4.10
S.NO Strata Recommended Tests Testing Standard Remarks

Moisture Content BS1377 Part 2 Clause 3
Atterberg Limits BS1377 Part 2 Clause 4.5 and 5
Sieve Analysis BS1377 Part 2 Clause 9.2
Hydrometer Analysis BS1377 Part 2 Clause 9.5
Modifies Proctors Compaction Test BS1377 Part 4 Clause 3.5/3.6
Sulphate Content BS1377 Part 3 Section 5
1 Soil
Chloride Content BS1377 Part 3 Section 7
PH Value BS1377 Part 3 Section 9
Total Sulphur Content BS EN 1744‐1 : 1990, CI11
Organic Matter BS1377 Part 3 Section 3
Uniaxial Compressive Strength ASTM D7012 ‐ 10 Method C
Direct Shear Test BS1377 Part 7 Clause 4.5.4
Uniaxial Compressive Strength ASTM D7012 ‐ 10 Method C
Uniaxial compressive Strength with
determination of young’s modulus ASTM D7012 ‐ 10 Method D
Porosity of Rock ISRM Suggested Method
2 Rock Bulk Density ISRM Suggested Method
Poisson’s Ratio ASTM D7012 ‐ 10
Point Load Index Test ASTM D5731 ‐ 08
Splitting Tensile Strength Test ASTM D3967 ‐ 08
Crechar Abrasivity Test ASTM D7625 ‐ 10
Slake Durability ASTM D4644 ‐ 04
Water Soluble Sulphate BS1377 ‐ Part 3 Clause 5.5
Water Soluble Chloride BS1377 ‐ Part 3 Clause 7.2
3 Chemical PH BS1377 ‐ Part 3 Clause 9.5
Carbonate Content BS1377 ‐ Part 3 Clause 6.3
Magnesium Content ASTM C 25 ‐ 11 Clause 31.0

SECTION 5: CONCRETE
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
PART 2 AGGREGATES
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.4 Source Approval
9 Refer IAN 13 / 14
2.2 QUALITY AND TESTING
Delete Table 2.1 and substitute with the following:
Refer IAN 13 / 14
PART 3 CONCRETE PLANTS

3.2 SOURCE APPROVAL
Insert the following sentence at the start of paragraph 1:
Refer IAN 13 / 14
3.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Insert the following sentence at the end of paragraph 1:
In order to reduce the risk of false setting, cement delivery temperature shall not
exceed 70°C.
PART 4 WATER
4.2 QUALITY OF WATER
Add the following sentence to paragraph 1:
Water for mixing and curing concrete shall not contain total chemical impurities
exceeding 2000 ppm and, in particular, the sulphate content shall not exceed 1000
ppm and the chloride content shall not exceed 500 ppm.
4.3 TESTING AND SAMPLING
Add the following sentence to paragraph 1:
The contractor shall provide to the Engineer chemical analysis certificates on a
monthly basis. Analysis’ tests and frequency shall be defined in the contractor’s
Quality Plan and non-objected by the Engineer.
Substitute the title of Table 4.2 with the following:
Chemical Limitations for Mixing and Curing Water for Concrete
PART 5 ADMIXTURES
5.2 USE OF ADMIXTURES
5.2.1 General
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
8 The contractor shall provide a delivery certificate for each Admixtures delivery
on Site. The certificate shall include at least the provenance, storage
conditions and expiry date of the Admixtures delivered batch.
PART 6 PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS

6.1 GENERAL
6.1.2 References
Add the following references to standards under paragraph 1 as follows:
Concrete Society Report 163 – Guide to the design of concrete structures in the
Arabian Peninsula
EXW-GENL-0000-PE-KBR-IP-00009 – Design Criteria for Highway Structures
(Revision A1)
6.6 DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES
6.6.1 Concrete
Add the following under paragraph 11 Fibre-Reinforced Concrete as follows:
(q) Concrete which may be exposed to high temperatures during a fire
shall include polypropylene (PP) fibres to limit explosive spalling of the
concrete face and reduce the possibility of loss of structural integrity
as a result. For this reason, the underpass walls supporting roof
structures and underpass roof structures shall include PP fibres and
shall be included in the mix for all walls supporting roof structures
extending to the nearest external wall joint, and in both formed in
place concrete and precast concrete roof units that are exposed at the
roof soffit.
(r) For concrete mix design described in q) above, the materials and mix
design to be used are as described in QCS 2014 and this specification
with the addition of PP fibres to the concrete mix at a dosage rate of
1.5 kg/m3 of concrete. PP fibres shall be 18-32 micron monofilament
polypropylene fibres specifically manufactured for use as a concrete
additive and so certified by the manufacturer, and containing no
reprocessed olefin materials.
(s) Aggregates for fire resisting concrete shall have a low quartz content
and shall not contain quartzite. No other additions or amendments to
the specified concrete mix are required.
PART 7 BATCHING AND MIXING

7.4 READY-MIXED CONCRETE
7.4.1 General
17 Refer IAN 13 / 14
PART 8 TRANSPORTATION AND PLACING OF CONCRETE

8.3 PLACING CONCRETE
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
8.3.3 Placing
Add new paragraphs 25 to 27 as follows:
25 The Contractor shall submit daily return sheets in respect of all concrete
placed during the previous day including information about the position of the
pour, concrete grade and volume of concrete.
26 The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record showing the date, time,
weather and temperature conditions of the concrete placed at each part of the
work.
27 Concrete temperature at the time of placement shall conform to Part 6.2.1,
paragraph 6.
PART 9 FORMWORK
9.3 CLASS OF FINISH AND MATERIALS
9.3.1 Unformed Surfaces
1 Refer IAN 13 / 14
Delete paragraph 2 and substitute with the following.
2 The type of finish shall be as specified on IAN009 Design Criteria for Highway
Structures (EXW-GENL-0000-PE-KBR-IP-00009) and the Drawings.
Delete paragraphs 6 and 7
9.3.2 Surface Finish Classifications
2 Refer IAN 13 / 14
9.3.3 Formwork Materials
Delete paragraphs 1, 2 and 3 and substitute with the following:
1 Refer IAN 13 / 14
9.3.4 Exposed Concrete Surfaces Finishes
Delete paragraphs 1 and 4.
9.4 FORMWORK EXECUTION
9.4.11 Cambers
3 Refer IAN 13 / 14
9.7 TOLERANCES
Add the following text at the end of paragraph 1 as follows:
 Twist of planar concrete elements – Permitted deviation 10mm.
 Position on Plan of Foundations
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
- Within 2% of width from the intended position but not greater that
30mm
 Position on Plan of Concrete Elements
- Within 10mm of the intended position.
 Level of Foundations
- Top surface to be within 15mm of the intended level
 Level of horizontal Elements
- Surface to be within 10mm of the intended level subject to allowance
for deflection as agreed with the Engineer.
 Plumb of columns and walls
– Up to 1.5m in height is 5mm, Up to 4m is 10mm, up to 8m is 15mm,
above 8m is maximum 20mm.
Add paragraph 2 as follows:
2 Where constructed elements are not in compliance with permitted tolerances,
the Contractor shall provide a report of non-conformity and propose a
rectification procedure to the Engineer’s approval, with all necessary
justifications.
No repair works shall be started before the rectification procedure is non-
All costs related to the repair works shall be borne by Contractor.
PART 10 CURING
10.2 CURING
10.2.1 General
4 Refer IAN 13 / 14
Add new paragraph 6 and 7 as follows:
6 The Contractor, with the Engineer's approval, shall take the necessary
measures to limit the maximum temperature of concrete during hydration to
70o C. The temperature differential in elements shall also be limited to 25o C.
7 For steam curing method, the curing period may be reduced subject to the
Engineer’s approval.
9 Refer IAN 13 / 14
Rename Part 10.2.4 to read "Curing of Formed and Unformed Surfaces"
10.2.4 Curing of Formed Surfaces
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
2 When the forms are stripped within 10 days of the pour, curing shall continue
by the same method as unformed surfaces for the remainder of the 10 days.
For steam curing method curing period may be reduced subject to the
5 A non-objected curing compound shall be applied to all unformed concrete
surfaces as soon as possible after finishing work is completed. The
Contractor shall ensure that use of the proposed curing compound will not
affect the bonding of subsequent coatings.
6 The compound shall be applied as directed by the manufacturer with non-
objected spray equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s specification.
The equipment shall be maintained in good order at all times and a complete
back-up set shall be available at all times.
7 As soon as the curing compound has dried, the concrete surfaces shall be
covered with overlapping heavy gauge clear plastic sheeting. Immediately at
the start of the following day, the plastic sheeting shall be temporarily
removed, the concrete covered with pre-soaked, washed hessian and the
plastic sheeting replaced. The hessian shall be kept damp continuously until
completion of the curing period. All curing water shall be of potable quality
and permanently available at the location of the concrete pour.
8 All concrete shall be cured as above for a minimum of 10 days after the day
of pour and the Contractor shall provide full time attendance on site dedicated
to concrete curing.
10.2.5 Curing of Unformed Surfaces
3 A non-objected curing compound shall be applied to all unformed concrete
surfaces as soon as possible after finishing work is completed. The
Contractor shall ensure that use of the proposed curing compound will not
affect the bonding of subsequent coatings.
4 The compound shall be applied as directed by the manufacturer with non-
objected spray equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s specification.
The equipment shall be maintained in good order at all times and a complete
back-up set shall be available at all times.
5 As soon as the curing compound has dried, the concrete surfaces shall be
covered with overlapping heavy gauge clear plastic sheeting. Immediately at
the start of the following day, the plastic sheeting shall be temporarily
removed, the concrete covered with pre-soaked, washed hessian and the
plastic sheeting replaced. The hessian shall be kept damp continuously until
completion of the curing period. All curing water shall be of potable quality
and permanently available at the location of the concrete pour.
6 All concrete shall be cured as above for a minimum of 10 days after the day
of pour and the Contractor shall provide full time attendance on site dedicated
to concrete curing.
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
PART 11 REINFORCEMENT
11.1 GENERAL
11.1.2 References
Add the following references to standards under Part 11.1.2 as follows:
(Revision A1)
BS EN 10080 - Steel for the reinforcement of concrete: Weldable reinforcing steel.
11.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
11.2.1 Reinforcing Bars
1 All main steel reinforcement bars shall be deformed round steel bars Type 2,
Grade B500B or B500C conforming to BS EN 10080 and BS 4449.
Reinforcement shall be cut and bent in accordance with BS 8666. The
characteristic yield strength of reinforcement shall be 500 N/mm2 with a
minimum modulus of elasticity of 190 kN/mm2.
Add new paragraphs , 5, 6 and 7 as follows:
5 & 6 Refer IAN 13 / 14
7 Stainless steel reinforcement shall be Type 1.4436 Grade 500 to BS EN
10088 and to comply with BA84/02 “Use of Stainless Steel Reinforcement in
Highway Structures”.
11.5 FIXING OF REINFORCEMENT
11.5.2 Welding
Add at the beginning of paragraph 1 as follows:
1 Refer IAN 13 / 14
11.5.3 Mechanical Splices
3 Refer IAN 13 / 14
11.5.7 Cover
1 The cover to reinforcement shall not be less than those stated in EXW-GENL-
0000-PE-KBR-IP-00009: Design Criteria for Highway Structures (Rev A2, and
as indicated on the Drawings.
PART 12 JOINTS
12.1.3 Submittals
Delete Paragraph 1.
12.2 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
12.2.1 General
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
Delete paragraphs 1 to 9 inclusive and substitute as follows:
Refer IAN 13 / 14 and add new paragraphs 6 and 7 as follows:
6 The number of construction joints shall be kept to a minimum consistent with
reasonable precautions against the effects of shrinkage; their location shall
take due account of shear and other stresses.
7 Construction joints shall be so made and located as not to impair the strength
of the structure. Provision shall be made for transfer of shear and other forces
through construction joints.
12.2.2 Construction Joints in Water Retaining Structures
Add the following paragraphs after paragraph 9:
13 Early thermal cracking shall be checked in accordance with either of the
following:
BA 24/87 and BD 28/87; or
CIRIA Report C660
The design parameters shall be based on those stated in EXW-GENL-0000-
PE-KBR-IP-00009: Design Criteria for Highway Structures.
12.3 MOVEMENT JOINTS
12.3.1 General
4 Refer IAN 13 / 14
12.3.2 Joint Filler
5 Refer IAN 13 / 14
12.3.3 Joint Sealants
Refer IAN 13 / 14
PART 14 PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS FOR CONCRETE

14.1 GENERAL
14.1.2 References
Add the following references to standards under Part 14.1.2 as follows:
IAN 004 / 14 – Specification for Waterproofing of Cut and Cover Tunnel and
Underpass Highway Structures
IAN 009 – Design Criteria for Highway Structures (Revision A2)
IAN 027 / 14 – Specification for Protective Coating for Above Ground Concrete
Surfaces of Highway Structures (Revision A1)
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
IAN 028 / 14 – Specification for Waterproofing of Concrete Slabs on Highway
Structures
Concrete Society Technical Report 50, Guide to surface treatments for protection
and enhancement of concrete
14.1.4 Quality Assurance
Add new paragraphs 6, 7, 8 and 9 as follows:
6 Waterproofing materials of each type required, shall be provided from a single
manufacturer as far as possible. Secondary materials shall be provided as
recommended by the manufacturer of primary materials
7 All waterproofing works and related protection shall be installed by same
applicator.
8 Waterproofing sub-contractor certification: The Contractor shall submit
manufacturer's approval of applicator.
9 Job Conditions:
(i) Waterproofing work shall proceed only when weather conditions
comply with manufacturer's recommendations, and which will permit
materials to be applied in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
14.1.8 General Requirements for all Treatment
4 Refer IAN 13 / 14
14.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
14.3.1 General
2 All concrete surfaces below ground level shall be protected with waterproofing
membrane conforming to PWA-IAN-00009 – Design Criteria for Highway
Structures (Revision A2).
Add paragraph 4 as follows:
4 The waterproofing shall be terminated 150 mm above the ground level,
protective board or other means shall be provided to protect the waterproofing
membrane. The protective coating shall be applied over the below ground
coating / waterproofing and shall continue for a minimum of 150 mm below
the ground level.
14.3.2 Materials
Add paragraphs 4 and 5 as follows:
4 Membrane to horizontal surfaces beneath ground slab and foundation level
shall comprise 1.2mm nominal thickness HDPE pre-formed membrane
incorporating an adhesive upper surface capable of forming a chemically
reactive bond with fresh concrete. Grace Preprufe 300R or equal and non-
objected. The membrane shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
5 Membrane to vertical outer surfaces of abutments shall comprise 1.5mm
nominal thickness membrane incorporating an adhesive surface on one side.
Grace Bituthene 8000 HC or equal and non-objected together with Primer B1
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
and Bituthene LM or equal and non-objected. The membrane shall be applied
and protected strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
14.3.3 Waterproofing Membrane
1 The waterproofing material shall conform to the material property
requirements stated in:
(a) PWA-IAN-00004 – Specification for Waterproofing of Cut and Cover
Tunnel and Underpass Highway Structures (Revision A1)
(b) PWA-IAN-00028 – Specification for Waterproofing of Concrete Slabs
on Highway Structures (Revision A1)
3 Refer IAN 13 / 14
14.3.4 Application
1 Refer IAN 13 / 14
14.6 PLASTIC SHEET LINER FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
14.6.5 Basic Sheet Dimensions
Add the following to paragraph 1:
The minimum thickness of PVC interlock sheet for lining precast concrete pipes shall
be 2.0mm.
Add new Sub-Clause 14.7 as follows:
14.7 WATERPROOFING BELOW GROUND CONCRETE SURFACES
14.7.1 General
1 Refer IAN 13 / 14
14.8 Concrete Slab Waterproofing
14.8.1 General
1 N/A
14.9 Protective Coating of Highway Structures
14.9.1 General
Protective coating on all exposed surfaces of highway structures shall be in
accordance with IAN 027 Specification for Protective Coating for Above Ground
Concrete Surfaces of Highway Structures.
PART 15 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.2 References
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
Refer IAN 13 / 14
15.1.4 System Description
2 Refer IAN 13 / 14
15.2 PLACING TEMPERATURE
6 Refer IAN 13 / 14
15.8 PLACING AND FINISHING
4 Refer IAN 13 / 14
PART 16 MISCELLANEOUS
16.1 GENERAL
16.1.2 References
Add new tests as follows:
Refer IAN 13 / 14
16.2 PAVEMENT QUALITY CONCRETE
16.2.3 Cement
1 Refer IAN 13 / 14
16.2.4 Water
1 REFER IAN 13 / 14
16.6 REPAIR OF CONCRETE
16.6.1 General
1 Refer IAN 13 / 14
2 Refer IAN 13 / 14
16.6.2 Honeycombing or Spalling
1 Refer IAN 13 / 14
16.6.5 Repair Methodology
The changes to paragraphs given under this clause number in IAN 13 /14 shall be
taken to be changes to paragraphs under Clause 16.6.2 of QCS 2014.
PART 17 STRUCTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
17.1 GENERAL
17.1.2 References
SECTION 5: CONCRETE
Refer IAN EXW-GENL-0000-PE-KBR-IP-00013
Add the following reference to standards under Part 17.1.2 as follows:
EN 1992-2 Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Concrete bridges – Design
and detailing rules.
17.1.9 Design Loadings, Actions and Structural Members Selection
7 Cover to steel shall be in accordance with EXW-GENL-0000-PE-KBR-IP-
00009 and as specified on the Drawings.
PART 18 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

18.1 GENERAL
18.1.2 References
Include after paragraph 1 the following:
1 Refer IAN 13 / 14 and also add the following:
18.1.3 Submittals
Add new paragraphs 5 and 6 as follows:
5 Working Drawings
Refer IAN 13 / 14
6 Composite Placing Drawings
Refer IAN 13 / 14
18.2 PRESTRESSING
18.2.1 General
3 Refer IAN 13 / 14
18.2.3 Sheaths and Cores
8 Refer IAN 13 / 14
18.2.4 Anchorages
4 Refer IAN 13 / 14
5 Refer IAN 13 / 14
Delete Sub-Clauses 18.2.7, 18.2.8 and 18.2.9 and substitute with the following:
18.2.7 Grouting and Duct Systems for Post-tensioned Tendons
Refer IAN 13 / 14
SECTION 6: ROADWORKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.2 BENCH MARKS AND MONUMENTS
1.2.3 Setting Out
6 The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the
work in relation to original points, lines and levels of references given in the
Drawings and 3D model and for the accuracy of the positions, levels,
dimensions and alignment of all parts of the work, and for any delay or loss
resulting from errors made in completing the setting out of the work.
1.4 MATERIALS TESTING
7 The Contractor shall employ a suitably qualified Engineer whose prime
function will be to act as Materials Engineer to the non-objection of the
Engineer.
1.6 TEMPORARY FENCING
Refer PWA 13 / 14 for changes to this Clause
PART 3 EARTHWORKS
3.3 MATERIALS
3.3.5 Water
1 Potable or brackish water shall be used for all earthwork operations, except
that only potable water shall be used for compaction of backfill material within
five meters from all surfaces of a structure and for the backfill of all service
trenches.
3.5 EXCAVATION GENERAL
3.5.1 Removal of Unsuitable Soil and Soft Spots
6 Unsuitable excavated material shall be removed and carted away to non-
objected dumping areas, after approval has been received from the relevant
Authority and the Engineer.
10 The Contractor shall probe for voids, using a pattern of holes agreed with the
Engineer, beneath all underpasses, structural foundations and where
limestone materials are encountered. Where such voids are identified, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposals for treatment.
11 Probing shall comprise as a minimum:
(a) A cored borehole to 30m at each bridge abutment and pier/footing
where an existing cored borehole has not already been drilled within
the abutment and pier/footing footprint
(b) A probing hole at each pile location for piled structures (e.g. road
bridges, pedestrian bridges, sign gantries, lighting poles and ITS
gantries) to 6m below the pile toe
(c) Probing holes to 20m depth on a 5m grid below pad structural
footings.
(d) A cored borehole to 20m at a minimum spacing of 100 to 200m along
underpass retaining walls (each side) where an existing cored
borehole has not already been drilled
(e) Probing below underpasses on a 10m by 10m grid to at least 20m
depth
Prior to conducting the probing holes, geophysical traverse lines shall be
conducted along the line of each underpass side wall and along each side of
MSE wall\ embankments higher than 5m in height where an existing
geophysical void survey has not already been conducted.
The geophysical survey shall be undertaken using Multi channel Analysis of
Surface Waves (MASW), Two Dimensional Electrical Resistivity Tomography
or other geophysical method proposed by the Contractor for approval by the
Engineer which meets the objectives of the survey. Any proposed system
must be capable of producing an apparent resistivity profile to at least 25m
below ground surface level with a resolution (vertical and lateral) sufficient to
detect voids > 1 m in diameter and provide detailed information on its
probable location.
Any anomalies identified in this geophysical survey, or the existing
geophysical surveys, shall be specifically targeted with the subsequent
probing to confirm if a void exists at that location.
Results of all geophysical investigations, cored boreholes and probing shall
be submitted to the Engineer together with an interpretation of the
investigation, a summary of voids encountered and recommendations and
methodology for treatment.
3.5.2 Excavating High Level Areas
4 In all excavations, the groundwater level shall be maintained at least 1200mm
below the formation level.
3.6 FILLING GENERAL
3.6.4 Contractors Imported Fill
Paragraphs 1 to 9 inclusive shall be deleted and substitute with the following:
1 The Contractor’s haul and traffic management arrangements shall be subject
to approval by the Engineer before commencement of the Works.
3.7 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND FILLING
3.7.3 Dewatering
3 The Contractor’s submitted drawings shall show the arrangement, location
and depths of the proposed dewatering system if required. A complete
description of the equipment and materials to be used and the procedure to
be followed shall be shown, together with the standby equipment, standby
power supply, and the proposed location or locations of points of discharge of
water. The Contractor shall be required to obtain written approval from the
Authority for this discharge.
6 Dewatering activities shall be conducted in accordance with the guidelines
contained within the document Management of Construction Dewatering
Guideline Manual, March 2014, which is available from the ASHGHAL
website.
The Contractor shall apply and be responsible for obtaining all licenses,
permits and permissions required in association with dewatering and
preparing all documents identified in the Construction Dewatering Guidelines,
including the risk assessments, risk management and monitoring plans.
Geo-environmental investigations to date have identified areas of
groundwater contamination. Therefore the Contractor shall also prepare a
geo-environmental study report on dewatering which shall address, for each
buried structure, as a minimum the following:
(a) Time required for construction dewatering
(b) Flow rate of the dewatering discharge
(c) Required drawdown for construction
(d) Method of treatment/disposal of contaminated groundwater
(e) Method of construction dewatering based on all the above findings
The findings and conclusions shall be included in a geo-environmental study
report to be included with an application for discharge.
3.7.4 Excavations for Structures
9 The Contractor may be required to undertake a pattern of rotary percussive
probe holes within the footprint of critical structures where there is considered
to be a hazard from voids within the rock mass beneath. Details shall be
proposed by the Contractor and agreed with the Engineer.
3.7.7 Backfill Adjacent to Structures
1 As per Section 3.11, IAN 005/14 shall be referred to for procedures relating to
backfilling adjacent to highways structures. For all other structures, this
Clause 3.7.7 applies.
3.10 TESTING
3.10.1 General
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying adherence to the
specification of moisture content, compaction, thickness California Bearing
Ratio and other properties of the materials or workmanship, and shall supply
this information to the Engineer for approval before placement of subsequent
layers.
3.10.3 California Bearing Ratio
1 The soaked value of the California Bearing Ratio shall be determined on
specimens compacted at the optimum moisture content and 95 % of the
maximum dry density as per ASTM D1557 after soaking for 4 days in
accordance with ASTM D1883. CBR value shall comply with the minimum
requirement as per Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014).
3.10.4 Testing Levels and Evenness of the Formation
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying adherence to the
specification of levels, evenness and cross fall and shall supply this
information to the Engineer for approval before placement of subsequent
layers.
2 The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer a four-metre straight-
edge and a crown template of sturdy and non-objected design and the
necessary labour to carry out audit checking as required.
6 These tests shall be taken at a minimum rate of one test per 100 m run, In the
event of any failure, the Contractor shall correct the unevenness of the
surface and resubmit the area for non-objection by the Engineer.
Add new Part 3.11:
3.11 Additional Clauses Applicable to Highway Structures
Refer Interim Advice Note No. 005/14 (IAN 005/14) – Specification for
Excavation and Backfill for Highway Structures.
PART 5 ASPHALT WORKS

5.2.6 Asphalt Binder
Delete paragraph 1 (b) and substitute with the following:
1 (b) PG 76-10: The PG76-10 binder shall be used in asphalt mixes for the
top two asphalt layers. This binder type shall be a polymer-modified
binder (PMB) meeting AASHTO M320, M322 and ASTM D6373
specifications in addition to separation test criteria as listed in Table
5.5. Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D140.
4 When bitumen grades PG76-10 H, V or E are specified for heavy, very heavy,
and extra heavy loading, the bitumen shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M332 and will be required to indicate elastic response in percent
recovery when tested in accordance with AASHTO T350 / ASTM D7405.
PART 10 VEHICLE CRASH BARRIERS
10.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
10.1.1 Scope
Delete Paragraph 1 and replace with;
1 This Section of the specification covers the supply, installation and foundation
requirements of the following representative types of vehicle crash barriers.
The definition of each type of barrier is given in the relevant section of the
specification
(a) Permanent Concrete Barriers
10.1.3 Performance Requirements
4 The Contractor shall refer to PWA IAN 002 for safety barrier performance
levels.
Delete Part 10.2 STEEL WIRE ROPE BARRIERS
Delete Part 10.3 TENSIONED CORRUGATED BEAM SAFETY FENCE
Delete Part 10.4 UNTENSIONED CORRUGATED SAFETY FENCE
Delete Part 10.5 OPEN-BOX BEAM SAFETY FENCE
Delete Part 10.6 TENSIONED RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTION SAFETY
FENCE
10.8 CRASH CUSHIONS AND TERMINALS
Add new paragraph 9 as follow:
9 Where designated, permanent or temporary energy crash cushions shall be
provided for the protection of traffic as shown on the drawings or as specified
by the Engineer in accordance with the list of accepted road safety barrier
Systems (Permanent and Temporary) by ASHGHAL (Document No. OM-
PPQ-RSB-002)
Amend Part 10.9 VEHICLE BARRIER UNITS with the following:
10.9 VEHICLE BARRIER UNITS (PERMANENT CONCRETE BARRIERS)
1 Vehicle barrier units and their foundations shall be as per the details shown in
IAN 002.
2 Concrete grade of vehicle barrier units shall be in accordance with the
Ashghal O&M list of non-objected supplier / manufacturer’s requirements,
(Document No. OM-PPQ-RSB-002)
2 Precast barriers shall be cast in 6m length unless otherwise designated by
the supplier / manufacturers installation requirements.
Delete Part 10.11 ALUMINIUM BRIDGE PARAPET
PART 11 KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS

11.1 GENERAL
11.1.1 Scope
1 Section 6, Part 17, Road Drainage
Section 20, Drainage Works for Buildings
11.1.2 References
2 Cycleways and Footways shall be constructed in accordance with Interim
Advice Note 021 / 14 “Cycle Tracks and Footways Pavement Design
Guidelines” published by the Public Works Authority. Should there be any
conflict between the requirements of IAN 021 / 14 and this Particular
Specification, then IAN 021 / 14 shall take precedence.
Refer EXP IAN 13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 8 Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas)
11.2 KERBS
11.2.3 Laying
1 Refer EXP IAN 13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 8 Kerbs, Footways and Paved Areas)
11.4 LAYING PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS
11.6 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PAVED AREAS
PART 12 FENCING
12.1.2 References
Add the following standard drawings to the list:
Authority Standard drawings, specifically:
SD-6-9-101 Chain link Fencing
SD-6-9-104 Chain link Fencing (Gate)
SD-6-9-106 Strained Wire Fencing
SD-6-9-108 Strained Wire Fencing (Gate)
SD-6-9-110 Pedestrian guard Rail
12.2 FENCING GENERALLY
Refer EXP IAN 13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 9 - Fencing)
12.3 CHAIN LINK FENCING
12.3.1 General
Refer EXP IAN 13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 9 - Fencing)
Add the following section
12.6 PEDESTRIAN FENCING
12.6.1 Security self-lock fence system
The following specifications shall be used;
Description Requirements
Wire rod Chemical composition in accordance with EN 10016-2, designation C9D
PVC coating The PVC is to be free of cadmium and the colour RAL 7037
Thickness: minimum 200µm (average of 4 measurements)
Colour: RAL 7037
Adhesion in accordance with EN-ISO 2409 (paint and varnishes test
methods) and EN 10223-7.
Resistance of the PVC to salt spray: 1000 hours
Make a diagonal cross by means of hard metal pointed graving tool,
penetrating through the metal. Tests in accordance with EN-ISO 2409
(paint and varnishes test methods) and ISO 9227
Wire diameter and Wire diameter: 4.00 ± 0.20mm
tolerances
Tolerances are in accordance with EN 10218-2
Mesh sizes and Distance between horizontal wires: 76.2 ± 5.00mm
tolerances
Distance between vertical wires: 12.7 ± 5.00mm
Panel Height : 1500mm
Panel Width : 2000mm
Bending : With 2 rows of decorative shape at top and bottom
Tolerances are in accordance with EN 10223-4
Tensile strength of Horizontal and vertical wires: 450 – 500 N/mm2
wire
Weld shear strength Welds should have a weld strength of not less than 30% of the breaking
load of the wire with the smallest diameter
Base plate All base shall be Grade S 355ML to BSEN 10113-1 and hot dip
galvanised to BSEN ISO 1461:2009 with PVC coated afterwards.
Standard bolt Standard bolt: M8
Washers and nuts: Stainless steel
Anchor bolt Anchor bolt: M10 x 110mm
Tensile strength: Maximum 100N/m
Shear stress: Maximum 11N/m
Coating: Hot dip galvanised to BS7371-6: 1998 ( Or ASTM A153M)
Plastic Cap 1 Number per post (Colour RAL 7037)
Fence Post Post : 90 x 80 Special shape post
Thickness of the post : 1.20 mm
Post Height : 1520mm
Intervals : 2080mm
Coating: Hot dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461; 2009 and PVC coated (
RAL 7037)
The manufacturer shall submit tests methods and results conforming to the above
listed requirements and produce a certificate that the material comply with all
requirements.
PART 13 TRAFFIC SIGNS, MARKINGS AND STUDS

Replace “Qatar Traffic Control Manual” with “Qatar Traffic Manual” wherever it
appears in this Part.
13.1.2 References
The work shall be executed in accordance with the latest versions of the following
documents and IAN’s.
1. Qatar Construction Specifications

2. EXP IAN 13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 10 Traffic Signs, Markings and Studs)
3. Qatar Traffic Control Manual (QTCM)
4. Qatar Highway Design Manual (QHDM)
5. Qatar Pedestrian Crossing Manual.
6. Work Zone Traffic Management Guidance (WZTMG)
13.2 TRAFFIC SIGNS
13.2.1 Scope of Work
Delete paragraphs1, 4, 1and 6 and substitute the following:
Refer EXP IAN 13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 10 Traffic Signs, Markings and Studs)
Add new Parts 13.2.1.1, 13.2.1.2 and 13.2.1.3 as follows:
13.2.1.1 Overhead Sign Support Structures (Sign Gantries) and Signs
The Contractor shall supply and construct all types of complete overhead sign
support and overhead cantilever structures (sign gantries) and associated signs as
specified/identified in the Contract Documents and instructed by/to the satisfaction of
the Authority/Engineer.
13.2.1.2 Overhead Bridge Structure Mounted Sign Support Brackets and Signs
The Contractor shall supply and construct all types of overhead bridge structure
mounted sign support brackets and associated signs fixed to vehicular or pedestrian
bridge deck structures as specified/identified in the Contract Documents and
instructed by/to the satisfaction of the Authority/Engineer.
13.2.1.3 Ground Mounted Signs
The Contractor shall supply and construct all types of complete ground-mounted
signs (warning, regulatory and guide/directional) specified, identified in the Contract
Documents and instructed by/to the satisfaction of the Authority/Engineer and
Ashghal O & M under the following work items:
(a) Warning and Regulatory Signs (single or double sign panels).
(b) Guide/Directional Signs (Aluminium sign fascia/panels).
13.2.2 Sign Foundations
Add new paragraphs 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16 as follows:
12 The Contractor shall determine soil design parameters. However, minimum
design parameters shown on the Drawings shall be taken into consideration
in the design of all necessary foundation elements.
13 Foundations for overhead sign gantries may be pile foundation as shown on
the Drawings (reinforced concrete pile and pedestal) or isolated footings, and
shall be generally independent of other structures.
14 All traffic signs shall be installed in Retention System Foundation and to be
incorporated in the design drawing. The Retention System (RS) shall be of
cast steel construction, to EN10340 GS240 grade, galvanized on all internal
and external surfaces.
15 The socket shall be capable of withstanding impact forces from vehicle impact
to steel posts with wall thickness up to 6mm. It shall contain two M16 A2
stainless steel lateral fixing setscrews inside a locking chamber. The locking
chamber shall be covered with a cast steel locking lid, fitted with RS worm
locks and seals.
16 The RS socket should be set into concrete generally in accordance with
International Standards (SRC 25) for the installation of post. Use the bitumen
emulsion protective coating for concrete foundation below ground level to
meet the requirements of ASTM C 309-93 and BS 6949:1991. All operating
components shall be serviceable on site.
13.2.3 Traffic Sign Materials
13.2.4 Installation Requirements for Traffic Sign
3 The location of the ground-mounted signs, overhead sign support
structures/gantries are shown on the Drawings and may be slightly
changed/adjusted, provided that this will not negatively impact the works and
after approval of the Authority/Engineer.
Add new paragraphs 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 as follows:
14 The Contractor shall review all information provided in the Contract
Documents and complete the design as necessary to suit the site conditions
and successfully complete the work to the approval of the Authority/Engineer.
15 Sign gantries that are not installed as per the Drawings, Standards and
Specifications and which need modifications or relocation shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor, and shall be modified and/or relocated by the
Contractor at no additional cost.
16 The final location and configuration of the overhead sign gantries and
associated signs (span lengths, dimensions, clearances, steel member sizes,
base plate elevation and the sign support brackets including walkway
location, sign panel sizes and their locations on the brackets, etc. shall be
determined by the Contractor to the Authority/Engineer’s approval.
17 A set of traffic signs with complete components shall be tested by the
government laboratory and the results should be checked by the project
engineer prior to installation.
18 Upon completion of installation of sign, the contractor and/or the manufacturer
is obliged to measure the coefficients of the retro-reflection (RA) and X,Y
chromacity factors, luminance factors and other compliance to QCS for each
installed traffic sign and to provide these data in GIS form indicating (X,Y)
coordinates for record and release / clearance certificate whenever required
in future.
13.2.6 High Intensity Grade Prismatic – Reflective Sheeting
Add new Sub-Clause 13.2.6 as follows:
13.3 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
General
The works shall consist of furnishing and applying pavement markings in new
locations and remove and replacing existing markings.
13.3.1 Scope of Work
Add new item 5:
5 Pavement markings shall be carried out by Ashghal-approved contractors for
this work category.
Delete Sub-Clauses 13.3.2, 13.3.3, 13.3.4 and substitute with the following:
13.4 TEMPORARY ROAD MARKING
13.4.1 Road Marking Paint
Delete paragraph 7 and substitute with the following
13.5 REFLECTIVE STUDS
Delete Sub-Clauses 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, and 13.5.4 and substitute the
following:
13.7 SPECIFICATIONS FOR GLASS SPHERES (BEADS)
Refer EXP IAN 13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 10 Traffic Signs, Markings and Studs) for
changes to this Clause.
PART 14 WORKS IN RELATION TO SERVICES

14.1 GENERAL
14.1.4 Notification to Service Authorities & Statutory Bodies
Refer PWA IAN13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 11Works in Relation to Services)
14.3 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
14.3.2 Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation, Water Network Affairs,
QGEWC (WNA)
4 Refer PWA IAN13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 11Works in Relation to Services)
PART 15 ROAD LIGHTING

15.5 HIGH MAST LIGHTING
15.5.19 Luminaires
Refer PWA IAN13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 15 Road Lighting)
15.6 LIGHTING COLUMNS
15.6.1 General
Add new paragraph as follows:
4 Where column locations are unavoidable and safe clearance is an issue,
protection system for columns by suitably designed protection barrier system
shall be provided. If such a system is not feasible, the use or frangible lighting
columns to be considered on a case to case basis.
15.10 UNDERPASSES LIGHTING SYSTEM
Add new Sub-Clauses 15.10.9 1nd 15.10.10 as follows:
15.19 INSTALLATION
15.19.5 Road Lighting Column/Lantern Installation
Add new Paragraph 13 as follows:
15.22 Road Lighting Quality Assurance
Add new Clause 15.22 and paragraphs as follows:
15.23 LIGHTING COLUMNS (MULTI-FUNCTION SMART POLES)
Add new Clause 15.23, Sub-Clauses and paragraphs as follows:
PART 16 MISCELLANEOUS
Add the following new Part 16.6:
16.6 In Ground Traffic Spikes
16.6.1 Traffic Spike Installation Instructions
Traffic spikes are used to enforce one-way traffic conditions. A warning sign, such as
the Door King Model 1615, must be installed with the traffic spikes to alert drivers
that a one-way lane condition exist and that traveling in the wrong direction will
damage tires. Speed bumps (or other means) must be used to control the speed of
traffic over the traffic spikes.
Installing this traffic control spike unit in such a way that traffic crosses over it an
angle other than 90°, or where wide turns are possible, or where traffic speed is
uncontrolled and in excess of 5 MPH, may cause tire damage and will invalidate the
warranty on this product. Maximum speed across the traffic spikes is 5 MPH.
(a) Locate the traffic spikes in a flat section of roadway where there is minimum
possibility of water draining into the unit.
(b) Warning Sign and nighttime illumination MUST be provided. Refer to the
DoorKing Model 1615 traffic sign below
(c) Maximum speed across the traffic spikes is 5 MPH. Use speed bumps
(DoorKing P/N 1610-150), stop signs or other means where needed.
(d) Check for proper spike operation after the installation to be sure that concrete
or asphalt has not blocked drainage or welled up into the unit prohibiting free
movement of the spikes.
(e) Excavate a trench in the roadway for 8.5 inches for installation of the
trafficspike unit.
(f) The trench should be deep enough to allow installation of 4-inch concrete
blocks (or other suitable material) for water drainage.
(g) Typical trench depth is between 9.5 to 12-inches.
When installing the traffic spikes, note the proper orientation of the spike to the flow
of traffic. Spikes must be installed so that the angled surface of the spike is facing
oncoming traffic. Installing the spikes backwards will cause tire damage.
OK NOT OK
16.6.2 Installation Detail of Spikes
The trench should be deep enough to allow installation of 4-inch concrete blocks (or
other suitable material) for drainage.
Check for proper operation of spikes after concrete has been poured to be sure that
no loose material is jamming the operation of the spike.
PART 17 ROAD DRAINAGE

17.4 ROAD GULLIES
Add a new paragraph 9 as follows:
Refer PWA IAN13 / 14 (Section 6 Part 17 Road Drainage)
17.5 MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY GRATINGS
17.8 TESTING AND CLEANING SURFACE WATER DRAINS
Add the following paragraphs 4 to 9:
PART 18 INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION SYSTEM (ITS)
For ITS in Mubaireek and Industrial I/C, project applicable Standards and
Specifications are as follows:
• ITS Deployment Manual Ver 1.0
• ITS Specifications Ver 1.0
• Civil and Structural Standards Ver 2.0
• ITS Deployment Manual Ver 1.0a
• IAN 020 Road Tunnel Fire and Life Safety Systems –rev.A1
• RWIS, Weight-in-Motion and OVDS Deployment Strategy
• ITS Electrical Power Supply Requirements
• Co-Location of Static and Dynamic Signage Technical Memorandum
• ITS Telecoms Strategy Ver 1.0
• ITS Deployment Guidelines Ver 2.0
• ITS Deployment Guidelines Ver 2.2
• Civil and Structural Standards (ITS) Ver 2.1
• Specimen Presentation of Telecommunication Design Requirements for ITS
• Civil and Structural Standards (ITS) Ver 3.0
• ITS Verification and Validation Plan
• Technical Briefing Note – ITS Draw Chamber Spacing
SECTION 8: DRAINAGE WORKS
This project is to be performed in accordance with QCS 2014 specification and Public Works
Authority standards. The following clauses delete, amend, supplement or are
additional to clauses in QCS 2014 Section 8.
It is the responsibility of the contractor to liaise with Public Works Authority to get approval for
proposed Alternative Pipe materials prior to the start of construction works.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 Scope
Section 20 Drainage Works for Buildings
Section 34 Non-objected Suppliers
1.2 TESTING OF MATERIALS
Refer IAN 013 / 14
Add new sub-clause 1.2.3 as follows:
1.2.3 Non-objected laboratories
1 Testing of concrete and other materials shall only be undertaken by
laboratories non-objected by the Authority.
PART 2 EARTHWORKS
2.2 EXCAVATIONS
2.2.6 Trench Excavations
23 Nominal trench widths for single pipelines shall be defined as 1.50 times the
diameter plus 500 mm, subject to a minimum trench width of 750 mm.
24 Nominal trench widths for two or more pipes in the same trench (laid in
parallel with similar invert levels) shall be defined as the sum of the internal
diameters plus 450 mm between the pipes, plus 750 mm.
2.2.8 Excavation in Roads
10. In addition to any barriers necessary to provide protection against traffic, all
excavations shall be provided with fencing with fine mesh netting to a height
of 0.75m.
2.2.13 Excavations Not to be Left Open
Delete paragraph 1(a) and substitute with the following:
1(a) The refilling and surface reinstatement of trench excavations shall begin and
be completed as soon as reasonably practicable after the pipes have been
laid, jointed and tested.
2.2.14 Dewatering of Excavations
20 The Contractor shall also conform to the requirements in Section 6 Clause
3.7.3 for management of dewatering activities.
2.4 REINSTATEMENT OF SURFACES
2.4.2 Reinstatement of Surfaces Other Than in the Highway
1. The Contractor shall reinstate all disturbed surfaces in accordance with the
latest reinstatement guidelines of Authority Assets Management Affairs
Roads Operations & Maintenance Department – Amendment to the Code of
Practice and Specification for Road Openings in the Highway (January 2011)
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer’s Representative.
2.5 EXISTING SERVICES
10 In addition to the provisions of the above paragraphs, and unless otherwise
informed by the relevant oil or gas line operator, the following requirements
shall apply when carrying out pipe-laying operations in the vicinity of existing
gas or oil pipelines:
(a) the minimum clearance between the bottom of the oil or gas line and the top
of the pipeline being constructed is to be 600 mm.
(b) a hand excavated pilot hole shall be dug to determine the gas or oil line invert
level and position prior to any trench excavation in gas or oil pipeline
reservation.
(c) the excavation for the pipeline under construction must be carried out by hand
up to 2.0 m either side of the existing gas or oil pipeline.
(d) manually operated jack hammers may be used within 5.0 m of the buried
pipeline only after completion of item (c) above.
(e) the use of mechanical or hydraulic rock-breakers shall not be allowed within
5.0 m of the buried pipeline.
(f) before the exposure of live pipeline the Contractor is to erect a suitable
substantial barrier to prevent damage to the exposed pipeline.
(g) on completion of the concrete surround to the pipelines under construction,
the existing gas or oil pipeline shall be re-bedded with a minimum of 150 mm
of naturally occurring soft dune sand bed and surround. The remaining
backfill and bund shall be made up of selected desert fill with a particle size
not exceeding 150 mm which shall be free from organic matter. The Qatar
Petroleum (QP) (onshore) Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 24 h in
advance, to witness the backfilling operation.
(h) damage to the external protective wrapping to the gas or oil pipeline shall be
reported promptly to the QP who will arrange for the damage to be inspected
and repaired in strict accordance with QP (onshore) procedures at the
Contractor’s cost.
(i) the Contractor is to provide constant competent supervision whilst work is
carried out next to the existing gas or oil pipelines.
(j) when the works reach 15 m from the existing gas or oil pipeline, the
Contractor shall contact the QP (onshore) Engineering Superintendent, who
will arrange the necessary permit to work. QP (onshore) will require a
minimum of 48 h notice before work begins.
(k) a QP (onshore) permit to work does not in any way make QP (onshore)
responsible for any of the Contractor’s work, nor does it absolve the
Contractor from his responsibilities for complying with the above, but only
allows the Works to be carried out in accordance with the agreed working
methods and practices. QP (onshore) reserve the right to visit the site
regularly to observe that the agreed methods and practices are being
adhered to and to stop the work and withdraw the permits to work should they
consider there is adequate justification to do so.
(l) the requirements of QP (onshore) may vary from and are not necessarily
limited to the foregoing.
PART 3 PIPES AND FITTINGS MATERIALS

3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 Scope
Section 34, Non-objected Suppliers
3.1.6 Pipe Materials
Delete sub-clause 1 (b) and insert the following new clauses:-
1 (b) Pipes of concrete and vitrified clay shall be deemed to be rigid pipes.
(c) Pipes of ductile iron shall be deemed to be semi-rigid pipes.
3.2 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPES AND FITTINGS
3.2.1 Standards
Delete sub-clauses 2 and 3 and insert the following new clauses:-
2 Pipes and fittings for land drainage applications shall be manufactured to BS
EN 295.
3 Sealing rings shall be to BS 7874:1998, BS EN 681:1996, BS EN 682:2002,
BS EN 681-2:2000 or ISO 4633.
3.2.2 Manufacture
Delete sub-clause 1 (d) and Table 3.2 and insert the following new clause:-
1 (d) When tested in accordance with EN 295-3:2012, Clause 7, the
crushing strengths (FN) for pipes or pipe sections shall be not less
than the values given in Tables 5 to 7 of BS EN 295-1.
Delete sub-clause 2 (b) and insert the following new clause:-
2 (b) Sealing rings shall be of elastomeric material suitable for foul sewage
and surface water drainage works, as the case may be, conforming to
BS 7874:1998, BS EN 681:1996, BS EN 682:2002, BS EN 681-
2:2000 or ISO 4633.
Delete sub-clause 2 (c) and insert the following new clause:-
2 (c) Acceptance of VC pipes on delivery is dependent upon the Contractor
demonstrating that the joints are capable of meeting the water
test requirement of Clause 4.6.2 of this Section.
3.2.3 Inspection and Testing
Insert the following new clause:-
2 All products complying with BS EN 295 shall be sampled in accordance with
BS EN 295-2 and BS EN 295-3.
3.2.4 Repair Couplings for VC Pipes
Delete sub-clause 2 and insert the following new clause:-
2 Repair couplings shall comply with the joint performance requirements of BS
EN 295 and be capable of withstanding an external water pressure of 60kPa
without leaking.
Insert the following new clause 3.2.5:-
3.2.5 Perforated Clay Pipes and Fittings
1 Perforated clay pipes and fittings shall comply with the requirements of BS
EN 295-5.
2 Ground water collection / transmission systems shall be ½ perforated
pipes in configuration LP, area of perforations Type B, in accordance with
Clause 4.7.2 and Clause 4.7.3.
3 Trench soakaway / infiltration pipes shall be ¾ perforated pipes in
configuration LP, area of perforations Type B, in accordance with Clause
4.7.2 and Clause 4.7.3.
4 When tested in accordance with EN 295-3:2012, Clause 7, with no
perforations under the top bearer, the minimum crushing strengths (FN) for
perforated pipes shall not be less than the values given in Tables 3 and 4.
5 When tested in accordance with EN 295-3:2012, Clause 7, with no
perforations under the top bearer, the minimum crushing strengths (FN) for
perforated pipes greater than 500mm diameter shall be calculated in
accordance with Formula (1)
(FN) = ( Class x DN ) / 1000
and shall be based on a minimum of Class 95.
Higher crushing strengths than those given in Table 4 can be declared
providing that they conform to the requirements of the next higher class.
Classes are restricted to 95, 120 and 160, thereafter in increments of 20.
6 Joint assemblies for perforated pipes shall be flexible joints (in accordance
with BS EN295-1) or used with other joints. Where necessary, the joint
material requirements shall be agreed between the manufacturer and the
specifier / purchaser.
3.3 CONCRETE PIPES AND FITTINGS
3.3.4 Plastic Lining
1 Unless designated otherwise concrete pipes shall be lined with polyvinyl
chloride plastic (PVC) liner plate. The PVC liner plate material shall be as
specified in Section 5 Part 14.6. The liner plate shall be securely fixed to the
formwork before pouring concrete and all in-situ welding of the liner plate
shall be carried out by skilled labour using the methods specified by the
manufacturer. Purpose made units shall be used where required; e.g., at
junctions.
PART 4 PIPELINE INSTALLATION
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
4.1.5 Submittals
5 (c) And any other documents required by the Engineer.
4.1.16 Stringing of Pipes
2 The Contractor shall take pipes from the storage areas, unload and string
along the route of the proposed pipeline. Pipes shall be so strung as to cause
the least practicable interference with the use of the land. All pipes shall be
suitably chocked to prevent them from rolling to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
4.2 DUCTILE IRON, PVC, CONCRETE, VITREOUS CLAY, ABS AND GRP
PIPELINE JOINTING
Add new clause 4.2.5 as follows:
4.2.5 Restrained Joints
1 Restrained couplings shall be utilised on GRP and DI pipes and fittings in the
following cases:
(a) where shown on the Drawings.
(b) where pipelines have to cross roads through ducts or in areas with
restricted accessibility where the use of concrete anchor blocks is
prohibited
(c) where directed by the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall submit with his bid full details of the type of restrained
coupling he proposes to use.
3 Whenever in the course of work the Contractor intends to utilise restrained
couplings he shall obtain prior approval from Engineer.
4 Calculation of the number of pipe lengths with restrained coupling required,
shall follow the manufacturer's recommendation and shall be subject to the
5 Restrained joints shall be designed to resist the axial thrust forces but
maintaining flexibility and angular deflection. Restrained joints shall be
designed in accordance with ISO 10804-1. The joint shall be capable of
withstanding the greater of the test pressure or the service pressure + the
surge pressure.
6 The type of restrained joint shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. The
thrust resisting mechanism shall be separated from the sealing action of the
gasket and shall not be in contact with the contents of the pipeline.
4.4 PIPE LAYING
4.4.4 Laying of GRP Pipes
Delete paragraph 7 and replace with:
7 A detailed method statement shall be submitted by the Contractor for
agreement by the Engineer to demonstrate an understanding of the correct
method of laying GRP pipes.
(a) Bedding Material
(i) Granular material for pipe bedding and surround shall be free-
draining, hard, clean, chemically stable gravel or crushed
stone to BS 882 and shall be graded in accordance with BS
812 : P103 as shown in the following table:-
Grading of Granular Material for Pipe Bedding and

Surround
Percentage by Weight Passing Sieve

Test Sieve
(mm) For Pipe Diameters For Pipe Diameters
up to 600mm 400mm and above
63 - -
37.5 - -
20 - -
14 100 85 - 100
10 85 – 100 0 – 50
5 0 – 25 0 – 10
2.36 0–5 -
Notes:
1) For pipes 400 mm to 600 mm diameter, either grading
is acceptable.
2) Total acid soluble content of the material when tested
in accordance with BS1377 shall not exceed 0.3
percent by weight of sulphate expressed as SO3
(sulphur trioxide).
(b) Trench Widths
(i) Nominal trench widths for single pipelines shall be defined as
1.50 times the diameter plus 500 mm, subject to a minimum
trench width of 750 mm. Nominal trench widths for two or more
pipes in the same trench (laid in parallel with similar invert
levels) shall be defined as the sum of the internal diameters
plus 450 mm between the pipes, plus 750 mm.
(ii) Any excavation from the bottom of the trench to 300 mm above
the level of the crown of the pipe which exceeds the nominal
widths defined above shall be filled with concrete or the
specified bedding materials as directed on site.
(c) Pipe Laying
(i) Pipes and fittings shall be laid and jointed in accordance with
all relevant recommendations of the manufacturer. Any
variations between the manufacturer’s recommendations and
this specification shall be highlighted in the Contractor’s
Method Statements and a ruling will be given with the
Engineer’s agreement.
(ii) Pipes and fittings shall be checked for soundness and be
thoroughly cleaned out immediately prior to laying and jointing.
(iii) The setting of the pipeline to the required levels and alignment
shall be carried out by non-objected procedure such as boning
between sight rails or the use of laser systems. Sight rails, if
used, shall be at a suitable height vertically above the line of
pipes or immediately adjacent thereto and there shall, at no
time, be less than three sight rails in position on each length of
pipelines under construction to any one gradient. Large
diameter pipes, 1000 mm diameter or greater, shall be
individually set to level and line by instrument.
(iv) For pipelines laid in trenches and headings the permissible
tolerances in line and level unless otherwise specified shall be
± 3 mm in level and ± 12 mm from centreline between
manholes or access points. Also where a gravity pipeline or
sewer is shown as a straight line between manholes it will not
be accepted as having passed the final test unless a full
circular light can be sighted through the bore of the pipe for the
length concerned.
(v) For pipeline jointing systems incorporating flexible jointing
rings pipes shall be laid with a gap between the end of the
spigot and the base of the socket, or between spigots. This
gap shall be not less than 6 mm or as recommended by the
pipe manufacturer, and it shall be achieved by non-objected
means, such as marking the outside of the pipe or using
removable metal or hardwood feelers.
(vi) The annular space between the pipe and the socket at a
flexible joint shall be sealed with an non-objected joint sealant
to prevent the ingress of loose material or concrete. Sealing
shall be done on completion of a satisfactory preliminary
testing prior to concreting or backfilling, but not prior to the test.
(vii) The Contractor shall make sure that all joints are made strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(viii) Pressure pipelines shall be secured at all changes in direction
by concrete anchor blocks or other means of restraint non-
objected in advance by the Engineer.
(ix) Pipelines shall be temporarily capped when pipe laying ceases
to prevent the ingress of foreign matter. The Contractor shall
ensure that the pipes remain clean and free from obstructions,
and if required by the Engineer, the pipelines shall be cleaned
out using non-objected methods and equipment which do not
damage the internal lining of the pipes and manholes.
(d) Concrete Cradles or Surround
(i) Where pipes are to be laid with a concrete cradle or surround
they shall be supported initially above the trench bottom on
concrete setting blocks. The blocks shall either be laid
accurately to level and covered with damp-proof sheeting
beneath the pipe barrel or shall be provided with two hardwood
wedges each to an non-objected pattern to enable the pipe
level to be adjusted.
(ii) The blocks and wedges shall be of sufficient size and strength
to prevent settlement of the pipes during laying and at least
two concrete blocks shall be provided for each pipe.
(iii) Concrete cradles and surrounds shall be RCC with Class
C40/20 SRC Concrete. The concrete shall be poured on one
side of the pipe until it can be worked under the pipe along its
full length to ensure that no voids develop. The concrete shall
then be brought up equally on both sides of the pipe until the
required level is reached.
(iv) The length of pipeline laid in any one operation before
concreting the pipeline shall be that which in the opinion of the
Engineer permits accurate laying of the pipeline and concreting
in an efficient and proper manner.
(v) Non-objected measures appropriate to the pipe material shall
be provided to prevent flotation or other movement during
placement or curing of the concrete.
(vi) Concrete cradles to pipes of all diameters and surrounds to
pipes of one metre diameter or less shall be poured in a single
lift. Concrete surrounds to pipes over one metre diameter shall
normally be poured in two lifts, with a horizontal joint not more
than 100 mm below the crown of the pipe.
(vii) Concrete cradles and surrounds shall be interrupted over their
full cross sectional area at each pipe joint, by shaped
expansion joint filler. The thickness of filler shall be 18 mm for
pipe diameter less than 450, 36 mm for pipe diameter 450 to
1200 and 54 mm for pipe diameters greater than 1200.
(viii) In spigot and socket pipelines the joints in the bed shall be at
the face of each socket.
(ix) In all flexible joints the annulus of the pipe socket shall be
sealed with a non-objected sealant to prevent the concrete
from entering the pipe joint.
(x) When support to excavations is provided, building paper or a
non-objected material shall be placed against that support
before concreting to facilitate withdrawal of the support.
(e) Bedding and Surround
(i) For granular beddings to pipelines the minimum thickness of
bedding material beneath the pipe shall be :-
- 150 mm (minimum 100 mm under sockets) for pipes not
exceeding 300 mm internal diameter.
- 200 mm (minimum 100 mm under sockets) for pipes
exceeding 300 mm internal diameter.
(ii) The bedding material shall extend to the full width of the trench
and shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 200 mm. The
bedding material shall be carefully compacted using a plate
vibrator or other non-objected equivalent mechanical method.
Sufficient passes of a plate vibrator or other non-objected
mechanical method are required to achieve positive deflection
of flexible pipes to ensure that final deflections are within the
specified limits. Hand tamping or punning will only be
permitted where insufficient space is available to allow the use
of mechanical plant.
(iii) Recesses shall be formed in the bedding to accommodate pipe
joints while ensuring continuous even support along the pipe
length. Bedding material shall be prevented from entering pipe
joints. After the joint has been made bedding material shall be
carefully placed and hand compacted beneath the joint barrel
to close any void left by the recess.
(iv) In narrow trenches and where the Contractor's method of
working involves the use of trench sheets or other forms of
trench support it is imperative that the trench supports are
carefully withdrawn to a point above the crown of the pipe as
the backfill material is placed to ensure that voids between
surround and trench side will be eliminated. Where the
Contractor is instructed to leave trench supports in place, the
tops shall be burned or cut off.
(v) Except where concrete surrounds are detailed GRP pipelines
shall be laid with granular bedding and surround, as specified,
to at least 300 mm above the crown of the pipe.
(vi) The granular material shall be carefully laid and compacted at
the sides of pipes according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations or as directed by the Engineer.
(vii) For GRP pipelines located beneath the permanent
groundwater level any granular bedding material or non-
objected selected excavated granular material forming
granular bedding and surround shall be laid on and enclosed
within a geotextile filter fabric membrane.
(viii) After completion of placement and compaction of the
surrounds to the pipelines backfilling of trenches for pipelines
shall proceed using selected excavated materials in
accordance with the specifications for earthworks.
(ix) The use of power rammers will not be permitted over any pipe
until the depth of fill above the crown of the pipe is at least 300
mm.
(x) Services warning tapes shall be placed over the pipelines as
specified.
4.5 PIPELINE STRUCTURES AND APPURTENANCES
4.5.5 Anchor and Thrust Blocks
5 Where anchor/thrust blocks cannot be installed due to constraints on site or
adverse soil conditions, the Contractor shall use restrained joints in
accordance with sub-clause 4.2.5 or other methods of thrust restraint subject
to the Engineer’s approval.
4.6 TESTING OF PIPELINES
4.6.1 General
14 All costs associated with provision and disposal of water used in testing shall
be borne by the Contractor.
4.6.6 Testing of GRP Pipelines
1 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES GENERAL
(a) Submit for the Engineer's approval details of the proposed methods
and program for testing, including details of test equipment. Arrange
for all tests to be witnessed by the Engineer or other person
appointed by the Engineer. Provide everything necessary for
carrying out testing and cleaning including water, pumps, gauges,
piped connections, stop ends and all other temporary works. Ensure
that pipelines are properly completed and supported before being
put under test except as hereinafter detailed.
(i) No testing will be permitted until seven days after thrust blocks
and other holding down works have been completed.
(ii) In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim
tests, which may be specified elsewhere, submit all parts of
the pipelines to a final test.
(iii) Notwithstanding the foregoing, carry out at any stage of
construction other tests that the Engineer considers
desirable to check materials and workmanship on the pipeline.
Ensure that the obligations to perform successful tests under
the Contract are achieved.
(b) Use potable water for hydrostatic testing and pipeline cleaning.
(c) Test the pipeline in lengths between manholes or valve pits or
such shorter lengths as the Engineer may direct or permit.
(d) Use properly designed fittings for the purpose of temporarily closing
the openings in pipelines to be tested. Use fittings adequately
strutted to withstand the pressure specified.
(e) Ensure that the arrangement for testing a pipeline includes provision
for the purging of air from the pipeline prior to a water test.
(f) Where multiple pipelines are laid in common trench, test only one line
at any one time.
(g) Ensure that gauges used for testing pipelines have a dial diameter of
not less than 100mm and a full scale reading not greater than
twice the specified test pressure. Before any gauge is used,
arrange for independent laboratory to check the accuracy of the
gauge. Provide a dated certificate of its accuracy to the Engineer.
(h) The Contractor must make his own arrangement for the supply
and disposal of water used for testing which must be obtained from a
source accepted by the Engineer.
(i) The Contractor must complete the pipelines between the ends of
laid and tested lengths of pipeline by tie-in sections of the shortest
practical length.
2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES
(a) Divide pressure pipelines into sections not exceeding 500m in length
or as directed by Engineer. Test each section separately.
(b) Before pressure testing is started, re-check the pipes and the valves
for cleanliness, and re-check the operation of all valves. Cap off the
open ends of the pipeline (or sections thereof) with blank flanges or
cap ends additionally secured where necessary with temporary struts
and wedges. Complete all anchor and thrust blocks and fasten
securely all pipe straps and other devices intended to prevent the
movement of pipes.
(c) Apply test pressure to the entire pipeline or section being tested to
either the design test pressure specified in the drawings or 1.5
times the working pressure, 1.5 times the surge pressure or 1.5
times the pump closed valve pressure, whichever is the greatest.
Unless otherwise specified herein, working pressure for all pumping
mains is 16 bar and the design test pressure is 24 bar. Immediately
prior to commissioning, complete the pipeline and retest the entire
pipeline.
Fill each pipeline or section with water and displace all free air from
the pipeline.
(i) Raise the pressure in the pipeline by pumping water until the
highest of the working pressure/surge pressure/pump closed
valve pressure is attained in the lowest part of the section.
(ii) Maintain at this level by further pumping until it is steady
for a period of not less than 24 hours.
(iii) Monitor the pipeline over a period of 24 hours without further
pressurisation.
(iv) At the end of this period, measure the reduced pressure in
the pipeline, the original test pressure restored by pumping and
the loss measured by drawing off water or air from the
pipeline until the pressure has fallen to match the reduced
pressure previously noted.
(v) Ensure that the loss does not exceed 0.02 litre per
millimetre of pipe diameter per kilometre of pipe per day for
each bar of head applied.
(vi) If the pipeline fails the test, locate the faults, repair and retest
the pipeline until it passes.
(vii) Visually inspect all exposed pipe, fittings, valves and joints
during the tests.
(viii) After satisfactory completion of the 24 hour period test,
bring the pipeline to test pressure and maintain it at this
pressure, by pumping if necessary, for one hour. Disconnect
the pumping and no water is allowed to enter the pipeline for
a further period of two hours.
(ix) At the end of the two hours period, restore the original test
pressure by pumping water into the pipeline. Determine the
volume of makeup water required to achieve the test
pressure specified and deemed to represent the cumulative
loss during the two hour period of test.
(x) Ensure the loss does not exceed the limit stated in ‘f’ above. If
the pipeline fails the test, locate and repair the faults and
repeat the test.
(d) Ensure that all valves in the pipeline are satisfactorily operating under
working pressure and that the pipelines have been finally cleaned out
as specified hereafter.
(e) Do not test pipes against closed valves.
3 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF NON PRESSURE PIPELINES
(a) Test all non-pressure pipelines up to 1000mm diameter after
completion of concrete or granular bedding up to the soffit of the
pipeline. Clear the bedding around pipe joints to allow for visual
inspection for leaks. Ensure that the trench is kept dry. Apply water
head for testing of either depth to invert plus 1.0m, or 5.0m, whichever
is the greater. Measure the head at the lower end of the pipeline.
(b) Maintain the water head over a period of 30 minutes and if
necessary, add water from a measuring vessel at 10 minute
intervals. Record the quantity of water added from the measuring
vessel.
(i) The leakage, quantity of water added, shall not exceed 0.5 X
pipe diameter (m) X length of pipe under test (m) litres.
(c) For non- pressure pipes greater than 1000mm diameter, inspection
for water tightness, workmanship and compliance to this
specification shall be carried out by man entry.
(d) Not more than 7 days prior to handover all pipelines shall be subject
to an infiltration test as follows:
(i) Test the pipeline in lengths between manholes or such
shorter lengths as the Engineer may direct or permit.
Maximum length to be tested shall be 1 kilometre.
(ii) Dewatering shall have been discontinued for at least 3 days
prior to test.
(iii) Volume of water infiltrating into the pipe shall be accurately
measured for a minimum period of 1 hour.
(iv) Maximum infiltration shall not exceed 1 litre per millimetre of
pipe diameter per kilometre of pipe per day.
(e) Keep a record of all tests and make them available for inspection.
Hand over test records to the Engineer for approval.
(f) Pipes or joints shall not be accepted if any leakage or damage is
visible during an internal inspection.
(g) If the result of any test or inspection does not comply with the
requirements of the specification, the Contractor shall investigate
the reason and carry out remedial work to the approval of the
Engineer at no cost to Authority. The pipeline shall then be re-
tested. This process shall be repeated until the requirements of the
specification are satisfied.
(h) The Contractor may be required to incorporate a 100mm tee on
property connection laterals near the junction of the main sewer and
this tee may be used to insert an expanding stopper in the lateral for
testing purposes. On the satisfactory completion of such tests,
remove all temporary fittings from the lateral. Provide the tee with a
watertight cap or plug.
4.7 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
4.7.3 Vortex Drop Shaft
1 Vortex drop shaft shall be as designated in the Project Specification.
2 The drop shaft shall safely drop a design flow rate over the design drop
height.
3 The drop shaft shall be all-hydraulic, self-activating and shall not require
internal moving parts.
4 The drop shaft shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant materials such as
stainless steel (Grade 316 S31). Carbon steel, polyvinyl chloride, fiberglass
(FRP) or painted steel products shall not be allowed.
5 The drop shaft system and all appurtenances shall be provided by a single
supplier.
6 The system to be furnished hereunder shall be made by a manufacturer
regularly engaged in such work and who has furnished similar installations
and had them in successful and continuous operation.
7 Data on service history and operation of submitted equipment shall be made
available to the Engineer, if requested, for his use in determining that the
Drop Shaft offered meets the intent of the contract requirements and criteria
stated in these specifications.
8 Hydraulic analysis/simulations shall be submitted, detailing the performance
of the vortex drop shaft for all flow regimes, for approval by the Engineer.
9 The contractor shall furnish and install all required supports and anchoring
devices which are not provided by the manufacturer, as shown on the
contract documents and as recommended by the manufacturer. These items
include, but are not necessarily limited to:
 Stainless steel beams and associated supports.
 Stainless steel strap anchors.
 Stainless steel anchor bolts, nuts, washers, couplings and other
fasteners.
 Gaskets between pipes and the concrete.
PART 5 VALVES, PENSTOCKS AND APPURTENANCES

5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Scope
5.13 FLAP VALVES
5.13.1 Flap Valves (General Purpose)
Add the following new paragraph 6:
5 Gunmetal shall be good quality to BS EN 1982 Grade LG2. Stainless steel
shall be to BS 970 Part 4 Grade 316 S31.
PART 6 MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS

6.1 GENERAL
6.1.1 Scope
6.4 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
6.4.1 General
(i) All holding down and anchor bolts, nuts, washers and anchor plates for
use externally or in internal areas which are subject to contact with
sewage or in ‘wet’ areas but above the top water level shall be stainless
steel conforming to BS 970:1991 316S13.
(ii) All holding down and anchor bolts, nuts, washers and anchor plates for
use internally in areas not subjected to contact with sewage shall be
steel galvanised to BS EN 1461 or sheradised to BS 4921 :1973 Class I
and all exposed surfaces shall be painted after assembly and
tightening.
PART 7 GLASS REINFORCED PLASTICS

7.3 GENERAL
7.1.1 Scope
Delete paragraph 1 and substitute the following:
1 This part includes the specifications for all work in connection with glass
reinforced plastics (GRP) ladders, safety cages, handrails, balustrades,
gratings, open-mesh flooring, and linings for pump station wet wells,
discharge chambers and inlet channels.
7.1.2 Related Sections and Parts
Add the following:
7.3 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
(i) GRP Lining for Pump Station Wet Wells
5 Pumping station wet wells, discharge chambers and inlet channels shall
incorporate a corrosion resistant lining to all internal surfaces. Linings shall
comply with Section 8, Part 7 Clause 7.3.4, paragraphs 1 to 3 inclusive.
PART 9 TRENCHLESS PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION

9.1.9 Site Conditions
Delete first sentence in paragraph 1 and replace with the following:
1 The Contractor shall note that no geotechnical data regarding the existing
ground conditions are available at the locations where no-dig construction
methods are specified. The Contractor shall carry out additional geotechnical
site investigations which he considers necessary to determine the existing
ground conditions to allow him to price and/or design the specified works. The
results of such investigations and laboratory testing together with factual and
interpretive reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The
Engineer’s approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the
Contract.
9.3 MATERIALS
9.3.1 Pipes
All pipes, jointing systems and material shall be fit for purpose.
9.3.5 Grout
Add new paragraph 3 as follow:
3 Unless agreed to the contrary in writing by the Engineer, the annulus around
the installed pipes shall be filled with cement grout installed under pressure
by an non-objected means.
PART 11 SEWER REHABILITATION

11.10 MANHOLE REHABILITATION
11.10.6 Manhole Cover, Frame and Sealing Plate Reinstallation or
Replacement
2 The Contractor shall adjust the level and slope of the manhole frame, cover
and slab as required. The manhole shall be raised by building precast concrete
rings or removal of rings as necessary. In all cases where adjustments to
manhole slab levels are required the Contractor shall submit shop drawings
and a method statement to the Engineer for approval prior to commencing
work on site.
SECTION 9: M & E EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. GENERAL MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1.2 Related Works
Add the following:
1.1.16 Environment
1 Temperatures:
Maximum recorded shade temperature 52 deg C
Average maximum shade temperature 46 deg C
Average minimum shade temperature 20 deg C
Normal winter minimum temperature 12 deg C
Minimum winter temperature 0 deg C
Maximum sun radiation temperature 84 deg C
2 Humidity:
Absolute maximum relative humidity 100%
Absolute minimum relative humidity 0%
All equipment/systems shall be suitable for the harsh environmental
conditions and hazardous areas (due to potential danger of flammable gases
in the locality) and shall have a minimum life of 15 years.
1.2 PRODUCTS
1.2.14 Name plates and Data plates
Add the following new paragraphs:
2 Items of plant, i.e. isolators, starters, distribution boards, junction boxes,
timers, fuses, etc., shall be clearly labelled to correspond with the appropriate
schematic or wiring diagram.
3 Labels shall be fixed to equipment prior to any testing being carried out.
4 Unless specified elsewhere, labels shall be manufactured from 3 mm thick
trifoliate with engraved 5 mm high lettering; the colour shall be white letters on
a black background.
5 Internal labels must be visible at all times and must not be obscured by panel
wiring, etc.
6 Warning labels shall be engraved to give black letters on a yellow
background, and be preceded by the lightning flash symbol in accordance
with BS 5378.
7 Internal labels shall be fixed with round or cheese head stainless steel
screws. Self-adhesive labels will not be accepted.
8 External control panel labels are to be fitted with black plastic rivets.
9 Internal labels designating components shall be fixed to non-removable
equipment.
10 All labels shall be engraved in both English and Arabic. The text of all labels
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before the labels are
manufactured.
Add the following new Part 1.2.19:
1.2.19 Spare Parts and Tools
1 Spare parts and tools for the various items of equipment shall be provided as
specified.
2 The spare parts and tools shall be stored in a lockable hardwood cabinet
mounted on the wall of the pumping station storeroom.
3 The cabinet is to be of robust construction with heavy duty brass hinged
doors and a heavy duty brass hasp and staple locking mechanism. Sufficient
internal fittings shall be provided within the cabinet to enable the neat and
safe storage of spare parts and tools. The cabinet shall be finished off with
three coatings of an non-objected clear varnish. The Contractor shall supply
and install the complete cabinet, including a brass padlock and three sets of
keys.
Re-number 1.1 INSTALLATION AND COMMISIONING to the following:
1.3 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
Re –number 1.2.19 Co-ordination to the following:
1.3.1 Co-ordination
Re-number 1.2.20 Inspection during Installation to the following:
1.3.2 Inspection During Installation
Re –number 1.2.21 Preparation of Installation Areas to the following:
1.3.3 Preparation of Installation Areas
Re –number 1.2.22 Manufacturers’ Installation Supervision to the following:
1.3.4 Manufacturers’ Installation Supervision
Re –number 1.2.23 Installation as follows:
1.3.5 Installation
5 Where heavy items are to be lifted, padded slings or other suitable alternative
shall be used to prevent damage to the corrosion protection system. The use
of uncoated lifting chains or cables shall not be permitted.
6 The equipment shall be inspected by the Engineer prior to installation.
Damaged equipment shall be repaired prior to installation taking place in
accordance with procedures non-objected by the Engineer.
Re –number 1.2.24 Testing and Commissioning as follows:
1.3.6 Testing and commissioning
7 Testing at works
(a) The Contractor shall carry out tests as stated in the current
appropriate British Standard where available. These shall include:-
(i) BS EN 60439 -Factory Built Assemblies (FBA)
(ii) BS 599 -Methods of Testing Pumps
(iii) BS 5316 -Acceptance Tests for Centrifugal, Mixed Flow and
Axial Pumps
(iv) BS 5000 -Rotating Electrical Machines
(b) The Contractor shall provide any labour, equipment and apparatus
required for testing purposes. Test instrumentation shall have current
'Calibration Certificates'.
(c) No inspection or passing by the Engineer of the Work, Plant or
materials included in this Contract, whether carried out or supplied by
the Contractor shall release him from any of his obligations under the
Contract.
8 Manufacturer's Works Tests
(a) Whether witness tests are required or not, three copies of test
certificates and curves shall be supplied to the Engineer within two
weeks of completion of any tests. No item shall be dispatched before
the Engineer has non-objected such a certificate in writing.
(b) The Contractor shall meet all costs incurred by the Engineer when
attending agreed inspections. These costs shall be drawn against the
relevant Provisional Sum in the Contract.
(c) All costs incurred by the Engineer on repeat tests or inspections of
failed Plant shall be met by the Contractor.
(d) The tests shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
(i) Panels.
The following routine tests defined in BS EN 60439 -1 shall be
carried out:
 Inspection of the FBA including inspection of wiring and
electrical operation tests.
 Dielectric test (2500 V ac for 60 s minimum).
 Checking of protective measures including primary or
secondary injection testing and checking the continuity of
the protective circuit.
 Loop test instruments.
 Functionally test control circuits.
(ii) Lighting and small power.
 Visual inspection of equipment and protective devices for
compliance with drawings.
 Continuity.
 Insulation resistance test at 500 V DC between line and
neutral line and earth, neutral and earth of each final
circuit, polarity check and discharge test on all emergency
lights.
 Loop impedance and circuit breaker test.
(iii) External lighting.
 Insulation resistance checking of all equipment.
 Pilot energisation functional check of lamps and control.
(iv) Pump units.
 The Contractor shall carry out Works Witness Tests in
accordance with BS 5316: Part 1 1976 Class C on one of
each type of pump. Only results in the positive tolerance
output area will be acceptable.
 The tests shall be conducted over the full head/flow range
of the pump curve from closed valve to run out, and one of
the test points shall be at the duty point, or duty points,
specified in this document. The pumps shall be tested with
their contract motors. Guaranteed efficiency is required at
the duty point. The combined pump and motor efficiencies
quoted by the Contractor in the Schedules shall be
achieved.
 A test report including the items detailed below shall be
submitted to the Engineer at the conclusion of each test.
- Place and date of the acceptance test
- Manufacturer's name, type of pump, serial number
- Duty point(s) specified in this document
- Description of the test procedure and the measuring
apparatus used including calibration data observed
readings presented in tabular and graph format,
evaluation, analysis of test results and conclusions
(v) Motors.
 Motors from manufacturer's standard range will be
accepted with a type test certificate. Motors without a type
test certificate shall be tested under a load test including an
8 hour "heat test".
(v) Lifting appliances.
 Cranes and other lifting devices shall be load tested in
accordance with the Standard Specification requirements
and a test certificate issued.
(vii) Pressure vessels.
 Pressure vessels shall be pressure tested in accordance
with the Standard Specification requirements and a test
certificate issued.
(viii) Valves and pipework.
 Valves and pipework shall be pressure tested in
accordance with the specified standards.
(ix) Inverters (soft starters and heat run tests).
 Pump inverters shall be Works Witness Tested. A suitable
correction factor shall be applied in respect of the ambient
temperature during the test, and the temperature of the air
from the air conditioning unit during normal service.
9 Commissioning
Delete the following Clauses 1.2.25 Instruction and Training of the Employer’s
Personnel; 1.2.26 In-Service Checks; and 1.2.27 Specialised Training
Programme for Employer’s Personnel and re-insert after new Clause 1.4 as
follows:
1.4 INSTRUCTION AND TRAINING OF THE EMPLOYER’S PERSONNEL
1.5 IN-SERVICE CHECKS
1.6 SPECIALISED TRAINING PROGRAMME FOR EMPLOYER’S
PERSONNEL
1.4 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
1 The Contractor shall supply 4 copies of O&M Manuals for apparatus installed
under the Contract. Instructions shall also include step directions for minor
fault finding and periodic maintenance instructions such as cleaning, oiling
etc. for all equipment supplied under this contract together with instructions
for removal and reinstatement.
2 Four complete Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions shall be
submitted no later than 4 weeks after the successful commissioning of the
equipment. Upon approval of the draft copy the four Operating and
Maintenance Manuals and Instructions shall be submitted. The Contractor
shall include all the documentation requested.
3 The Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions shall be written in
English or Arabic and English and in the following format:
(a) Cover similar to the cover of this tender document providing a full
description of the project name, description, project number, project
code, budget reference, pumping station name and shall be titled “
Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions Volume “-“ o f “-
“.
(b) Complete Index and Drawing List.
(c) Section 1- List of Contractors and contact details, together with the
Scope of Works.
(d) Section 2-Detailed description of the operation of the plant providing
all duties, set points, pressure readings, electrical current readings,
safety checks etc.
(e) Section 3-Summarised data sheets for the major items of the plant,
including Manufacturers name and contact details, name plate data,
serial numbers, capacities, sizes, power ratings, and any other
information deemed necessary for the ordering of replacement parts
from the Manufacturers.
(f) Section 4-Detailed maintenance requirements including frequency of
checking, types of lubricants, replacement part numbers,
recommended spares to be kept by the Employer and any other
information deemed necessary to ensure the equipment is maintained
to provide satisfactory service.
(g) Section 6-Original Manufacturers brochures of all the items installed.
(h) Section 8-Factory test data records and commissioning data.
(i) Section 9-Electrical component lists and cable schedules.
(j) Section 10-Mechanical ‘As built’ drawings.
(k) Section 11-Electrical ‘As built’ drawings, wiring diagrams and cable
schedules.
4 Complete Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions are also to
be provided in digital format.
5 The Plant shall not be deemed to be Taken Over until such time as the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions have been submitted
and accepted.
PART 2 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Scope
2.2 PRODUCTS
2.1.1 Fabrication
Delete paragraph 3(e) and replace with the following:
(e) single/ multi vane, open or shrouded (closed) or spiral vane type,
Vortex type (free flow) impellers will be allowed only if the specified
duty cannot be provided by using the preferred impeller type. In this
event a written statement to this effect from the pump manufacturer
should accompany the proposal.
Add the following new Part 2.4:
2.4 PUMP OPERATION AND CONTROL
1 The pumps shall be operated in manual (hand), automatic (auto) or off mode.
A selector switch for each pump shall be provided to select the operating
mode.
2 In automatic mode, the pumps shall be started and stopped by a suitable and
non-objected bubbler level controller unit. The pumps shall operate in
duty/duty assist mode.
3 Pumps operation levels are indicated in the drawings
A low level sump cut out and warning shall be incorporated in the control
circuit to make the pumps inoperable should the pump sump become dry.
The low level cutout shall be operated by both the hydrostatic level controller
and a dedicated backup float switch.
A high level flood warning alarm shall activate when the wet well flood
reached the high level flood set point level.
In the event that the level in the sump does not reach the pump duty level
after 4 hours, a timer shall automatically start the duty pump until the low level
set point is reached.
4 In manual mode the pumps shall be operated by manually depressing start
and stop pushbuttons located on the MCC panels. The pumps shall not be
able to be started in manual mode if the level in the wet well is lower than the
automatic pump stop level. The low level cut out as specified in item (4)
above shall operate in the manual mode. An override switch shall be provided
to enable the water level to be drawn down from the automatic stop level to
the low level cut out.
5 The non-return valve on each branch of the delivery pipework shall be fitted
with extension arms, counterweights and limit (proximity) switches to enable
the no flow condition to be monitored. Under conditions of no flow, the pumps
shall be required to switch off after continuous no flow conditions of one
minute. The no flow protection facility shall automatically reset after 5 minutes
to enable the pumps to be restarted in automatic or manual mode. After five
attempts at restarting the pumps, the pumps shall not be able to be restarted
until such time as the no flow protection has been manually reset. The no flow
protection shall be operational under both manual and automatic operating
modes.
6 One pump shall be selected as the duty pump, one pump as the assist pump.
A manual selector switch shall be provided to select the duty and assist pump
arrangement.
7 In the event that the duty pump fails to start, fails under conditions of no flow,
fails to start at the high level or fails due to electrical overload, the assist
pump shall be required to start automatically and continue to operate as the
duty pump until the selector switch is reset. The standby pump shall then
operate as the assist pump. In the event that the assist pump fails to start, the
standby pump shall be required to start automatically and continue to operate
as the duty pump until such time as the selector switch is reset.
8. Each pump shall be stopped or unable to be started in either operating mode
should the corresponding emergency stop button be depressed.
PART 7 LIFTING EQUIPMENT
7.2 PRODUCTS
7.2.5 Manually Operated Chain Blocks
Delete paragraphs 1 to 8 and replace with the following paragraphs 1 to 5 and
renumber paragraphs 9, 10, 11 to 6, 7 8:
1 The hoisting wheel shall be grooved and pocketed to receive the load chain.
The load chain shall be alloy steel chain Grade 80 to BS 3114: 1959. Hand
chains shall be to Grade 30 BS 590 or better. Chain guides shall be provided
to ensure effective guidance of the load chain into the load chain wheel
pockets. A stripper shall be provided to ensure effective disengagement of the
load chain from the load chain wheel. Blocks shall be provided with chain
guides and the idler wheel scores shall be so shaped as to avoid twisting the
chain as it passes round. The pitch diameter of the idler wheels shall not be
less than 16 times the size of the chain, unless they are so shaped as to
avoid a bending action on the link.
2 The load chain anchorage associated fittings and framework at the slack end
shall be at least equal in strength to 2.5 times the maximum tension in the
load chain when the working load limit is being lifted. Any link used for
connecting the load chain to a terminal fitting shall be of the material specified
for the chain and heat treated to provide mechanical properties and strength
equivalent to those of the load chain. The hook shall be made from high
grade forged steel complying with BS 2903 ‘C’ type and provided with a
safety catch. The safe working load shall be marked on the hook in kilograms
in accordance with BS2903.
3 The sheaves of the hook block shall be guarded to prevent a hand or fingers
being trapped.
4 The crab hoisting gear shall be such that one man is capable of easily raising
the maximum load.
5 A chain collecting box shall be incorporated.
7.2.7 Mechanical Components
Delete paragraph 1 and replace with the following:
1 End Carriages
(a) Both end carriages of electric operated cranes shall be powered either
by a duplicate geared motor drive or by a single motor unit and a lay
shaft system connecting the two carriages.
(b) The end carriage of manual operated cranes shall be connected by a
lay shaft system and longitudinal and cross traverse motions shall be
provided on the crane and shall be such that operation is speedy
without impairing safety in working. The longitudinal and traverse
motions shall be operated by means of hand chains which shall
extend to within 600 mm of the operating floor. The hoisting and
lowering chains shall be of the same length. The hook and load chain
shall be such that the hook will reach to the lowest floor or duct level.
The operating chain for the longitudinal motion of the crane shall be
suitably positioned to enable the operator to move the unit easily
without dragging the operating chains over the control panels or other
equipment.
(c) The runner wheels shall be of cast steel, with double flanges, and
shall be mounted on roller bearings or fitted with phosphor-bronze
bushes running on hardened steel axles.
Add new Part 22 as follow:

PART 22 DE-SILTING EQUIPMENT
22.1 GENERAL
1 Provide vacuum recovery system comprising of 1 air powered pump, 1
silencer, 1 vacuum recovery tank, 1 Density Controller and all Camloc
connectors and hoses as required supplied for compact assembly to remove
grit and silt with unlimited moisture contents to be transported over 20m
vertical and up to 40m horizontal distance to the following requirements.
1 The system shall be designed for removal of sludge, solids, abrasive
materials and concentrated slurries from underground tanks, sumps, culverts,
etc.
2 The vacuum pump shall be powered by a 600CFM compressor (not in the
scope of supply) and use this energy to entrain the material to be vacuumed.
3 The pump shall have no moving parts, be simple in operation to be used by
unskilled labour. The pump shall be lightweight no more than 30kg and of
small physical dimensions width no more than 30cm and suitable to be
handled by one man in a confined space.
22.2 OPERATING PRINCIPLE
1 The pump forms the basis of a highly efficient materials handling system. The
pump takes a high energy stream in this case compressed air derived from a
compressor and uses this to entrain the material to be vacuumed. The
vacuum recovery system combines the standard pump, operating on
compressed air, with a vacuum collection tank, designed to act as a separator
which stores material for controlled discharge into a hopper. In this mode, the
pump develops a continues vacuum up to 26” mercury (66cm Hg) together
with high induced air flow. The system is to be used with a 600CFM
compressor at 150PSI.
22.3 CONSTRUCTION
1 Casing shall be 316 stainless steel material complete with 50 mm branch
inlet, 600 cfm air nozzle, air nozzle adaptor, Ni-Hard Cast 44mm mixer, Cast
102mm diffuser and vacuum connector.
2 Suction nozzle shall consist of a 4” density controller (gulper) and connector
compatible with the vacuum hose.
3 All connections shall be flanged to the standard compatible with external
hoses to be also supplied with the pump.
4 Hoses shall be heavy duty construction with necessary connectors wire
whipped for connection from pump to the vacuum tank. 50 mm dia
compressed air hose shall be 300 psi rated.
22.4 ACCESSORIES
1 Provide 0.254m³ capacity vacuum tank, complete with counter balance door,
tank support and vacuum hose connections.
2 Provide pump silencer with connection 4” Table D to the pump body.
3 Provide compressed air and vacuum hoses with necessary connections as
recommended by the system manufacturer for required duty.
22.5 PAINTING
1 Painting shall be as per Qatar Construction Specification Section 8, Part 8.
22.6 SPARE PARTS
1 Provide spare parts for 2 years operation as recommended by the system
manufacturer.
22.7 POLYURETHANE PIPES AND FITTINGS
Material
Polyurethane
Jointing Flanged, grooved end clamp
Lining none
Coating none
Pressure rating PN 10
Minimum wall thickness 10mm
Hardness to ASTM D676-59T 75D
Tensile strength ASTM D412-61T 9000
Elongation at break ASTM D412-61T 270%
Abrasion index, NBS%, ASTM D1630 435
SECTION 13: MASONRY
SECTION 13: MASONRY
PART 4 UNIT MASONRY

4.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
4.4.1 Concrete Blocks
Add new paragraph as follows:
16 Where concrete blocks are manufactured with one or more decorative faces
and are to be used for any form of construction other than as a cladding to
existing structures they shall comply in all respects with the requirements
contained in this Part and workmanship shall comply in all respects with Part 5
of this Section. The Engineer shall define cladding.
SECTION 16: STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
SECTION 16 STRUCTURAL STEELWORKS
The general requirements for structural steelworks as contained in the following are
written to cover only the following permanent structural steelworks:
Bridge girders and trusses, and replace in full the Qatar Construction
Specification, Section 16 as relates to the above structural steel works. In case it
contradicts with QCS Section 16, stringent criteria will apply.
PART 1 GENERAL
Add new parts 1.1.4 and 1.1.5.
1.1.4 STEELWORK
1 Steelwork shall comply with BS 5400-6:1999 Incorporating Corrigendum no. 1

(hereinafter BS 5400-6)
2 In case of discrepancy between BS 5400-6 and these Particular Technical
Specifications the stringent requirement is applicable.
3 The Contractor shall make allowance for the deformations due to permanent
loads and the process and sequence of fabrication, erection and construction
such that steelworks are completed with the specified camber within the
specified tolerances.
4 The compatibility of the dimensions and setting-out data of steelworks shall
be verified by the Contractor before the materials for steelworks are ordered.
1.1.5 AMENDMENTS TO BS5400-6
5 The following amendments shall apply to BS 5400-6:

6 Contents page:
Delete "6.3.1 General
7 References of relevance in BS 5400-6 which are superseded/withdrawn are
to be replaced with the version or new issue superseding it as specified
herein.
8 Clause 3.1.4.1(c): Delete “acceptance level E of BS5996:1993” and insert
“class E1 of BS EN 10160:1999”.
9 Page 2, Clause 3.1.4.2, line 1: Delete 'toe' and insert 'tee'.
Page 5, Clause 4.3.3(e), line 1:
10 Delete line 1 of text and insert "The hardness of the edge is reduced to less
than 350 HV 30 of BS EN ISO 6507-1 by a suitable heat treatment"
11 Page 9, Clause 4.14: Delete and insert:
12 "The vertical profile including camber complying with item 4 above shall be
formed by connecting straight sections of girder with a change of slope at
constructions joints typically at every 6 m.
Page 22, Clause 6.3.1:
Delete Clause 6.3.1
PART 2 MATERIALS
Add new parts 2.8, 2.9, 2.10, 2.11, 2.12 and 2.13.
2.8 STRUCTURAL STEEL
1 All materials and component shall be ordered from and produced by

manufactures and suppliers with proven and documented experience of
producing material to the codes and standards required by these Particular
Technical Specifications.
2 The steel shall be delivered directly from the steel mill.

3 Structural steel shall in general comply with BS 5400-6, Clause 3.1.
4 The following steel qualities apply:

5 Bridge girder and trusses:
BS EN 10025-2 S355J2 t ≤ 60 mm
BS EN 10025-3 S355N 60< t ≤ 85 mm
BS EN 10025-3 S355NL 85< t ≤ 120 mm
BS EN 10025-4 S460M t ≤ 60 mm
BS EN 10025-4 S460ML 60< t ≤ 85 mm
6 The following additional requirements apply:

7 The applied steel grades and qualities shall be stated on the Contractor's
shop drawings.
8 All the test results shall be documented in the certificates of materials.
9 The following options apply (refer to BS EN 10025-1, BS EN 10025-2, BS EN

10025-3 and BS EN 10025-4):
10 Option 2) - The maximum carbon equivalent value (CEV) shall be according

to Table 6, BS EN 10025-2, Table 4 BS EN 10025-3 and Table 4 BS EN
10025-4. The maximum carbon equivalent (CEV) shall not be above 0.45.
11 Option 4) - Technical delivery conditions according to BS EN 10164 + Z25.

The steel requiring above documentation is identified on the Drawings as "z-
steel" or "z".
12 Option 6) - The freedom from internal defects shall be verified in accordance

with BS EN 10160 class S3 and E3.
13 Option 10) - No hard steel stamping for steel delivered for incorporation in the
works shall be allowed. Steel shall be identified by other suitable marking.
The marking shall enable the material to be clearly identified and checked
against the documentation which must include details of origin, methods of
production, composition of material, inspection certificates and test
certificates. The marking shall be according to the rules in BS EN 10025 and
BS EN 10204, so that a statement of this marking on the certificate is
sufficient for an unambiguous identification of the steel.
14 Option 14) - Applies

15 Option 15) - The permissible surface discontinuities shall be similar to BS EN
10163. The repair of surface defects by grinding shall be according to BS EN
10163-2 Class A, Subclass 3. Repair by welding is not allowed.
16 Option 16) - The permissible surface discontinuities shall be similar to BS EN

10163. The repair of surface defects by grinding shall be according to BS EN
10163-3 Class B, Subclass 3. Repair by welding is not allowed.
17 Option 31) - Applies.
18 Steelwork delivered for incorporation in the Works shall be identified by

marking. No hard stamp is allowed for any of the steel delivered for
incorporation in the Works.
19 All materials shall be delivered with inspection certificate 3.2 in accordance
with BS EN 10204.
2.9 SHEAR CONNECTIONS
20 Steel for headed stud shear connectors that form part of carbon steel
fabrications shall have a minimum yield stress of 385 N/mm2, a minimum
elongation of 18% and a minimum tensile strength of 495 N/mm2.
21 All materials shall be delivered with inspection certificate 3.2 in accordance
with BS EN 10204.
2.10 BOLTS, SCREWS, NUTS AND WASHERS
22 Bolts, screws and nuts shall comply with the British Standards and strength
grades stated in Table 16.2 in these Particular Technical Specifications.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings they shall be hot-dip galvanized.
23 Table 16.2: British Standards and strength grades for bolts, screws and nuts
Type British Standard Strength of bolt Strength of nut

ISO metric precision BS 3692:2001 Grade 8.8 Grade 8
hexagon bolts, BS EN ISO 4014 BS EN ISO 4032
screws and nuts
24 Bolts, screws and nuts in stainless steel shall comply with BS EN ISO 3506-1
and BS EN ISO 3506-2 grade A4-80.
25 Black bolts are not to be used unless specifically noted on the drawings.
2.11 WELDING CONSUMABLES
26 Shall comply with the requirements of ECCS Information Circular IC2 and BS
EN 1011. Covered electrodes for manual arc welding shall be approved
according to BS EN ISO 2560 and marked according to BS EN ISO 6848.
27
28 Welding consumables used for arc welding of stainless shall comply with
requirements similar to BS EN ISO 14343 and BS EN 1600 and shall be
chosen to ensure that the mechanical properties and corrosion resistance of
the weld metal are not less than those required for the parent metal.
29
30 The welding consumables shall fulfill the requirements to chemical
composition and mechanical properties in order to be fully compatible with the
material being welded. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, the
consumables and procedures used shall be such that the yield and tensile
strengths of deposited weld metal shall not be less than the respective
minimum values of the parent metal being welded
31 Welding consumables used with grades of steel other than those complying
with the requirements of the standards designated in BS 5400-6, Clause 3.1.1
shall be such that the performance requirements stated in BS 5400-6, table 1
are achieved.
32 Records and certification of all welding consumables shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least six weeks prior to the commencement of welding of
structural components for the bridge.
2.12 STAINLESS STEEL
33 Stainless steel shall be delivered in a stainless and acid-resistant quality

corresponding to X2CrNiMo 18-14-3 (EN no.1.4435) in accordance with BS
EN 10088.
34 Stainless steel bolts and nuts shall comply with BS EN ISO 3506, steel grade
A4 and property class 80. The dimensions and tolerances of bolts and nuts
shall comply with BS 3692. The dimensions and tolerances of tapered
washers shall comply with BS 3410 and the dimensions and tolerances of flat
washers shall comply with BS 4320, Form C.
2.13 GROUT BASES
35 Grout for bedding steel bases and for filling bolt pockets bases shall be based
on OPC and shall have minimum the same grade strength as the surrounding
foundation concrete. The group shall contain a non-metallic expanding
admixture and shall have a total chloride content of not more that 0.1% by
mass of cement.
36 Non-shrink grout for bedding steel bases and for filling bolt pockets shall be a
proprietary type approved by the Engineer and shall be suitable for filling the
space by pouring under a suitable head. The compressive strength of the
grout shall not be less than the 28-day strength of the concrete. The grout
shall be a prepackaged grout mix with non-bleeding characteristics. Grout
shall not contain aluminum powder or any other gas forming agent that
produces carbon dioxide, oxygen, or air. The prepackaged grout system shall
be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The
Contractor shall establish a trial batch testing programme for mixes that are to
be used in the Works and the results shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
37 A dry packed mortar may be used for bedding steel bases which exceed 75
mm thick. The mortar shall consist of 1 part by weight of cement to 2 parts by
weight of fine aggregate together with the minimum amount of water
necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for thorough ramming against
supports such that the space is completely filled.
38 Grout for filling pocket bases shall be a mix approved by the Engineer with a
nominal maximum aggregate size of 10 mm.
Add new Parts 11 to 18 as follows:
PART 11 SUBMISSIONS
11.1 PARTICULARS OF STEEL
1 All steel materials shall be delivered with inspection certificate 3.2 in

accordance with BS EN 10204. The inspection certificate shall ensure that the
requirements mentioned in the purchase order are complied with, among
others quantity, quality, chemical composition, strength, certificate, marking.
On all receipts of materials a receipt report shall be worked out, which
unambiguously identifies the inspected batch, extent of inspection, inspection
status (approved/rejected) etc.
2 Inspection certificates and receipt reports shall be submitted to the Engineer

not later than 2 days after the steel has been delivered to the place of
fabrication.
11.2 QUALITY PLAN
3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a Quality Plan for
inspection and testing of the steelwork and associated components. The
Quality Plan shall describe in words and schedules the intended testing and
inspection procedures to be followed for the Works. For welding the Quality
Plan shall comply with requirements in BS EN ISO 14731, BS EN ISO 3834-1
and BS EN ISO 3834.
4 The results of testing and inspection shall be registered in a way, that the
following requirements to traceability (refer BS EN ISO 3834-2) are met:
Item Specification Traceability
Clause Limited Complete
Inspection and testing, x
Steel materials, x
Stainless steel materials x
Cast Steel, x
Bolts, screws, nuts and washers, x
Inspection for lamination, x
Inspection of preparation x
Inspection of handling of welding consumables x
Inspection of the execution of welds x
Identification of welders x
Inspection of welds, x
Testing for tightness x
Surface inspection at removed attachments x
Damages during transportation and at receiving, x
Inspection of tightening of bolts, x

Deviations in adjoining structures x
Inspection of geometrical imperfections x
Inspection of main geometry and installation x
Note: ‘X’ denotes traceability required.
5 The Contractor shall submit Trial Assembly Reports to the Engineer for
approval as described in Clauses 13.5 and 16.6.6.
11.3 PARTICULARS OF WORKSHOP DRAWINGS
6 Two hardcopy sets of drawings of all parts of the steelwork shall be submitted
to the Engineer. The workshop drawings shall show the following details:
a. steelwork and welds, including any stud welds, marked with the relevant
welding procedures,
b. joints or non-standard welds proposed by the Contractor,
c. locations and method of removal of any temporary welded attachments
proposed by the Contractor,
d. edges of steelwork complying with BS 5400-6 to be formed by flame cut-
ting or shearing procedures complying with BS 5400-6, clause 4.3.3 (a),
(d) or (e) with the edges marked with the procedures to be used, and
e. parts of steelwork complying with BS 5400-6 to be worked by hot
processes complying with BS 5400-6, clause 4.8, 4.9 or 4.10 with the
parts marked with the processes to be used.
7 The drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 6 weeks
before fabrication of the steelwork commences. Drawings shall not be
approved until all procedures and details shown on the drawings have been
approved by the Engineer.
8
9 A hardcopy print and an electronic version in pdf-format of the approved
drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 7 days before fabrication
of the steelwork commences.
11.4 PARTICULARS OF DELIVERY OF STEELWORK
10 The following particulars of steelwork fabricated off the Site shall be submitted
to the Engineer:
a. expected and actual arrival dates,
b. name of carrier,
c. duplicate copies of bill of lading and packing list for steelwork transported
by sea, and
d. duplicate copies of delivery note and a list showing the marking and
weight of each component for steelwork transported by land.
11 The particulars of expected arrival date and name of carrier shall be

submitted to the Engineer at least 14 days before the due date; other
particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer within 3 days delivery of the
steelwork to the Site.
12 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval a
Method Statement containing complete plans and procedures for lifting,
loading and transportation of the pre-assembled sections of the bridge deck.
The Method Statement shall comprise all aspects of the lifting, loading and
transportation and shall as a minimum include the following particulars:
a. Equipment to be used including details of the transport barges, including

classification etc.
b. Details of lifting points.
c. Details of reinforcement for lifting, for the fastening to transport barges
and for transport purposes.
d. Details of lifting and lowering arrangements.
e. Details of fastening equipment for transport by sea.
f. Details of temporary bearings and any other devices for temporary
support.
g. Mooring system, layout and details.
h. Positioning system with indication of accuracy.
i. Procedure for weather and hydrological forecasting.
j. Time Schedule.
k. Criteria for start/stop of the main activities.
l. Plan for extra equipment in case of an emergency situation.
m. Detailed calculations and documentations of procedures based on the de-
sign criteria for both equipment and the finished structure, and on model
tests.
13 Transportation shall be carried out in such a way that the steel surfaces are
not exposed to direct contact with seawater. The erection sections and
segments shall be covered in such a way that no water or splashing can get
onto the interior surfaces of the elements. Edges prepared for welding shall
also be protected. During lifting, loading and transportation the erection
sections and segments shall be placed so that waves cannot slam onto their
panels.
(a)
11.5 PARTICULARS OF METHOD OF ERECTING STEELWORK
14 The proposed method of erecting steelwork shall be carried out in accordance

with the general rules of BS 5400-6, supplemented with the further
requirements given in these Particular Technical Specifications.
15 The methods of erection of the pre-assembled sections of the bridge deck are
to be devised by the Contractor. The methods of erection shall be such that
during or after erection the maximum stresses in any part of the permanent
structure do not cause any permanent deformation or damage. Appropriate
values of loads and partial load factors for erection loading conditions shall be
agreed with the Engineer.
16 A Method Statement shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval

describing in words and schedules the proposed methods of erection. The
Method Statement shall as a minimum include the following particulars:
a. sequence and method of erection of steelwork,

b. method of lifting and handling the components,
c. method of preventing damage to protective coatings on steelwork during
lifting and handling,
d. procedure for aligning, levelling and plumbing steelwork, including
temporary supports and method of making beddings for components in
contact with concrete,
e. sequence of casting concrete at connection between steel main girders
and concrete diaphragms,
f. sequence of casting concrete at connection between steel main girders
and concrete deck.
17 The Contractor shall submit the Method Statement to the Engineer for
acceptance at least 12 weeks before erection of the steelwork commences.
11.6 WELDER CERTIFICATES
18 Certificates endorsed by an inspecting authority approved by the Engineer
shall be submitted to the Engineer to demonstrate that each welder has been
approved in accordance with BS 4570, BS EN 1011-8, BS EN 287-1 or BS
4872-1 as appropriate. The extent of approval of the welder shall be
appropriate to the categories of welds which he will carry out.
19 The welder certificates shall be submitted at least 4 weeks before fabrication

of the steelwork commences.
11.7 PARTICULARS OF WELDING PROCEDURES
20 The following particulars of the proposed welding procedures shall be

prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer:
(a) written welding procedures in accordance with BS EN ISO 15607 for each
type and size of weld.
(b) documentation endorsed by an independent inspecting authority approved

by the Engineer to show that the welding procedure in previous tests has
complied with the welding procedure test requirements stated in the
Specification.
(c) records of approval tests as stated in Clause 12.6 if procedure trials (tests)
are required under Clause 12.1.
21 The particulars for permanent and temporary welds shall be submitted to the
Engineer at the same time as welder certificates are submitted.
11.8 PARTICULARS OF STUD WELDING, FLAME CUTTING AND SHEARING

PROCEDURES
22 The following particulars of the proposed stud welding, flame cutting and
shearing procedures for steelwork complying with B5400-6 shall be prepared
by the Con- tractor and submitted to the Engineer:
(a) written procedures for welding of each type and size of shear studs complying
with BS 5400-6, Clause 4.7.4 and flame cutting and shearing processes com-
plying with BS 5400-6, Clause 4.3.3.(a), (d) or (c)
(b) documentation endorsed by an inspecting authority approved by the Engineer

to show that the stud welding, flame cutting or shearing procedure has com-
plied with the procedure test requirements stated in the Specification in
previous tests, and
(c) reports of procedure trials (test) as stated in Clause 12.6 if procedure trials
(tests) are required under Clause 12.1.
23 The particulars shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 4 weeks before

fabrication of the steelwork starts.
11.9 PARTICULARS OF VENT HOLES FOR GALVANIZING
24 Particulars of the method of plugging vent holes required for hot-dip
galvanizing hollow or box sections shall be submitted to the Engineer at least
3 weeks before fabrication of the steelwork starts.
11.10 PARTICULARS OF METHOD OF NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
25 Particulars of the proposed method for carrying out non-destructive testing on

welds shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 4 weeks before the tests
start.
11.11 PARTICULARS OF INSPECTION AUTHORITY AND TESTING

CONSULTANT
26 The name of the proposed independent inspection organization endorsing

welder certificates, recording approval tests for welding procedures and
carrying out and documenting non-destructive inspection of the finished welds
shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval. The
inspection organization shall be recognized according to BS EN ISO/IEC
17024, or other rules which are approved by the Engineer.
27 Testing of procedures and pre-production testing shall be performed by an

acknowledged testing laboratory procured by the Contractor.
28 Personnel who perform non-destructive testing or assess the results
hereof
29 (Verification) shall meet the requirements for certification according to BS EN
473, or other rules which are approved by the Engineer, according to the
following rules:
• Superior responsibility: Level 3
• Performance: Min. Level 1
• Evaluation: Min. Level 2
30 Personnel who perform visual examination and inspection shall meet the
requirement for certification as "welding inspector" according to document
CSWIP-W1-6-80, latest edition and BS EN 473 or other rules, which are
approved by the Engineer.
31 The Contractor has the right to perform non-destructive testing as an element
of surveillance, without requirements of certification for his own test
personnel.
32 The Contractor shall ensure that the equipment used by the inspection
organization shall be covered by a calibration arrangement. The calibration
interval/date shall appear unambiguously from the information on the
equipment or on a calibration log attached to the equipment.
33 The name of the proposed inspection organization shall be submitted at least
6 weeks before approval tests start or, if approval tests are not required, at
the same time as the welder certificates are submitted.
34 The Contractor shall be responsible for procuring the independent inspection
organization.
35 The name of the proposed testing consultant stated in Clause 18.1 shall be
submitted to the Engineer at least 3 weeks before the testing consultant
commences work.
11.12 SAMPLES OF MATERIALS
36 Samples of each type of shear stud, nut, bolt and washer shall be provided
within 3 days after the material is delivered to the Site.
PART 12 PROCEDURE TESTS
12.1 PROCEDURE TESTS FOR WELDING, FLAME CUTTING AND SHEARING
1 If in the opinion of the Engineer the proposed welding procedure in previous

tests has not complied with the welding procedure test requirements stated in
the Specification, a welding procedure test shall be carried out.
2 Welding procedure tests for structural steel shall comply with BS 5400-6,
Clauses 4.7.3, 5.4.1.1 and 5.4.1.2.
3 If in the opinion of the Engineer the proposed stud welding procedure in
previous tests has not complied with the welding procedure test requirements
stated in the Specification, a welding procedure test shall be carried out.
4 Welding procedure tests for studs shall comply with BS 5400-6, Clauses 4.7.4
and 5.4.4.
5 If in the opinion of the Engineer the proposed flame cutting and shearing
procedures in previous tests have not complied with the procedure test
requirements stated in the Specification, a procedure test shall be carried out.
6 Procedure tests for flame cutting and shearing shall comply with BS 5400-6,
Clauses 4.7.3 and 5.4.3.
7 If in a welding procedure one or more of the parts to be welded is coated with
a prefabrication primer or metal coating before welding, the same primer or
coating shall be applied to the sample before the welding procedure test for
the welding procedure is carried out.
8 The thickness of the sample of material to be used in procedure tests for
flame cutting shall be:
9 20 mm for material not exceeding 20 mm thickness
10 40 mm for material exceeding 20 mm and not exceeding 40 mm thickness,
and
11 T mm for material exceeding (T-10) mm and not exceeding T mm thick,
where T is any multiple of 10 from 50 up.
12 Pre-production welding tests shall without exceptions be carried out
13 The pre-production welding tests shall determine all the parameters
necessary for carrying out the welding and demonstrate that the specified
penetrations are achieved.
14 The restraint conditions in the tests shall resemble the conditions in the field.
15 The exact shape of the weld profiles shall be determined as part of the pre-
production welding tests. Parts of the tests shall be possible to use as
geometrical prototypes for the welded joints.
16 A WPQR (Welding Procedure Qualification Record) shall follow with each test
containing information as required in applicable BS standards.
12.2 INSPECTION OF PROCEDURE TESTS FOR WELDING, FLAME CUTTING

AND SHEARING
17 Procedure tests for welding, flame cutting and shearing shall be carried out in
the presence of an inspecting authority approved by the Engineer.
12.3 RESULTS OF PROCEDURE TESTS FOR WELDING, FLAME CUTTING

AND SHEARING
18 If a procedure test for welding, flame cutting and shearing does not comply
with the specified requirements for the procedure test, the cause of failure
shall be established by the Contractor and particulars of proposed changes
shall be submitted to the Engineer. Further procedure tests shall be carried
out to establish the amended procedure unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer.
12.4 APPROVED PROCEDURES FOR WELDING, FLAME CUTTING AND

SHEARING
19 A welding, flame cutting or shearing procedure which complies with the

specified requirements for the procedure test shall become an approved
procedure.
20
21 If a procedure test is not required, the procedure of welding, flame cutting or
shearing submitted as stated in Clauses 3.7 and 3.8 shall become an
approved procedure.
12.5 COMMENCEMENT OF WELDING, FLAME CUTTING AND SHEARING
22 Welding, flame cutting or shearing shall not commence until the procedure
has been approved by the Engineer.
12.6 CHANGES IN PROCEDURES FOR WELDING, FLAME CUTTING AND

SHEARING
23 Unless permitted by the Engineer, approved procedures for welding, flame

cutting or shearing shall not be changed. Further procedure tests shall be
carried out to demonstrate proposed changes to the procedure unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
12.7 RECORDS OF PROCEDURE TESTS FOR WELDING, FLAME CUTTING

AND SHEARING
24 A WPQR shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 3 weeks

before fabrication of the steelwork starts. The record shall in principle be in
the form stated in BS EN ISO 15614-1 and shall be endorsed by the
inspecting authority approved by the Engineer.
25 Reports of procedure tests for stud welding, flame cutting and shearing shall
be submitted to the Engineer at least 3 weeks before fabrication of the
steelwork starts.
PART 13 FABRICATION OF STEELWORK
13.1 HANDLING AND TRANSPORT OF STEELWORK
1 Steelwork shall not be subject to rough handling, shock loading or dropping

from a height. All members and components shall be fabricated and
assembled with the requirements of transportation in mind to ensure that no
harmful stress or other damage is incurred by the member or component.
2 During handling and transport of coated steelwork, the steelwork shall be

separated from wires and lashings by rubber padding in such a manner that
the coatings are not damaged or discoloured. Free ends shall be stiffened,
measures shall be taken to prevent permanent distortion and machined
surfaces and faying surfaces shall be protected.
3
4 Steelwork shall not be lifted from the painting bed until the last applied coating
is sufficiently dry or cured for handling.
5
6 Rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, screws and small plates and articles shall be
packed in containers marked to identify the contents.
7
8 Members and components subjected to lower temperatures than defined in
BS EN 10025 during handling or transportation may be rejected, if found to be
damaged.
13.2 STORAGE OF STEELWORK
9 Materials, semi-finished and finished products shall be stored separately and

in such a way that they are not damaged or deteriorated.
10 All fabricated sections shall be kept dry during fabrication. Sections shall be
leak tested prior to leaving the fabrication yard, unless they are protected by
dehumidification in the finished structure. All air-tight sections which are not
protected against corrosion by dehumidification shall be leak tested such as
trough ribs and sections enclosed by nose plate and edge plate. The air
pressure used for the test shall be approximately 0.2 bar. Each fabricated
section undergoing testing shall prior to testing be documented by the
Contractor for possessing structural capacity to carry the air pressure.
Documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 2
weeks before testing.
11 Steelwork shall be stored off the ground on level supports in well drained
areas in a manner which will not result in damage or deformation to the
steelwork or coatings or in contamination of the steelwork of coatings.
Packings shall be placed between steelwork which is stacked.
12 Covered places in which steelwork is stacked shall be ventilated.
13 Different types and sizes of steelwork shall be stored separately.
14 Steelwork shall not be stored on or adjacent to concrete surfaces which form
part of the Works.
15 Steelwork shall be protected from exposure to conditions which may affect
the steelwork or coatings.
13.3 FABRICATION OF STEELWORK
16 Fabrication of steelwork shall comply with BS 5400-6, Clauses 4.1 to 4.16

except as stated in these Particular Technical Specifications.
17 Stainless steel shall not come in contact with surfaces of black steel or zinc
except when fully embedded in structural concrete or as final contact between
items of permanent works as shown on the Drawings. If stainless steel
materials are lifted - e.g. with chains of steel - the chains shall be wrapped
with plastic hoses or similar.
18 When materials are used or processed they must not show a rust grade
worse than B in accordance with BS EN ISO 8501-1.
19 The Contractor shall commence the production process by blast cleaning the
steelwork to at least Sa2 in accordance with BS EN ISO 8501-1.
20 Threaded holes shall be provisionally protected e.g. with grease or similar.
21 Plates in the main bridge deck shall be placed with the rolling direction
conforming to the longitudinal direction of the bridge and for the cross girders
in the transverse direction of the bridge.
22 Splicing of steel members in addition to the ones shown on the Drawings

shall be made as full penetration butt welds. The position of the splice and
also the execution is subject to advance approval by the Engineer.
23 If continuous trough stiffeners fabricated by bending or rolling are to be cut it

has to be ensured that they are free of stresses in order to keep the shape of
the stiffener after being cut.
24 As a result of temporary steel work items to be designed by the Contractor it

may be necessary for holes to be introduced in the permanent steel. The
Contractor shall propose the location and dimensions of such holes and
design and fabricate adequate strengthening measures within the steel and
submit to the Engineer for approval.
13.4 TRIAL ASSEMBLY, GENERAL
25 Prior to the approval of fabricated steelwork sections trial assembly shall

verify correct geometry once erected. Prior to commencement of the trial
assembly the Contractor shall submit a plan describing the methods and
procedures for measuring, recording, and controlling the geometry of the
bridge structure. The procedure shall include methods for combining the
survey results of each individual trial assembly to calculate and check the
cumulative geometry of the complete bridge structure as trial assembly
proceeds. Procedures for trial assembly are subject to acceptance by the
Engineer.
26 Trial assembly of the bridge deck in the workshop is not foreseen because
the bridge deck is erected on temporary false work.
13.5 WELDING, HEATING AND CUTTING
27 All welding shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN ISO 3834-2 and BS
EN 1011.
28 Welding shall in general be performed in a closed workshop and at

temperatures above 10 degrees Celsius. Where welding has to be performed
outside and/or at lower temperatures the arrangements by the Contractor to
assure the quality of the welding shall be presented to the Engineer for
approval before commencement of the welding. Welding to be performed
outside shall be protected from fog, mist, moisture, rain etc. that may affect
the quality of the welding.
29 Tack welding shall be removed or completely melted during the final welding.
30 After the completion of the welding all weld spatter and all slag shall be
carefully removed.
31 Welding shall be carried out by welders who possess a valid welding
certificate for the appropriate category of welding. A welder shall cease to
carry out welding if any of the circumstances stated in BS 4570, Clause
21.1, BS EN 1011-8 or BS 4872-1, Clause 6 as appropriate occurs, or the
requirements stated in BS EN 287-1, Clause 10.1 are not satisfied.
32 Intermittent welding is not allowed.
33 Pre-setting, pre-bending, skip welding, back-step techniques and other
measures shall be taken as necessary to counteract shrinkage or distortion
due to welding, gouging, thermal cutting or heat treatment.
34 Butt welds shall have penetration, full or partial, as shown on the Drawings
Butt welds in each component part shall be completed before the final
assembly of built-up assemblies.
35 Temporary welded attachments shall not be used unless permitted by the
Engineer.
36 Welding, heating or thermal cutting processes which give off toxic or irritant
gases shall not be used unless permitted by the Engineer; if permitted,
precautions, including the provision of exhaust ventilation, breathing
apparatus and display of warning signs, shall be taken to enable the work to
be carried out in safe conditions. Welding, heating or thermal cutting shall not
be carried out within 2 m of lead-based, cadmium or carbonaceous coatings.
37 Heat treatment shall not be used unless accepted by the Engineer.
Documentation shall be given that the mechanical properties are not affected.
13.6 TIGHTENING OF BOLTS

38 Bolts shall be tightened in such a manner that the contact surfaces of
permanent bolted joints are drawn into close contact.
13.7 DEFECTS IN STEELWORK
39 Defective components for steelwork shall not be used in the Works unless
repair of the defects is permitted by the Engineer; if permitted, defective
components shall be repaired by methods agreed by the Engineer.
13.8 APPROVAL OF FABRICATED STEELWORK

40 Fabricated steelwork shall not be:
(b) covered with protective coatings, concrete or other materials,

(c) erected, or
(d) dispatched from the place of fabrication if fabricated off the Site until the
steelwork, including any repaired areas, complies with the specified test
and inspection requirements and has been approved by the Engineer.
PART 14 ERECTION OF STEELWORK
14.1 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS AND FASTENINGS TO STEELWORK
41 Steelwork shall be secured in position by temporary supports and fastenings

until sufficient permanent connections are complete to withstand the loadings
liable to be encountered during erection. The temporary supports and
fastenings shall be capable of withstanding loadings which may be
encountered during erection and shall not damage the steelwork or the
protective coatings.
42
43 Any required strengthening, fastenings etc. which the Contractor may require
in any part of the Works for handling, sea transportation, erection equipment
etc. shall be designed by the Contractor to the approval of the Engineer.
Where possible these strengthening, fastenings etc. shall be made on a
surface that is not visible on the completed structure.
44 The strengthening, fastenings etc. shall not be left in the completed structure
unless approved by the Engineer. When removing the attachments they shall
be cut off at a suitable distance from the parent metal and the surface of the
parent metal shall be restored by grinding. The Engineer may require scars in
the surface to be filled by welding and ground flush.
45 After the removal of attachments a magnetic-particle examination shall be

carried out to ensure that there are no cracks in the surface of the parent
metal.
46 Sea fastening:
• The Contractor is responsible for the safe fastening of the elements to the
transport vessel during transport to the final position.
• The Contractor's design principles for sea fastenings shall be submitted to the
Engineer with drawings and calculations no later than 3 months after the
Commencement Date.
• Welding fixtures on the elements may only be carried out with the approval of
the Engineer. Fixtures shall be removed after installation of the elements
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
• The Contractor shall determine the acceleration forces which the elements and
the fastening structures will be exposed to during transport. The acceleration
forces shall include both rolling, pitching and heaving motion in combination.
Based on the results the Contractor shall determine the design criteria and
design and provide the sea fastenings.
Temporary supports:
• All temporary supports etc. adjacent to the Works shall be sufficiently painted in
order to prevent discolouring from rust of the permanent works.
47 Bolted connections shall be aligned using drifts complying with BS 5400-6,

Clause 4.12 and shall be temporarily fastened using service bolts.
14.2 ALIGNMENT OF STEELWORK
48 Steelwork shall be erected in such a manner that the alignment and levels of
the steelwork comply with the tolerances stated in Clause 15.2; allowance
shall be made for the effects of temperature on the steelwork.
49 Measures shall be taken to ensure that the steelwork will remain stable before
temporary supports and fastenings are slackened or removed for lining,
leveling, plumbing or other purposes. The temporary supports and fastenings
shall be re- tightened or replaced as soon as the adjustments are complete
and at the end of each continuous period of working.
50 Permanent connections shall be made as soon as a sufficient portion of the

steelwork has been lined, leveled and plumbed. Temporary supports and
fastenings shall be replaced by permanent connections progressively and in
such a manner that the parts connected are securely restrained in the aligned
position at all times.
51 Permanent connections for each portion of steelwork shall be completed not

more than 14 days after the portion has been erected.
52 No welding shall be started at an erection weld until the correct relative

alignment of the two adjacent sections is achieved and fixed with the assumed
attachments.
14.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES FOR STEELWORK
53 The material, size, position and cover of packs, shims and other supporting
devices for steelwork which are to be embedded shall be as approved by the
Engineer.
PART 15 TOLERANCES
15.1 FABRICATION OF STEELWORK
1 The materials for the Works and the fabrication, assembly and erection
of the Works shall be to the tolerances stated in the Particular Technical
Specifications. Fabrication tolerances for steelwork shall in general comply
with BS 5400-6, Clause 4.2.
2 Furthermore the following requirements apply for the composite bridge girder:
• Within a plate section of 5.0 x 5.0 m the deviation of the steel plate from a plane
surface shall be kept at a maximum of 5 mm. The deviation is defined as the
total distance between two parallel planes.
• Flatness of all free plate sections between webs of stiffeners shall be limited to
b/20t mm or 1.5 mm whichever is the greater, where b is the width of the shorter
side of the plate between webs of stiffeners and t is the thickness of the plate.
This requirement replaces the requirement for member/component type 1 in
Table 8 of BS 5400-6. For definition of Flatness, refer to BS 5400-6.
• The deviation, perpendicular to the bottom of the box-section, of a diaphragm

and the two adjacent diaphragms in either direction shall be less than 8 mm.
The deviation shall be measured from straight lines parallel to the member axis
connecting the adjacent diaphragms in either direction. This requirement
replaces the requirement for member/component type 5 in Table 8 of BS 5400-
6.
• The overall depth of a U-section shall be within +/-5 mm of that shown on the
Drawings and within +/-3 mm of that of the adjacent section to which it will be
joined.
• The overall width of a longitudinal girder section shall be within +/-10 mm of that
shown on the Drawings and within +/-5 mm of that of the adjacent section to
which it will be joined.
• In the completed structure the cross-fall shall not deviate more than 0.15% from
the specified cross-fall.
15.2 ERECTION OF STEELWORK
3 The tolerance requirements on the final vertical alignment for the bridge
reference condition are defined on the Drawings.
4 The construction alignment is the intended vertical alignment at the
completion of the erection works, i.e. before application of certain permanent
loads like wearing surface, barriers, lighting etc.
5 The Contractor shall determine tolerances for the construction vertical
alignment which take into account the variations in stiffness and weight and
which make it possible to fulfill the requirements for the final design vertical
alignment.
PART 16 TESTING CONSULTANT
16.1 TESTING CONSULTANT
1 All tests which are stated in the Specification to be carried out by an approved
testing consultant shall be carried out by a testing consultant employed by the
Con- tractor and approved by the Engineer.
2 The testing consultant shall report directly to the Engineer.
PART 17 TESTING: TESTS ON STEELWORK AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS
17.1 TESTING: TESTS ON STEELWORK AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS
1 Tests shall be carried out on structural steel in accordance with BS 5400-6,

Clauses 5.2.1 and 5.3. Ultrasonic testing by the methods given in BS EN
10160 shall be carried out either at the steel mills or by the Contractor before
fabrication, to test the areas specified in BS 5400-6, Clause 3.1.4 for internal
imperfection. Acceptance levels according to BS 5996 as described in BS
5400-6, Clause 3.1.4.1 shall be replaced by the equivalent or higher level as
defined in BS EN 10160.
2 The tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer at the manufacturer's

works on samples selected by the manufacturer.
PART 18 TESTING: STEELWORK
18.1 BATCH: STEELWORK
1 A batch of steelwork is the amount of steelwork delivered to the fabricator

from a single cast.
2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a list of the parts included in each
batch at least 7 days before testing starts.
18.2 SAMPLES: STEELWORK
3 Samples for testing shall be selected by the approved testing consultant.
4 Samples shall be selected from positions which in the opinion of the Engineer
or approved testing consultant are representative of the batch as a whole.
5 The Engineer shall inform the Contractor of the samples selected for testing
at least 3 days before testing starts.
18.3 TESTING: STEELWORK
6 The relevant tests stated in Clauses 18.7 to 18.11 shall be carried out on
each batch of steelwork.
7 The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least 7 days before tests are
carried out.
18.4 REPORTS OF TESTS ON STEELWORK
8 Records of tests on steelwork carried out by the Contractor or the approved

testing consultant shall be kept by the Contractor and a report shall be
submitted to the Engineer at least 7 days before approval of the batch of
steelwork tested is required. The report shall contain the following details:
a. procedure tested and exact test location in the steelwork,
b. results of tests compared to the required values, with any non-

complying results highlighted,
c. any tearing, cracking or other defects, and
d. conclusion as to the overall acceptability of the parts of steelwork

examined by the approved testing consultant.
9 Reports shall be certified by the Contractor's authorized representative or by

the approved testing consultant who carried out the tests.
18.5 NON-COMPLIANCE: STEELWORK
10 If the results of any test on steelwork stated in Clauses 18.7 to 18.11 do not
comply with the specified requirements for the test, the test shall be carried
out on additional samples from the batch in accordance with BS EN 10025.
11 The batch shall be considered as not complying with the specified

requirements for the test if the result of any additional test does not comply
with the specified requirements for the test.
12 If the result of every additional test complies with the specified requirements
for the test, only those parts representing the samples which have failed in the
original tests shall be considered as not complying with the specified
requirements of the test.
18.6 SAMPLES: STEEL
13 Samples of steel shall be provided from each batch of steel within 3 days
after delivery of the batch to the fabricator's works or to the Site. The position
and direction of the samples shall be in accordance with BS EN 10025.
18.7 TESTING: STEEL
14 The tensile test and the impact test shall be carried out in accordance
with BS EN 10002-1 and BS EN 10045-1 respectively.
15 Quality grading of structural steel shall be carried out on steel which has not
been tested for quality grades by the manufacturer. Quality grading shall be
carried out in accordance with BS 5400-6, Clause 3.1.4 or BS 5950-2, Clause
2.1.6 as appropriate.
16 Testing and quality grading shall be carried out by the approved testing
consultant.
18.8 TESTING: WELDS
17 Examination and testing of welds shall be carried out after post-weld heat
treatment and before the application of corrosion protective coatings. De-
burring, dressing, grinding, machining and peening shall be carried out after
the visual inspection for cracks, surface pores and joint fit-up and before
other inspections and tests are carried out.
18 Destructive testing of welds for steelwork complying with BS 5400-6 shall be

carried out in accordance with BS 5400-6, C l a u s e s 5.5.1.1, 5.5.1.2 and
5.5.1.3.
19 Welds for structural steel shall be visually inspected in accordance with BS EN

970. Extent of inspection shall be 100%.
Non-destructive testing shall be carried out on a proportion of welds after

visual inspection. The compliance criteria are related to chosen quality levels
for imperfections as stated in BS EN ISO 5817. Weld classes A, B, C and D
apply as defined in Table 13.4.
The proportion of welds to be tested shall be determined by the class of weld

as specified on the Drawings. The Contractor shall produce NDT-drawings
defining each weld with regard to:
e. weld number,
f. weld type,
g. weld orientation,
h. weld class,
i. NDT-inspection type,
j. NDT- inspection intensity.
The Contractor shall prepare an Inspection Plan. The plan shall as a minimum
contain the following:
a. A system for identification of field documentation.

b.
c. Plans of registration, which makes it possible to trace the field
documentation back to the individual parts of the structure as well as to
read the immediate inspection status.
d.
e. An account of which test procedures/methods/extents are valid for each
type of weld.
f.
g. A division of the welding works in inspection groups.
h.
i. Rules for extension of inspection and repeated inspection if non-
conforming welds are detected.
j.
k. Rules for lowering of inspection intensity.
l.
m. Succession of inspection and testing activities.
n. Hold points where inspection and testing shall be completed before

production may proceed.
20 During the preparation of NDT-procedures and during the start-up period the
following test-inspections intensities shall be fulfilled:
Table 13.4:
Weld class NDT-inspection intensity

Shop welds* Erection welds**
A 20% 100%
B 100% (1), 20% (2) 100%
C 20% 20%
D 5% 20%
* Shop welds are defined as welds performed in a shielded area eliminating
wind and wetness on all surfaces and providing light, natural or artificial for the
welding to be performed without adversely affecting the quality of the welding.
** Erection welds are defined as welds performed at the bridge location during
erection, including transverse full penetration butt welds, trough welds, welds in T-
stiffeners or other welds not performed in the workshop.
(1) All welds between main girder/cross girder and welds perpendicular to the
primary loading direction
(2) Welds parallel to the primary loading direction
The stated inspection percentages shall be evenly distributed on the welders

engaged in the welding of each unit in question.
The Contractor shall prepare an inspection statistic documenting the following:
(a) inspection of each welder engaged in the welding
(b) rate of imperfections, separated in hard and soft imperfections, for each weld
number. For definition of hard and soft imperfections, see Table 13.5 below.
The selected areas for inspection shall ensure that the "high risk" areas, such as
weld ends and weld crossings, are given priority.
21 Welds inspected by ultrasonic testing shall be spot checked during

fabrication by X-ray inspection as a verification of the interpretation of the
quality requirements. 5% of the UT-inspected length of a weld shall be
checked by X-ray.
22 Where both UT and X-ray inspection shall be performed in accordance with

NDT- drawings, the testing shall be distributed on UT and X-ray in the
proportion 70% UT and 30% X-ray. The testing shall be performed at
different places in order to ensure that 100% of the weld in question is
tested. The spot check requirement described above also applies for the
UT-inspected length.
23 For penetrations less than about 10-15 mm the UT-inspection shall be

performed from the external side of the plate, opposite the weld (typically the
non-chamfered plate). The UT-inspection shall focus on detecting lamellar
tearing and detecting if the prescribed penetration has been achieved.
Application of this "limited" UT- inspection shall for each weld be accepted
by the Engineer. During the preparation of NDT-procedures and during the
start-up period test-inspections shall be performed in order to define the
limits for and the ratio of penetrations/plate thick- nesses where a UT-
inspection of the complete weld (weld metal and HAZ) can be performed.
24 Weld imperfections are divided into hard imperfections and soft

imperfections as listed below. The numbering of imperfections is according to
BS EN ISO 6520-1.
Table 13.5:
Hard imperfections Soft imperfections

Group No. 100, Cracks All other imperfections
Group No. 400, Lack of fusion and
penetration
In case of hard imperfections exceeding the acceptance limits, the inspection of

that weld number shall be extended to the next level of inspection intensity for the
unit in question for the welder performing the part of the weld, where the
imperfections were disclosed, i.e. for welds starting with an inspection intensity of
5%, the extension shall be from 5% to 20%. If the extended inspection discloses
imperfections exceeding the limits, the inspection shall be extended to 50% and
finally 100%.
25 If the inspection at 100% discloses imperfections exceeding the limits, the

weld number shall be inspected 100% in 5 units. The selection of 5 units
to be selected shall be at the discretion of the Engineer.
26 Whenever a hard imperfection is disclosed, the cause of the imperfections

shall be investigated and corrective actions shall be implemented.
27 In case of soft imperfections exceeding the limits, the inspection extent of that
weld number shall be doubled in the unit.
28 If the extended inspection discloses imperfections exceeding the limits, the

inspection extent of the weld number shall again be doubled until intensity
of 100% is reached.
29 If the inspection extended to 100% discloses imperfections exceeding the

limits, the weld number shall be inspected 100% in 5 units selected at the
discretion of the Engineer.
30 The NDT-method most appropriate for disclosing the type of imperfections

causing the extension shall be used for the extended inspections.
31 When production is past the start-up period and imperfections are found to be
kept well below the limit the NDT-testing intensity can be lowered for
selected weld numbers. The selection of welds to be lowered in NDT-
testing intensity is to be suggested by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer. The lowered intensity will be abandoned if imperfections exceed
the limit and an intensity one level above the start-up intensity applies.
32 Fracture toughness of weld metal and heat affected zones shall be verified by
COD testing, when the thickness of the weld exceeds 50 mm. The
Contractor's programmed COD testing shall be included in the Inspection
Plan.
The non-destructive examination and visual inspection of welds may
commence at the earliest 48 hours after finished welding.
All non-destructive examination of the finished welds shall be documented

by the inspection organization.
33 In cases where the Contractor has to repair welds the method of repair shall
be proposed by the Contractor for the approval of the Engineer. A weld
must not be repaired more than two times. In cases where a weld is
rejected after a second repair an appropriate piece of the structure
containing the weld in question shall be cut out and replaced by a new
piece. Such replacement is subject to approval by the Engineer.
34 Non-destructive testing of butt welds shall be carried out either by ultrasonic

examination in accordance with BS EN 1714, BS 3923-2 or by radiographic
examination in accordance with BS EN 1435. Non-destructive testing of fillet
welds shall be carried out by either by the liquid penetrant method in
accordance with BS EN 571-1 or the magnetic particle flaw detection method
in accordance with BS EN ISO 9934-1. The particular standard or part of
standard to be used shall be appropriate for the joint geometry, material and
production requirements and shall be as agreed by the Engineer. Welds shall
be dressed to facilitate ultrasonic examinations.
35 If the parent metal adjacent to a length of weld subject to non-destructive

testing has been tested for laminations in accordance with BS EN 10160, the
same areas on the parent metal shall be tested by ultrasonic examination in
accordance with BS EN 1714 or BS 3923-2 as appropriate when non-
destructive testing is carried out on that length of weld.
36 Welds for steelwork which has been fabricated and tested by non-destructive
testing at the fabricator's works shall be visually inspected for cracks when the
steelwork is delivered to the Site. 5% of the fillet welds shall be examined for
cracks by the magnetic particle flaw detection method in accordance with BS
EN ISO 9934-1.
37 Testing shall be carried out by the approved testing consultant.
38 An Inspection Plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval describing
in words and schedules the proposed method for carrying out non-destructive
testing on welds. The NDT-method most appropriate for disclosing the type of
imperfections most commonly seen shall be used for the inspections.
39 The proposed Inspection Plan shall follow the general rules of BS 5400-6 and
BS EN ISO 5817, supplemented with the further requirements given in these
Particular Technical Specifications as follows:
a. quality requirements for welding shall be in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h B S E N

ISO 5817, supplemented with the further requirements of Table 13.6. Weld
classes A, B, C and D apply,
b. external discontinuities on the weld, such as sharp melt hollows, incomplete

butt welding, visible pores and shrinkage hollows shall be smoothed or re-
moved,
c. welding switch-on scars, weld spatter and slag remains shall be avoided or
removed,
d. representative test pieces that shall define the acceptance quality shall be
produced and retained throughout the project for comparison with
production welds.
Table 13.6:
Wed Class Designation Quality Requirements
A According to weld class B as specified in BS

EN25817, supplemented with the requirement
that the toes of the weld shall be treated by
suitable means, such as grinding or TIG
dressing, to a very smooth transition between
the weld and the base material, as well as any
toes on the weld surface between different
passes of the weld. By "very smooth" is
understood a rounded transition indicated by a
radius of not less than approx. 4 mm.
B According to weld class B as specified in BS EN

25817, supplemented with the requirement that
the toes of the weld shall have a smooth
transition between the weld and the base
material. Any irregularities at or adjacent to the
weld toes shall be treated by suitable means,
such as grinding or TIG dressing, to fulfill the
requirement of a smooth transition
C According to weld class C of BS EN 25817
D According to weld class D of BS EN 25817
18.9 TESTING: STUD SHEAR CONNECTORS
40 Tests shall be carried out on 5% of welded stud shear connectors in

accordance with BS 5400-6, Clause 5.5.4.
41 Testing shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
18.10 TESTING: FABRICATION TOLERANCE
42 Rolled and built-up sections of steelwork complying with BS 5400-6 shall be

tested to determine compliance with fabrication tolerances in accordance with
BS 5400-6, Clauses 5.6.1 to 5.6.6 and Clause 15.1 of these Particular
Technical Specifications.
43 Testing shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
18.11 TESTING: REPAIRS
44 Defects which have been repaired and adjoining areas which in the opinion
of the Engineer may have been affected by the repair shall be retested as
instructed by the Engineer.
SECTION 17: METALWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.2 References
2 All work shall be executed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following International Design Standards:
No Title
BS 1344 Methods of Testing Vitreous Enamel Finishes
ISO 8290 Vitreous and Porcelain Enamels
PART 2 MATERIAL TYPES AND FINISHES

2.1 GENERAL
2.1.2 References
Add new references as follows:
BS 1344 Methods of Testing Vitreous Enamel Finishes
ISO 8290 Vitreous and Porcelain Enamels
2.4 CARBON STEEL FINISHES
Add new Section 2.4.4 as follows:
2.4.4 Vitreous Enamelling
1 Vitreous enamel panels shall be produced from low grade carbon vitreous
enamelling steel sheets. They shall be coated on both sides, with ground
coats and finishing coats fired individually to ensure correct performance.
2 1.6mm mild steel shall be used for the manufacture of vitreous
enamelling. This shall be low carbon steel with the following composition and
properties:
(a) The steel shall be free from surface blemishes, scale, deep corrosion
marks or any other visible defects.
(b) The panels shall conform to the relevant British and European
standards
(c) The vitreous enamel frit shall be a suitable borosilicate product, made
from inorganic materials suitable for architectural applications.
(d) Texture tolerance for the finished vitreous enamel shall be judged by
eye against the previously agreed test sample.
3 The manufacturer shall confirm that the panels are suitable for use in the
external environments where they are to be located. Panels shall be U.V.
stable and the colours lightfast and constant in all weather conditions for a
minimum period of ten years.
4 The following defects shall not be permitted in the vitreous enamel finish:
Burn-off, Carbon boil, Copperheads, Crawling and tearing, Excessive
dimpling, Grizzle, Skin delamination, Healed-over scratch, Excessive
hairlines, Water line, Pop-off, Sagging, Excessive ‘orange peel’, Surface
contamination A, B, C, Bisque damage, Grease mark, Lumps, Shoreline, Star
marks, Fish scaling,
5 The panels shall be checked for warping and twist as this could cause
problems during assembly.
6 Testing on the panels shall be carried based upon the following:
(a) The vitreous enamel finishes shall be subjected to the acid test. BS
1344: Part 3: 1988. ISO 8290 – 1987
(b) To determinate the resistance to sulphuric acid at room temperature.
A 2% solution of sulphuric acid in distilled water shall be used, with a
contact period between the solution and the finish of 60 minutes. The
enamel shall be Class A. BS 1344: Part 2: 1975, ISO 2722 – 1973.
(c) To determinate the resistance to citric acid at room temperature. A
tests shall be carried out on one finished plate per production batch,
chosen at random. The enamel shall be Class AA for all colours.
Should a failure occur, then citric acid testing shall be carried out on a
further 10% of the plates from the same batch. Further failures will
result in either the scrapping of the entire batch, or individual testing of
each plate.
(d) A sample panel chosen will be subjected to a low voltage test in
accordance with BS 1344: Part 20: 1987 and ISO 8289 – 1986. The
low voltage test is designed to detect and locate defects such as
pores, tears, cracks or spalls which penetrate to the base metal. No
tears, hairline cracks or spalls shall be permitted. The acceptance
standard for pinholes shall be a maximum of 5P/metre2.
(e) A final version inspection shall be carried out on each completed
production panel. Viewing shall be carried out under constant lighting
conditions in a designated area at the manufacturer’s works. Each
panel shall be viewed at a distance of 2 metres to check for colour
matching, clearness pattern definition.
(f) An impact resistance test shall be carried out on a test sample. This is
to assess the adhesion properties of the vitreous panel. The test shall
be carried out on a test panel which has been enamelled with the
production batch. At least one impact test shall be carried out per
production shift on conventional ground/cover coat enamels. Tests
shall be carried out on all colours on all cover coats used by the
vendor. Weight of hardened steel ball 450g, Height of fall 1,000mm,
Diameter of anvil hole 25mm, Diameter of ball 25mm, It is
recommended that three falls be carried out, distributed as widely as
possible over the area. The acceptance standard shall be ‘very good’
to ‘excellent’.
(g) Room temperature citric acid tests shall also be carried out on both
cover coats and screened colours as an alternative to testing the
production panels.
PART 3 WORKMANSHIP
3.1 Fabrication and Assembly
Add new paragraph’s 3 and 4 as follows:
1 All panels shall be manufactured in accordance with non-objected drawings.
Permissible deviations are width and height +/- 2mm, squareness, taking
diagonal of the panel +/- 2mm, twist from any plane or corners +/- 2mm.
2 Thickness of vitreous enamel base colour coat shall be of even thickness
within the range 0.2mm to 0.4mm. The thickness shall be measured using
calibrated equipment supplied by the vendor. The overall combined thickness
of coating on both sides of the panel shall not exceed 0.9mm.
SECTION 18: CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY
PART 7 IRONMONGERY
7.1 GENERAL
Add the following new sub-clauses:
7.1.3 Submittals
1 Includes, but not limited to, the following:
(a) Product data includes manufacturers' technical product data for each
item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of
operating parts and finish and other information necessary to show
compliance with requirements.
(b) Final hardware schedule coordinated with door, frames, and related
work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of
door hardware.
(i) Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware
indicated organize schedule indicating complete designations
of every item required. Include the following information:
(1) Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware
item.
(2) Name and manufacturer of each item.
(3) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
(4) Location of hardware set cross referenced to
indications on drawings both on floor plans and in door
and frame schedule.
(5) Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes
contained in schedule.
(6) Mounting locations for hardware.
(7) Door and frame sizes and materials.
(8) Keying information.
(ii) Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential
product data in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work
that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit final
schedule after samples, product data, coordination with shop
drawings of other work, delivery schedules and similar
information has been completed and accepted.
(iii) Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating
clearly how Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has
been fulfilled.
(iv) Templates for door, frames and other work specified to be
factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware
to comply with indicated requirements.
1 Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock
sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
7.2 GENERAL
Add the following new sub-clauses:
7.1.5 Submittals
2 Includes, but not limited to, the following:
(a) Product data includes manufacturers' technical product data for each
item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of
operating parts and finish and other information necessary to show
compliance with requirements.
(b) Final hardware schedule coordinated with door, frames, and related
work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of
door hardware.
(i) Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware
indicated organize schedule indicating complete designations
of every item required. Include the following information:
(1) Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware
item.
(2) Name and manufacturer of each item.
(3) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
(4) Location of hardware set cross referenced to
indications on drawings both on floor plans and in door
and frame schedule.
(5) Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes
contained in schedule.
(6) Mounting locations for hardware.
(7) Door and frame sizes and materials.
(8) Keying information.
(ii) Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential
product data in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work
that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit final
schedule after samples, product data, coordination with shop
drawings of other work, delivery schedules and similar
information has been completed and accepted.
(iii) Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating
clearly how Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has
been fulfilled.
(iv) Templates for door, frames and other work specified to be
factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware
to comply with indicated requirements.
1 Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock
sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer
Replace sub-clauses 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 as follows:
7.2.1 Acceptable Products
1 Items of hardware are specified in Ironmongery Schedule.
7.2.2 Product Requirements
1 Provide hardware complete with all fasteners, anchors, instructions, layout
templates and any specialized tools as required for satisfactory installation
and adjustment.
2 Provide manufacturer's standard products meeting the design intent of this
Specification free of imperfections affecting appearance or serviceability.
3 Keying requirements shall be determined by consultation with Owner.
4 Provide keys as directed by Owner.
Add the following clause 7.2.3:
7.2.3 Materials and Fabrication
1 Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have
manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit
removable nameplates) as otherwise acceptable to Engineer/Architect.
(a) Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders
only.
2 Base Metals: Product hardware units of basic metal using manufacturer's
standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of
lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable
hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each
type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations
indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods except as
otherwise specified.
3 Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published
templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide
hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except
as specifically indicated or specified.
4 Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-
head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed screws to match
hardware finish.
5 Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door
is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available
with concealed fasteners. Do not use through-bolts for installation where bolt
head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the
only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware
securely. Where through-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work,
provide sleeves for each through-bolt.
7.3 FITTING AND TESTING
Add the following clause:
7.3.2 Adjustment and Cleaning
6 Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be
adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application
made.
(a) Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy, return to the installation during the week
prior to acceptance or occupancy and perform final check and
adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean
operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of
hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for
final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
(b) Checking and adjustment shall be performed by a certified
Architectural Hardware Consultant to ensure proper operation and
function of each unit.
7 Lubricate units only as recommended by their manufacturers.
8 Remove excess sealants, lubricants and any other foreign substances and
protect all installations from subsequent damage.
9 Clean units just prior to final acceptance with only materials and procedures
recommended by their manufacturers.
10 Maintain the sheets of instruction, layout templates and any supplementary
literature regarding hardware in a readable condition. Transmit to Owner all
such matter together with all spare parts, specialized tools and other
accessories supplied with the hardware. Also transmit to Owner a copy of the
approved hardware schedule. Notify Engineer in writing that such transmittal
has occurred.
11 Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in the proper adjustment and
maintenance of door hardware and finishes. Instructions shall be performed
by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant or a qualified representative
of the manufacturer.
Delete Clause 7.4 and substitute with the following:
7.4 IRONMONGERY
1 Ironmongery for main doors shall be polished brass or antique bronze
finished. Ironmongery for all other doors shall be stainless steel satin finished
and from ‘Dorma’, ‘Allgood’, ‘D-line’ or other equal reputed manufacturer.
2 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ordering the appropriate ‘hand’ for
ironmongery based on door swings.
3 Samples, catalogues, photographs shall be submitted for approval as
required by the ENGINEER.
4 Ironmongery for all doors shall be controlled/ monitored by security system
components.
5 All ironmongery shall be Satin Anodised Aluminium (SAA) finish to the
approval of the ENGINEER.
6 CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials and components which may not be
specified or shown but which are required for the proper installation and
performance of the work.
7 CONTRACTOR shall verify all quantities and obtain approval from the
ENGINEER before placing order.
7.4.2 Standards
1 All ironmongery for this CONTRACT shall be as per the BS, DIN or ANSI
standards.
7.4.3 Submissions
1 CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a detailed ironmongery schedule
listing door, size, type, handing and degree of opening. Indicate the hardware
used, finish, quantity, manufacturer and catalogue number for hardware set.
2 CONTRACTOR shall submit the original catalogues along with appropriate
samples conforming to all specified aspects of the hardware including size,
finish, and all other details.
3 CONTRACTOR shall submit the templates for the door manufacturers and
co-ordinate with all the door suppliers to ensure that the door is prepped in
the factories as per the relevant hardware needed for each opening.
7.4.4 Warranty
1 All hardware shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of
issue of completion certificate. Lever handles to be guaranteed for a period of
five years from the date of issue of completion certificate. Material shall be
covered against manufacturing defects or breakage, will-full damage
excluded.
2 The warranty shall include particular reference to failure of or due to the
following:
 Correct selection for required location performance
 Correct functioning of moving parts.
 Structural adequacy.
 Chipping, fading, excessive wear or de-lamination or other deterioration of
finishes.
 Fixing and connectors including stripped threads and damaged heads.
 Integrity of seals.
 Sagging, slackness or looseness of knobs and handles due to wear,
relaxation of springs, stripped threads or any other cause.
3 The warranty shall include an undertaking that spare parts and replacement
items will be available for sale off-the-shelf or with a lead time not exceeding
four weeks from date of order for a period not less than the warranty period.
4 Warranty shall be accompanied by a current retail price list properly identified
and dated. The warranty shall include an undertaking with respect to price
control for the following items:
 Replacement keys.
 Replacement cylinders.
7.4.5 Maintenance Instructions
1 CONTRACTOR shall provide instruction manuals, part list templates and
suggested spare parts list along with a set of the catalogues for the
ENGINEER, provide Allen keys for the handles and any other special tools,
provide two sets of original catalogues for all hardware used in the
CONTRACT.
1 The supplier of finishing hardware shall be regularly involved in the sale and
distribution of Builder’s Hardware for projects of this nature.
2 The supplier shall employ a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant
(A.H.C.) or Dip GAI (Guild of Architectural Ironmongers) to supervise all the
issues related to doors and doors hardware. The Hardware consultant will be
responsible for architectural submittals, samples submission, to review
Hardware sets in conjunction with Drawings, specifications, statuary rules,
international standards such as Life Safety code and Disability Act. The
Hardware consultant should also look after material deliveries to site, making
sure right material is delivered, marked and packed.
7.4.7 Hinges
1 Hinges shall be knuckle ball bearing but hinges, template drilled, suitable for
timber and metal doors to be tested for performance as per ANSI/BHMA
Grade 1. Unless otherwise specified hinge size shall be 4.5”x4”x3.4mm.
7.4.8 Door Closers
1 Door closers and controllers shall be approved types, suitable for the location
and the intended function of the doors, including size and weight of the door,
door swings and wind pressure, in accordance with the product information
and relevant standards. All door closers to comply with EN 1154.
2 Where specified use Door closers with Cushion Block size 3 with Slide track
and arm. Door closer is to have two independent values force closing speed
adjustment.
3 The door closers should be installed on the push side of doors opening to
exterior. Where floor stops cannot be used, use door closers with Parallel
Arm door Saver for push side installation and Integra Stop Arm for pull side
installation to control opening of the door and prevent damage to the door leaf
and adjacent walls.
4 Door closers to have built in manual hold open feature where required. Uses
integral electromechanically hold open function with closer where hold open is
needed.
7.4.9 Lever Handle Set
1 Lever handle set for steel doors shall be on rose and escutcheons, in satin
stainless steel secured by unique non reversible spring clips locating into
serration's on spindle and preventing lateral movement. Collared neck of
levers push into sprung retaining clips on rose, providing a 3 point secure
fixing, with all operating pressures transferred to the door leaf.
7.4.10 Kick Plates and Push Plates
1 The length of the kick plate is to be to door width, less the thickness of the
frame stop. Kick plates are to be scheduled on both sides of WC Doors and
main doors.
2 All protection plates to be TRIMCO or equal and approved stainless steel
1.3mm thick.
3 Door protection plates shall be approved proprietary types suitable for the
location and the intended function in accordance with the Product Information.
4 Use water-resistant adhesive or other suitable concealed methods. No
mechanical fixings shall be visible in the completed work. Finish exposed
edges with smooth edges.
5 Unless otherwise indicated width of applied facings shall be full width of door.
Width may be reduced to clear doorstops if approved before commencing.
6 Push Plate shall be satin stainless steel 102mm width x 406mm high as
specified.
7 Kick plates shall be satin stainless steel 178mm to 406mm height or as
shown on Drawings.
7.4.11 Wall Stops
1 Provide wall stops to limit door swing where indicated or required to prevent
damage to adjacent wall by uncontrolled door opening.
7.4.12 Installation
1 Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for
Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and
Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with
governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by
ENGINEER.
2 Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware
onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way,
coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application or surface
protection with finishing work specified. Do not install surface mounted items
until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
3 Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the
attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
4 Drill and Countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage
fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry
standards. Set thresholds for exterior doors in fully bed of butyl-rubber or
poly-isobutylene mastic sealant.
7.4.13 Protection
1 Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet
installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are
not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be
delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
2 Contractor shall protect hardware as it is stored on the construction site in a
covered and dry place.
3 Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the
construction phase.
7.4.14 Adjust and Clean
1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure
proper operations or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be
adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
2. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installations is made more than one
month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work
during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and
adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating
items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and
doors.
7.4.15 Hardware Schedule
1 The Hardware schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the
contractor. Do not consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular item
be omitted in hardware group provide the item as required.
SECTION 19: PLUMBING
SECTION 19: PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.3 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
1.3.4 Notice of Intent
1 Refer PWA IAN 13 / 14
SECTION 20: DRAINAGE WORKS FOR BUILDINGS
PART 4 DRAINAGE PIPES IN TRENCHES

4.2 LAYING OF DRAINAGE PIPES IN TRENCHES
4.2.4 Protective Coatings
2 Tape shall be cold applied, self-adhesive type comprising a bituminous resin
compound on a PVC backing layer, complying with AWWA C209-84 Section
2.4 Type 1.
3 Primer shall be as recommended and manufactured by the Tape
Manufacturer and be fast drying and suitable for cold application by brushing
and spraying.
4 On pipelines of less than 600 mm diameter, tape having the following
minimum characteristics:
Overall thickness ASTM D1000 1.1 mm
PVC backing thickness ASTM D1000 0.3 mm
Tensile strength BS2782 7.5 N/mm
Elongation BS2782 200%
Tear Resistance ASTM D1004 19 N/mm
Adhesion to Steel ASTM D1000 1.0 N/mm
Adhesion to Self ASTM D1000 1.0 N/mm
Impact Resistance
(single layer) DIN 30672 8.0 Nm
Dielectric Strength BS2782 25,000 V
Insulation Resistance BS2782 1,000,000 Megohms
2
5 Water vapour permeability (BS2782) shall not exceed 0.65 g/m /day.
6 Where tape is provided with fabric reinforcement in the bituminous layer, the
thickness of the PVC backing shall be a minimum of 0.1 mm.
7 On pipelines of 600 mm diameter and more, tape have the following minimum
characteristics:
Overall thickness ASTM D1000 1.6 mm
PVC backing thickness ASTM D1000 0.7 mm
Tensile strength BS2782 12.0 N/mm
Elongation BS2782 200%
Tear Resistance ASTM D1004 50 N/mm
Adhesion to Steel ASTM D1000 2.0 N/mm
Adhesion to Self ASTM D1000 1.8 N/mm
Impact Resistance
(single layer) DIN 30672 10.0 Nm
Dielectric Strength BS2782 30,000 V
8 Water vapour permeability (BS2782) shall not exceed 0.65 g/m2/day.
9 Where tape is provided with fabric reinforcement in the bituminous layer, the
thickness of the PVC backing shall be a minimum of 0.5 mm.
10 An anti-contaminant interleaving release paper shall be provided to ensure
the tape remains suitable for application even after prolonged periods of
storage.
11 Tape shall be applied spirally to give a 55% overlap.
12 All on-line valves or pipeline protrusions shall be profiled to accept the
wrapping tape using hand applied mastic recommended and manufactured by
the tape Manufacturer.
PART 5 STRUCTURES RELATED TO DRAINAGE WORK

5.2 CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLES, CHAMBERS AND SOAKAWAYS
Add Part 5.2.3 as follows:
5.2.3 Joints
1 Flexible joints for pipes built into structures shall be positioned from the
outside of the structures as follows:
Pipe diameter First joint Second joint ("rocker")
Up to 300 mm 150 mm maximum 500mm maximum from first joint
300 - 600 mm 300 mm maximum 600 mm minimum and 2x pipe
diameter maximum from first joint
Over 600 mm 600 mm maximum 750 mm minimum, & 1200mm
maximum from first joint
unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2 Where pipes adjacent to structures are laid in excavations which exceed the
maximum width specified in Section 8, Clause 2.2.2.3, the pipes shall be
surrounded with a minimum of 150 mm of concrete Grade SRC20 extending
up from the excavation formation. The concrete surround required for short
lengths of pipe built into, and protruding from, structures shall be placed
integrally with the concrete to the structure. Where boxing out for pipes is
permitted the concrete surround shall be placed integrally with the infilling to
the boxout.
PART 6 SURFACE WATER DRAINAGE

6.3 PIPE LAYING
6.3.1 General
Add new paragraphs 7, 8, 9 and 10 as follows:
7 For pipelines in trench and other structures, the Contractor shall keep any
accumulated water or sewage at a level lower than the bottom of the
permanent work until the backfilling is complete or for other such period as
the Engineer's Representative shall direct.
8 Partially completed permanent works shall not be allowed to become flooded
and the Contractor shall allow for all additional standby pumps and equipment
required to ensure this. A pump operator shall be on site 24 hours/day to
supervise pumping equipment.
(a) In the event of partially completed trenches becoming flooded, the
Contractor shall re-excavate to formation level and re-lay the pipes.
9 For pipelines in trench and structures formations, the Contractor shall offer
the formation for inspection by the Engineer's Representative at two stages:
(a) When excavation is complete to formation level and de-watered.
(b) On completion of the replacement of any unsound material in the
formation as directed in the specifications.
10 No bedding or blinding shall be placed until these inspections have been
made by the Engineer's Representative.
6.6 MANHOLES AND CATCH PITS
Delete paragraph 7 and replace with the following:
7 Ladders shall be fabricated in GRP as shown on the drawings.
(a) GRP ladders shall be obtained from a non-objected experienced
manufacturer, fabricated to a non-objected pattern and purpose made
to suit the depth of each installation as shown on the drawings. The
ladders shall be drilled for wall fixing at both ends and additional
intermediate fixing connections shall be provided at centres not
greater than 1.5 metres. Rungs shall be at 300 mm centres and at a
distance of not less than 200 mm from the wall.
The resins, glasses and synthetic fabrics used in the manufacture of
the ladders shall be chosen to produce a chemically resistant product
with a resin-rich surface layer suitable for use in aggressive
atmospheres likely to the encountered in sewers and sewage pumping
stations.
Rungs of tubular construction shall be no less than 30 mm outer
diameter and stringers shall be of a rectangular or channel section, no
less than 70 mm x 25 mm in size. The upper face of non-tubular
rungs shall be finished with a non-slip surface such as silica sand. All
remaining surfaces shall be free of sharp edges, protrusions etc.
Each rung shall be able to withstand a point load of 5000 N.
When supported horizontally over a span of 1 m with the climbing face
uppermost and with a load of 1000 N applied at the centre of the span
the ladder shall not deflect more than 15 mm at the point of application
of the load and shall show no permanent deflection after removal of
the load. Each ladder fixing shall be capable of withstanding shear
and pull-out loads of 5000 N.
(b) All ladders shall comply with BS5395: Part 3. All fixings shall be
stainless steel.
11 The tanking membrane shall be applied in two layers for reinforced concrete
structures and laps shall be staggered from one layer to the next. For mass
concrete structures and surrounds to manhole liners a single layer of tanking
membrane shall be applied. The specification of membrane is specified
elsewhere in this specification.
SECTION 21: ELECTRICAL WORKS
PART 1 GENERAL PROVISION FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

1.1.1 Scope
Add new paragraph 3 to 6 as follows:
Refer PWA IAN 13 / 14 for details of changes.
7 The scope of work shall be carried out in accordance with the Qatar
Construction Specifications (QCS 2014) and the provisions of IAN 013 / 14. If
there is any conflict between QGEWC requirements and the provisions of IAN
013 / 14, then QGEWC requirements will take precedence.
The scope of work shall include but not be limited to:
(a) Supply and installation, testing and commissioning of all electrical cables and
its accessories including EHV, HV , MV and LV cables in addition to Fibre
Optic and pilot cables and its accessories
(b) Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all Electrical Equipment as
applicable for distribution Substations including but not limited to 11kV
switchgear, LV panels/ Feeder pillars, distribution transformers, etc.
(c) Supply and installation of cables, conduits, boxes and termination points
(d) Supply and installation of the new telecom infrastructure to achieve the
required diversion schemes, which will be done directly by Ooredoo, QNBN
and Vodafone and Communications Regulatory Authority (CRA)
(e) Supply and installation of the new infrastructure to achieve the required
diversion schemes, which will be done under direct supervision of the Qatar
Armed Forces (QAF)
(f) Supply and installation of the new infrastructure to achieve the required
diversion schemes, which will be done under direct supervision of the
Security Services Department (SSD)
(g) Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of road lighting and traffic
signals.
(h) Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the Motor Control Centre
for the drainage pumping stations
1.1.16 Quality of Materials
1.1.21 Electricity Supply
1.1.28 Testing and Commissioning
PART 2 MV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES (FBAS)
2.2 PRODUCTS
2.2.2 Motor Control Centres
1 General
Add the following new items:
2.2.5 Free Standing LV Feeder Pillar
PART 3 PROTECTIVE DEVICES

3.2 PRODUCTS
3.2.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
3.2.3 Miniature Circuit Breakers
PART 6 CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

6.1 GENERAL
6.1.2 References
6.2 PRODUCTS
6.2.4 Jointing 11 kV, L.V. and Pilot Cables
Add new Clause 6.2.5 as follows:
6.2.5 Operating Conditions for HV Cables
6.2.6 Electrical Criteria for HV Cables
1 Operating Criteria
6.3 INSTALLATION
6.3.9 Testing
PART 7 CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

7.2 PRODUCTS
7.2.1 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings
7.2.2 Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings
Add new paragraph 1(h) and 2(g) as follows:
PART 10 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

10.2 PRODUCTS
10.2.3 Switches
7 Lighting Switches
10.2.5 Socket Outlets
1 General Purpose socket outlets
PART 13 TELEPHONE INSTALLATIONS

13.1 GENERAL
PART 20 ELEVATORS / ESCALATORS

After Clause 20.3 add the following new Clause 20.4:
SECTION 20.4 – PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
20.4.1 General
20.4.1.1 The Objectives of This Specification
This specification defines the vertical transportation requirements for the
pedestrian bridges. The intent of this specification is to provide the
requirements for the supply of passenger lifts and their installation.
This specification shall be read in conjunction with the contract conditions,
where discrepancies occur between this specification and the contract
conditions, the contract conditions take precedence.
20.4.1.2 Scope of Works
The scope of works for the vertical transportation includes the following:
 Passenger lifts for pedestrian bridges located in the project. A passenger lift will
be located at each end of the pedestrian bridge at each pedestrian bridge
location.
 Provision of a lockable marshalling enclosure complete with a 36 pair terminal
strip located adjacent to the lift control panel.
 All support mounting equipment.
 Painting and labelling of all equipment supplied in accordance with this
specification.
 Testing and commissioning of all electrical, communications, security and control
systems within the lift contractors package.
 The preparation and submission of shop drawings and design documentation
 The provision of ‘as built’ drawings, fault code lists, service notes, system
passwords and full test results
 All minor and incidental work to produce a complete, operational and safe
installation.
 Provision of a fully compliant tender. Compliant tenders shall be based on the
use only of the equipment detailed herein, and include all allowances for the
vertical transportation services to meet the requirements of this specification.
The scope of works includes all associated work that is necessary to ensure fully
operational systems.
Tradespeople undertaking the manufacture, installation and testing of the vertical
transportation described in this specification shall have adequate competency and
experience to carry out all tasks in the workshop and on site.
Materials used in the manufacture, installation and testing shall be new and of the
best available quality.
All lift controls shall be of the latest and most advanced demand based systems,
capable of intelligently recognizing and responding to peak pedestrian traffic
conditions and be complete with all relevant performance operational options.
20.4.1.3 Standards
Execute all work in accordance with the current Qatari standards and laws, the latest
rules and regulations which may include the Australian and British Standards.
Standards and guidelines shall include;
 QCS 2014 Requirements
 BS EN81-1:1998 Electric lifts
 PD CEN/TR81-10: 2004 CEN guide
 DD CEN/TS81-11:2009 Interpretations related to EN81 family of standards
 DD CEN TS 81-29: 2004 Interpretations related to EN81-20 up to EN81-28
(includes EN81-1:1998 and EN81-2:1998)
 BS EN 81-58: 2003 Lift landing doors, fire resistance testing (was -8)
 BS EN 81-70: 2003 Rules for accessibility of disabled people to lifts
 BS EN 81-71: 2005 Vandal resistant lifts
 BS EN 81-72: 2003 Rules for lifts which remain in use in case of fire (Firefighters
lifts)
 BS EN 81-73: 2005 Behaviour of lifts in the event of fire
 prEN81-77:2010 Lifts subject to seismic conditions
 DD CEN/TS81-83: 2009 Rules for the improvement of the resistance against
vandalism
 BS EN292-1:1991 Safety of machinery – Basic concepts, general principles for
design – Part 1: Basic terminology, methodology
 BS EN292-2:1991 Safety of machinery – Basic concepts, general principles for
design – Part 2: Technical principles and specifications
 BS EN 627:1996 Specification for data logging and monitoring of lifts, escalators
and passengers conveyors
 EN1050:1996 Safety of machinery Principles for risk assessment
 BS EN 12016:1998 Electromagnetic compatibility Product family standard for
lifts, escalators and passenger conveyors Immunity
 BS EN 12016:2004 Electromagnetic compatibility Product family standard for
lifts, escalators and passenger conveyors Immunity
 BS EN 12016: 2004+A1: 2008 Electromagnetic compatibility Product family
standard for lifts, escalators and passenger conveyors Immunity
 EN 12385-5:2002 Steel wire ropes Safety Stranded ropes for lifts
 BS EN 13015:2001 Maintenance for lifts and escalators Rules for maintenance
instructions
 BS EN 13015:2001+A1: 2008 Maintenance for lifts and escalators Rules for
maintenance instructions
 BS EN 50214:1998 Flexible cables for lifts
 BS EN 61508-1:2001 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable
electronic safety-related systems - Part1: General requirements (IEC 61508-
1:1998 + Corrigendum 1999).
electronic safety-related systems – Part 2: Requirements for electrical/electronic/
programmable electronic safety-related systems (IEC 61508-2:2000).
electronic safety related systems – Part 3: Software requirements (IEC 61508-
3:1998 + Corrigendum 1999).
electronic safety related systems – Part 4: Definitions and abbreviations (IEC
61508-4:1998 + Corrigendum 1999).
 BSEN 61508-5:2001 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable
electronic safety related systems – Part 5: Examples of methods for the
determination of safety integrity levels (IEC 61508-5:1998 + Corrigendum 1999).
electronic safety related systems – Part 7: Overview of techniques and measures
(IEC 61508-7:2000).
 BS EN62305-3:2006 Protection against lightning – Physical damage to
structures
 BS EN62305-4:2006 Protection against lightning – Electrical and electronic
systems within structures
 BS 476 Fire Tests
 BS 7255 Code of Practice for Safe working on Lifts
 Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation Regulations for passenger
and goods lifts
20.4.1.4 Regulations and Fees
The Contractor will;
 Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, consents, approval, registration and
certificates from all authorities having jurisdiction over any part of the work within
this specification.
 Pay all royalties and costs relating to patent rights, trade marks or other projected
rights.
 Comply with all regulations and by laws of the authorities and fully indemnify
ASHGHAL and the Engineer against any claims.
20.4.1.5 Provision of Samples For Approval
Samples will need to be provided a minimum of four (4) weeks prior to order: No
visible items of equipment shall be installed prior to acceptance of the sample
provided, in writing, by the Engineer. Components will need to be installed following
such approvals and shall be identical with those provided and accepted as samples.
A numerical identification system for recording samples submissions and
acceptances shall be provided. Samples are to be retained on site for the duration of
the project. Samples of non-objected colour and finish are to be provided as
requested during construction.
Three 75 x 300 or 300mm in length samples are to be provided for the following
areas as a minimum:
 Wall, ceiling, floor and door materials.
 All operated devices, including telephones, key switches, gongs, call buttons, dot
matrix display panels
 Items of equipment for which shop drawings are not provided
20.4.1.6 Warranty and Maintenance
The warranty period shall be fifty two (52) weeks from the date of Beneficial Use.
The maintenance period will be for two (2) years from the date of Beneficial Use.
Motor will have a five (5) year warranty from the date of Beneficial Use.
During the warranty period the Contractor will correct any faults and replace any
defective components and carry out work promptly to minimise the vertical
transportation system down time. Servicing and maintenance shall be conducted in
accordance with required maintenance standards. A minimum of forty eight (48)
hours notice prior to each service visit must be provided and written reports are to be
prepared at the time of each visit and advise ASHGHAL of the outcome after each
visit.
Approval for final payment shall be made when all reports are received and non-
Individual warranties by component manufacturers in lieu of single source
responsibility by the lift manufacturer shall not be acceptable.
Warranty certificates shall be provided prior to equipment start up.
20.4.1.7 Quality Assurance
The Contractor will carry out the installation of the vertical transportation using skilled
and experienced tradesmen at all times.
Nominated equipment shall be from a supplier with full Quality Accreditation. Any
alternative equipment will not be accepted unless it has an equal Quality
Accreditation and is non-objected for use by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be
required to rectify, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, incorrect equipment (or
incorrectly located equipment), at no cost.
The Contractor shall establish and submit a Quality Plan for the works in this
Contract for approval prior to arriving on site and prior to commencement of ordering
or manufacturing. The quality system should comply with the requirements of the
standards as nominated by the Engineer. A typical copy of the proposed Quality
System shall be submitted with the Tender.
All works performed by the Contractor shall be subject to quality audit and approval
by the Engineer or ASHGHAL. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for satisfactory completion of the works nor will it relieve the Contractor
of the liabilities associated with the provisions of this specification.
The performance of all lifts shall meet the minimum requirements as set by the
standard and laws that govern this specification.
The Engineer and ASHGHAL reserve the right to make progress inspections during
the course of the works.
20.4.1.8 Painting and Corrosion Prevention
The Contractor shall;
 Use only materials that resist corrosion. Adopt standard accepted procedures to
minimize corrosion.
 Use stainless steel wherever possible. Electrically isolate dissimilar metals to
avoid electrolytic corrosion. Connect metals directly only where those metals are
in close proximity on the Galvanic Series.
 Where fixings are used which result in materials of lesser surface area being in
contact with parent materials of considerably greater surface area, the parent
material shall be lower on the galvanic series than the material of the fixing, in
order to avoid rapid failure of the fixing.
 Use only brackets and fixings that are suitably protected. Ungalvanised,
unpainted steel items are not acceptable on any part of the installation.
 Seek Engineer’s approval prior to performing any welding or cutting operations
on galvanised components.
20.4.1.9 Painted Equipment
After manufacture and prior to installation, all metal surfaces other than bearing
surfaces shall be wire brushed clean, cleaned of grease, and applied with a prime
coat.
After installation, all damage to the prime coat shall be corrected and the whole of
the work shall then receive two (2) finishing coats of paint, this shall include all
machine room equipment, well equipment, car frame, underside of platform, rider
plates, angles, brackets and supports.
Finished coats shall comprise two (2) coats of synthetic enamel applied over the
prime coat. Oil or heat resistant paints shall be used where necessary.
Prime and finish coat paint shall be of first quality manufacture. All paint shall be
applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
All items supplied factory finish painted shall be repainted as necessary to repair
damage that occurs prior to handing over the installation and to restore all paintwork
to first class condition.
20.4.1.10 Earthquake Restraint
Supply and install all equipment according to the local requirements for earthquake
restraint and in accordance with any guidelines as specified by the Engineer with
regard to earthquake restraint. The Contractor shall obtain the category requirements
from the Engineer prior to commencement of work.
20.4.1.11 Spare Parts
Standardisation of fixtures, fittings, components and sizes shall be provided to allow
for readily available spare components that are interchangeable throughout multiple
installations.
The Contractor shall maintain stock of spare parts in accordance with the Quality
Plan and as non-objected by the Engineer.
20.4.1.12 Nameplate Data
Include the following information on all Contractors’ drawings and on stamped
stainless steel nameplates.
 Vendors Name
 Serial Number
 Model Number
 Year Built
 Owner's Name
 Plant Location
 Owner's Purchase Order Number
 Item Tag No.(s)
20.4.1.13 Packaging For Transport
 Include crating and protection to all equipment as part of purchase, supply, and
delivery.
 Inspect equipment on arrival at site and report any damage immediately to the
Engineer.
 Rectify and pay for any damage correction and repairs to equipment.
20.4.1.14 Key Types
Confirm all key requirements with the Engineer in writing prior to order.
All switches on lift car operating panels and landing panels shall incorporate
proximity switches in lieu of keyed switches.
The marshalling enclosure shall use a key type as specified by the Engineer.
20.4.1.15 Protection
During the progress of the work, all parts shall be covered up and protected to avoid
exposure to the weather, as a precaution against accidental damage, or through any
other cause.
20.4.1.16 Programme
 Advise the Engineer of any long lead procurement items at the time of Contract
award and advise on the appropriate procurement dates in accordance with the
project schedule.
 Prepare a detailed installation programme and submit it to the Superintendent
within three (3) weeks of signing the contract. It shall be fully detailed showing all
phases of the installation.
 Hold Points shall be allowed for inspections by the Engineer and ASHGHAL.
 Provide shop drawings within the timeframe stipulated by the Engineer.
20.4.1.17 Manufacture Of Equipment
The Contractor shall ensure that;
 Manufacture of any equipment is strictly in accordance with the tendered
manufacturing programme.
 There is no alteration to the manufacturing programme without the approval of
the Engineer.
 All components of the lift installation shall be manufactured from non-radioactive
materials.
 Standardisation of fixtures, fittings, components and sizes, shall be provided to
allow for readily available spare components that are interchangeable throughout
multiple installations.
20.4.1.18 Shop Drawings
Shop drawings are to be provided to the Engineer including the following;
 Drawings for all main components include the lift, lift machinery and the machine
room general arrangements, foundations and installation, sectional elevations of
the lift, lift machinery, car and entrance details and signal details.
 Component specifications and preventative maintenance charts
 Electrical schematics and one copy of the non-objected master electric
schematic and non-objected lubrication chart shall be framed with a clear plastic
cover and mounted on the machine room wall
20.4.2 Lifts
20.4.2.1 Lift Car
The lift car and all of its all internal and external fittings and services including CCTV
and air conditioning shall be in accordance with appropriate standards.
The car frame shall be manufactured from welded steel construction and bolted
structural steel sections of adequate strength to withstand distortion from impact.
Impact testing of car frames and doors must generally be in accordance with the
Pendulum Shock Test as stated in EN81-1 Annex J with loadings for the soft
pendulum test repeated with increased test weight of 125% and 150% of the
nominated 45kg i.e. 56.25kg and 67.5kg respectively. Landing door and car door
strength to be tested using both hard and soft pendulum tests as per EN81-1, Annex
J, plus additional soft test loadings.
Lift cars shall meet the following requirements;
 car frames: welded or bolted steel channel construction
 platforms: isolated type, steel, construction fire proofed on the underside
 guide shoes: nylon sliding type
 car sills: hard aluminium type sill
 toe guards: in accordance with EN 81
 car door hangers and tracks: as specifications on hoistway entrance hangers
and tracks
 headers: minimum 1.2 mm thick steel shaped to provide stiffening flanges
 car door electrical contacts shall operate in conjunction with the car doors so
that elevators cannot operate unless doors are closed, or within tolerances
allowed by EN81
 door operators : shall be microprocessor based a.c./d.c. capable of opening
doors at no less than 60 m/min and accomplishing reversal in no more than 65
mm of door movement
 car finishes front return, side & rear wall, door, handrail, floor, ceiling
panels, and light fixtures shall be finished as detailed in the Specifications
 removable panels shall be provided as specified for side and rear wall panels at
lifts with facings glued to plywood, full-height between top of base and ceiling of
car. Panel joints shall be flush with panel surfaces in accordance with
manufacturer’s standard layouts. Lift car suspended ceiling panels shall have
suitable strong backing in the ceiling frame to prevent sagging, without exposed
screws or bolts.
 Car lighting shall be of the LED type.
 Lift car lights and fans shall be provided with energy saving features. Car lights
and fans shall automatically switch off after a predetermined time following the
last call, and switch on again upon lift use
 The lift car finishes shall be as described in the architectural specification. All
finishes shall be confirmed with the Architect prior to manufacture.
20.4.2.2 Hoistway Equipment
The hoist way equipment will be supplied as follows;
 guide rails and brackets: T-section cold drawn (not fabricated) guide rails and
brackets suitable for travel, car weight and support locations at structural floors,
with backing as EN 81
 buffers: energy dissipation type with blocking and supports
 normal terminal stopping devices: in accordance with EN 81
 electricity wiring: copper conductors with 600 volt insulation throughout with
individual wires coded, with 10 % spare capacity. All connections shall be
identified on studs or terminal blocks, rated 75 °C minimum. Splices or similar
connections in wiring are not permitted except at terminal blocks, control cabinets
or junction boxes. Flexible heavy-duty service cord to BS 6977 may be used
between fixed car wiring and car door switches
 conduit and duct shall be PVC jacketed or galvanised steel 20 mm minimum
diameter. Flexible conduit shall not exceed 450 mm in length and shall be as in
Part 7
 entrance equipment:
(i) door hangers: shall use two-point suspension with upthrust rollers
(ii) door tracks: replaceable bar or formed cold drawn steel with smooth
hanger contact surface
(iii) interlocks: operable without retiring cam, with interlocks that are visible
and conspicuous when doors are open, painted matt black
(iv) closures: spring or aspirator type
(v) pit stop switches to BS EN 81
Hoist way entrances shall be fire rated in accordance with BS 476 Part 8, with
frames as follows:
 floor entrances, jambs and heads shall be fabricated steel with a 304 stainless
steel cladding
 frames shall be hollow metal, bolted to form a one-piece unit
 jamb and head depth and profiles shall be, fabricated from mild steel not less
than 1.2 mm thick, steel pan construction, with side-opening doors, rubber
bumpers to cushion closing impact, and finished faces as specified. Each door
panel shall include gibs. The trailing door gib shall be in the sill groove
throughout the length of travel
 sills: extruded hard aluminium
 fascia toe guards, dust and fascia width hanger covers: 1.5 mm galvanised steel
with door open bumpers on entrances equipped with vertical struts.
20.4.2.3 Operating Panels
Car and landing operating panels shall fully comply with the requirements as
specified by the Architect.
The minimum requirements for the operating panel are;
 car and landing operating panels shall have durable vandal resistant face plates
and micro-Touch Buttons located no higher than 1620 mm above the car floor
(875 mm for alarm buttons)
 floor buttons, alarm buttons, door open buttons shall be identified by engraved
or painted letters or symbols in accordance with EN 81
 car floor buttons shall have 16 mm numbers on the face of buttons corresponding
to the floors served for registration of the car stops. Call registration lights,
located within or behind the buttons, shall illuminate the floor number
corresponding to the call registered
 alarm buttons at the bottom of stations shall be provided to ring bells located on
the car doors. Open and close buttons shall be provided to stop motion of doors
and cause them to return automatically to their fully open or closed position
respectively. Buttons shall be effective while cars are at landings and until cars
start into motion, regardless of any special operational features
 car top control stations shall be in accordance with EN81, mounted on car tops,
accessible from landings
 work lights and plug receptacles shall be provided top of lift car with on-off
switches and bulb guards
 car position indicators shall be provided in lift car operating panels with digital
indicators representing floors served and direction of car travel
 when cars leave or pass a floor, the numeral representing the floor shall be
displayed, thereby indicating the position of the car in the hoistway at all times
(i) proper direction arrows shall be continuously illuminated to indicate the
direction of travel
At landing operating panels the following shall be adopted;
 micro-touch buttons stations shall be provided adjacent to door jambs of each
entrance with the following features:
(i) flush-mounted vandal resistant durable faceplates and buttons for each
direction of travel, illuminated to indicate call registration
(ii) A fire recall station shall be provided at the main access level in addition
to the call button
 signal fixtures shall be provided at each entrance to indicate the intended
direction of travel of the lift to waiting passengers, with the following features:
(i) display numerals for car level, arrow and a gong mounted in the box
fastened in the wall. Up or down arrows shall be illuminated and a gong
sounded (once for up direction travel and twice for down direction travel)
prior to the car’s arrival at the floor. The light shall remain illuminated until
shortly before the lift doors start to close
(ii) hall lanterns shall be provided, of impact resistant plastic lenses and with
satin stainless steel finish.
In addition to the provision of emergency call buttons in each lift car operating panel,
they shall also be provided on each landing in each landing operating panel.
CAT6 cabling shall be used for all telephone connections.
20.4.2.4 Lift Car Air Conditioning
Air conditioning shall be provided on all lifts to maintain internal lift car temperatures
below 25°C at all times.
20.4.2.5 Remote Shutdown Control
Remote shutdown control of each lift shall be provided. The Contractor shall submit
a remote shutdown control plan for Engineer’s approval.
20.4.2.6 Interface With Its Systems
The lift shall be integrated with other ITS systems installed as part of the broader
project, including:
 CCTV systems
 Security systems
 Communication systems
 Smoke detection systems
The following signal inputs / outputs shall be provided as dry contact outputs from
the marshalling enclosure terminal strip.
Lift Controller Lift Signal

Signal No.
S36 (Input) Spare

S35 (Input) Spare
S34 (Input) Spare
S33 (Input) Spare
S32 (Input) Spare
S31 (Input) Remote Shutdown Control
S30 (Output) Spare
S29 (Output) Spare
S28 (Output) Spare
S27 (Output) Spare
S26 (Output) Spare
S25 (Output) Spare
S24 (Output) Alarm Pressed (bottom floor, outside
lift)
Lift Controller Lift Signal

Signal No.
S23 (Output) Alarm Pressed (top floor, outside lift)

S22 (Output) Screech Detector
S21 (Output) High Temperature Alarm
S20 (Output) Lift Being Serviced
S19 (Output) Door Hold Switch
S18 (Output) Car Light
S17 (Output) Alarm Pressed (Inside Lift)
S16 (Output) Lift Moving
S15 (Output) Intention to Travel
S14 (Output) Door Closed
S13 (Output) Door Open
S12 (Output) Car Overloaded
S11 (Output) Lift Broken Down
S10 (Output) Safety Circuit Open
S9 (Output) Smoke / Fire Alarm
S8 (Output) At Floor Level
S7 (Output) Lift Switched Off
S6 (Output) Mains Power
S5 (Output) Door Obstructed
S4 (Output) On Inspection
S3 (Output) On Fireman’s Service
S2 (Output) Down Direction Set
S1 (Output) Up Direction Set
The marshalling enclosure shall be provided adjacent to the lift control panel. The
Contractor shall test and commission all inputs to the marshalling enclosure terminal
strip and provide a 3 point locking mechanism for marshalling enclosure.
Each lift shall be provided with the capacity to accept a minimum of 6 dry contact and
one of these inputs shall be designated for remote shutdown control.
Further to the provision of a ‘Lift Broken Down’ signal to the marshalling enclosure
terminal strip, indication of the ‘Lift Broken Down’ status shall be provided at each
landing via an illuminated sign with the words “Under Maintenance”.
20.4.2.7 CCTV
CCTV shall be provided in each lift car by the Contractor. The lift contractor shall
provide CAT 6 cabling from the marshalling enclosure terminal strip to the CCTV
camera location within the lift car, as nominated by the Contractor.
20.4.2.8 Fire Operation
On each landing plate, provide the black filled engraved danger notice:
"IN CASE OF FIRE - DO NOT USE LIFT"
Emergency features shall comply with EN81 for Emergency Firemen’s Service and
the following;
 emergency operation: the lift shall be equipped with a control system to operate
and recall the car in fire or other emergency condition. In the event of fire alarm,
all lifts shall return to the bottom level of the pedestrian bridges and open their
doors.
 terminals shall be provided on the controller for connection of signals from the
sensors. Operation shall be similar on all lifts and visual/audible signals shall
operate until return is complete or automatic operation restored
 standby lighting and alarm: during power failure, car lighting and car alarm shall
be supplied with standby power via a car-mounted battery unit, including solid
state charger, with testing means, installed in common metal container. Batteries
shall be rechargeable with 10 year minimum life expectancy. Car mounted units
shall operate alarm bell and light only
 emergency landing device: in the event of normal power failure, an emergency
evacuation power supply shall drive the lift to a nearby floor. This controller shall
be operated by sealed batteries which will be kept automatically charged for use
by the unit:
(i) standby power shall be provided by 24/12 V battery units mounted in the
machine room, including solid-state chargers with testing means installed
in common metal containers
(ii) upon arrival at floor landings, lift doors shall open automatically and
remain open until the regular door time has expired. Lifts shall then
become inactivated
(iii) upon restoration of normal power supply to the building, lifts shall
automatically resume normal operation.
20.4.2.9 Operation In The Event Of A Power Failure
In the event of power failure, all lifts shall return to level nominated in section 2.8 of
this specification and open their doors.
Backup power supplies shall be provided to ensure that lifts can return to the
nominated levels regardless of the travel direction.
20.4.2.10 Doors, Door Frames And Operation
Door Opening and Control Devices shall have:
(a) safety edge devices shall be full height, infra-red, non-contact, door edge
safety devices to detect obstruction in the doorway and reverse
(b) nudging action : in the event that the safety edge is operated for a pre-
determined time interval (15-20 seconds) after automatic door closing has
been initiated, a buzzer shall sound, and the doors shall close with a
maximum of 0.35 Kg-meters kinetic energy
(c) Microprocessor based Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (VVVF) drive
operational control shall be extended for door control as integral with the car
movement.
All car and landing doors shall be manufactured in accordance with the required
standards.
Door operation shall be in accordance with the required standards.
20.4.2.11 Levelling
The lift machine shall be fitted with self-levelling equipment to level and maintain the
level of the lift car floor with the landings. The equipment shall operate automatically
and independently of the operation by the passengers and shall level the lift within
the required tolerance, irrespective of load, speed or direction of travel and without
over-shooting, but should the car overshoot, or stop short of the floor, the equipment
shall return it automatically to the floor level. The guaranteed levelling accuracy shall
not exceed plus or minus 2 mm.
20.4.2.12 Weather Protection
Special attention shall be given to landing doors exposed to the weather to ensure
the adequate prevention of water and dust ingress. All external fittings and
enclosures (i.e. lift control panel, marshalling enclosure, call buttons, hall lanterns)
shall be IP65 rated and sealed against water and dust ingress.
20.4.3 Lift Machinery
20.4.3.1 General
Supply and install variable frequency lift machine assembly as follows:
 Lift machines shall comply with the relevant standards.
 Door operators shall be of the Wittur AMD (or non-objected equivalent) type with
car door locking device option to prevent doors being opened by persons in the
lift away from floor.
 Control gear and drive units shall be of the non-proprietary type to allow the rail
authority to select any contractor to maintain the equipment without being unfairly
disadvantaged by the manufacturer of the equipment (avoids delays on sourcing
parts).
 The drive sheave material shall be selected for efficiency, groove durability and
long rope life.
 The gearbox, motor and brake shall be assembled on a common bedplate
structure designed to maintain accurate alignment, to allow one-piece shipment,
and to ensure reliable and safe operation.
 The gearbox shall comprise a worm and worm wheel geometry arrangement,
and shall be designed to ensure smooth operation and long life of the finished
assembly.
 The power machine assembly shall be vibration-isolated from the building
structure by means of non-objected type resilient ant-vibration mountings.
 The electric motor shall be of the three phase permanent magnet synchronous
type complete with variable speed drive, built to the latest edition of all relevant
parts of EN 81.
 The lift motor shall be protected by thermistors set to operate at 100°C and
embedded in each phase of the stator winding.
 In general, the lift machine shall operate under all conditions of loading, running,
acceleration, retardation and levelling, in a smooth manner, and all equipment
and mechanisms shall be positive in action and operate without perceptible noise
on the occupied floors.
 All landing entrances shall be provided with an access door opening device.
 A manual brake release handle shall be provided on the landing adjacent to the
lift control panel to allow suitably trained staff / Civil Defence to act quickly with
entrapments. It must be clearly labelled and secured to ensure it can only be
operated by authorised persons.
20.4.3.2 Electrical
All electrical wiring shall be carried out in compliance with the current Wiring Rules
and with the requirements of the Local Supply Authority and as follows;
 Power supply to all lifts requires fire rating.
 Incoming supply of Three Phase 4 wire 50 Hertz 415 Volt supply will be provided
as part of the electrical works. Each Contractor shall nominate the electrical
rating of the supply required.
 All wiring on the lift installation shall be carried out in PVC cable of not less than
3/.020 section. All earth wires shall terminate on a proprietary brand earth bar
within the control panel.
 All terminals shall be clearly marked with a painted or Traffolyte number which
shall be shown on the wiring diagram. This applies to neutral and earth
conductors as well. Adhesive tape labels will not be accepted.
 With the exception of two and three core cables, the number of cores used in
each multi-core trailing flexible cable shall be such that at least 10% spare cores
are provided. These spare cores shall be connected to spare terminals in the well
and car junction boxes, and the spare terminals shall be clearly labelled as such.
 Supply in a glazed frame in the control panel, a complete wiring diagram of the
whole of the electrical equipment.
 Colour coding shall be Orange X15 for power, lighting and controls, white for
telephone and grey for data.
 Protection of electrical work; boxes and enclosures shall be provided with gasket
covers. Doors and motors shall be totally enclosed
20.4.3.3 Main Controller
 Lifts shall be provided with a main controller that shall comply with the following:
 The main controller shall consist of totally enclosed panels of not less than 1.6
mm thickness mild steel of non-objected design fitted with hinged doors.
 All bolts and screws, except those in non-objected terminal blocks, shall be fitted
with washers, nuts and locknuts or spring washers.
 All items of equipment in the controller shall be clearly labelled with a reference
number or letter. Painted labels or Traffolyte labels must be used. Plastic
adhesive tape is not acceptable.
 All main current contacts shall be copper (or other non-objected metal) to carbon.
All auxiliary contacts shall have silver tips. All moving contacts shall be mounted
on non-objected spring controlled contact figures.
 All contacts must make with a positive wiping action.
 Fuses shall be of a type that the wedges or cartridges shall not be dislodged on
normal vibration of the controller.
 Equipment shall be mounted on the controller, both at the back and front, to
provide clear access to all parts and connections.
 Thermal protection devices, if used, shall not be subject to heat rising from
rectifiers, resistances, etc.
 All lifts at each station shall communicate with each other to prevent excessive
current draw from simultaneous motor starts.
20.4.3.4 Equipment Protection
The control equipment for the lift shall include the following:
 Comprehensive overload, under voltage and phase failure protection.
 Relays and other devices to adequately protect the lift motor from sustained
overload, under voltage and the failure of one phase.
 Protection for the control circuits, rectifiers, etc.
 Protection for the door operator motor.
20.4.3.5 Equipment Labelling
All equipment labelling as required by the standards shall be carried out by means of
machine engraved Traffolyte labels with black letters on a white background.
20.4.4 Installation
20.4.4.1 Site Condition Inspection
Before the commencement of installation of equipment the hoistway and machine
room areas shall be examined to verify that no irregularities exist that would affect
the execution of the work, particularly:
 the hoistway size, plumpness and wellway lengths
 the support areas for bracket and beams etc.
Installation shall not commence until previous work conforms to Project
requirements.
20.4.4.2 Hoistways
The following shall be provided at the Hoistways and Pit Enclosures:
 clear plumb hoistway with variations not exceeding 25 mm at any point
 bevel cants (15 degrees from vertical) over any rear or side wall ledges or
beams that project 50 mm or more into the hoistway
 provisions for guide rail bracket supports in concrete in place as required, with
necessary supports provided by lift installer as indicated on shop drawings
 walls and floors cut and patch as necessary
 blockouts or cutouts for push button stations, hall lanterns and position indicators
 front hoistway wall, erected after entrances have been installed
 pit ladders, cars and counterweight buffers, and rail load supports
 waterproof pits and 600 x 600 x 600 mm deep sump pit
 barriers at open hoistways and entrances during construction
 cars, entrances, and special metal finishes protected from damage after
installation
 hoistways vented to outside air.
20.4.4.3 Electrical Services
The following shall be provided:
 conduits run from lift hoistways to ground level control consoles. Sizes and
locations as indicated on lift installation drawings
 415 V, 3-phase, 50 Hz main power feeders to terminals of each lift controller unit,
including protected lockable "OFF" disconnect switch (copper conductors to
terminals)
 240 V a.c., single-phase, 50 Hz, power feeders to each car controller available
for lighting and exhaust blowers, including individual 20-amp circuit breakers at
locations where shown on lift shop drawings
 suitable power feeders and branch wiring circuits as required to lift control
panels in machine rooms as designated by lift installer.
20.4.4.4 Installation
The lift installer shall supervise and co-ordinate the preparation of all shop drawings,
the selection and furnishing of all materials included in the specifications, and the
installer shall also install the cars.
Installation work shall be to BS 7255.
The lift installer shall also be responsible for the supply and installation of the
following:
 electrical controls and signal fixtures and wires complete
 conduit and wiring to lighting and ventilating fixtures, with temporary power
and lighting as required
 headers, tracks and thresholds
 hangers and gibs on car doors and hang doors
 communications system as specified
 basic car construction of 1.2 mm steel, with vent slots in accordance with EN 81,
and wall panels as specified
 exhaust blowers, isolated from steel canopies on rubber grommets.
Each equipment item shall be installed in accordance with accepted manufacturer's
directions, referenced codes and specifications, with clearances complying with the
same.
Items shall be installed so that they may be removed by portable hoists or other
means for maintenance and/or repair, and so that access for maintenance is safe
and readily available, in accordance with BS 7255.
20.4.5 Field Quality Control
20.4.5.1 Inspection
All work at job sites will be checked during the course of installations. Full co-
operation with inspections is mandatory
Corrective work required shall be accomplished prior to performing further
installations dependent upon, or related to, required corrections as directed by the
Engineer.
20.4.5.2 Acceptance
The Engineer’s and ASHGHAL’s acceptance inspections shall be performed, before
acceptance of the works. Verification will be required to ensure that tests have been
completed, corrective work accomplished and installation non-objected for issuance
of a permit to operate.
20.4.5.3 Field Adjustments
Guide rails shall be aligned vertically within a tolerance of 1.5 mm in 30 m. Joints
shall be secure without gaps and irregularities filed to a smooth surface.
Cars shall be balanced to equalise pressure of roller guide shoes on rails.
Equipment shall be lubricated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Motors, controller, levelling switches, stopping switches, door operators, interlocking,

and safety devices shall be adjusted to achieve required performance levels.
20.4.5.4 Acceptance Inspection and Tests
Acceptance of installations shall be made only after all field quality control and tests
are complete, all submittals and certificates have been received, and the Engineer
is satisfied that the following have been satisfactorily completed. The Contractor
shall supply, labour, materials and equipment necessary for tests:
 workmanship and equipment comply with specifications
 speed, capacity, and floor-to-floor performance comply with specifications
 performance of the following are satisfactory:
(i) starting, accelerating, running
(ii) decelerating, stopping accuracy, stopping
(iii) door operation and closing pressure
(iv) equipment noise levels.
 in all test conditions, speed and performance times specified shall be met,
stopping accuracy shall be maintained without re-levelling, and general ride
quality shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
Temperature tests may also be required, at the Engineer’s discretion.
Should tests detect any defects or poor workmanship, or non-compliance with or
variance from the specification requirements, the following work and/or repairs shall
be completed at no expense to the Employer:
 replace all equipment that does not meet specification requirements
 perform all work and supply all labour, materials, and equipment necessary to
complete specified operation and/ or performance
 perform all retesting required by the authorities and the Engineer to verify
specified operation and/ or performance.
20.4.5.5 Clean Up
Areas shall be kept orderly and free from debris during Project progress.
Loose materials and filings resulting from work on hoistway surfaces and truss
interiors shall be removed.
The machine room equipment and floor shall be cleared of dirt, oil and grease.
Hoistways, cars, car enclosures, entrances, operating and signal fixtures, handrails,
and trim shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, and finger marks.
20.4.5.6 Manufacturer's Services
The manufacturer's representative shall inspect the final installation and supervise
initial operation. Manufacturer’s certificates shall be provided prior to field testing
equipment.
The manufacturer's representative shall instruct and train plant personnel for at least
one 8 hour day on proper operation and maintenance procedures.
Appendix A: Pedestrian Bridge Lift Schedule
Passenger Lift
Lift Type Machine Machine Room-less (MRL) passenger lift
Motor Starts per Hour 180 minimum

Nominal Travel 8500mm (exact travel to be confirmed with
Architect)
Speed 2.0m/s
Car Dimensions 1400mm wide x 2400mm deep x 2200-3000mm
high
Entrance Opening 1300mm wide x 2000-2400mm high
Minimum Lift Capacity 1600kg (maximum weight of single piece of
equipment to be carried is 1600kg), 21 person
Door Type Centre Opening (door finish to Architects’
specification)
Entry Single
No. of Landings (Front) 2
No. of Landings (Rear) 0
Lift Type Machine Machine Room-less (MRL) passenger lift
No. of Landings 2
Car Fitout Custom (to Architects’ specification) Car
External Cladding _ Aluminium cladding in
powder coat finish to Architect’s
specification.
PART 31 Power Transformers

31.1 GENERAL
31.1.1 Scope
Insert new Clauses 31.6 to 31.10 as follows
Add new Part 35 as follows:

PART 35 Extra High Voltage Cables

PART 36 High Voltage Switchgear

PART 37 Fluidize Thermal Backfill Material
Fluidized Thermal Backfill (FTB) material required for the installation of electrical
cables as shown in the detailed electrical design of the project shall meet the
following requirements;
 The contractor shall submit separate mix designs for each type of Fluidized
Thermal Backfill (FTB) intended to be used in the project.
 FTBs used shall be controlled low-strength material specifically designed to
dissipate heat generated by underground electric cables.
 FTB must be thermally engineered and delivered in accordance with mix
design parameters to achieve the thermal resistivity specified.
 Trial-mixes of all FTB types to be used in the project shall be prepared; their
physical and electrical characteristic tested at an MME non-objected laboratory
and results submitted for approval.
 FTBs shall have a dry thermal resistivity of 1.1mK/W
 The material shall function like a low strength soil and shall allow future access
to the cables if necessary.
 FTB must be able to flow in the trench freely enough to fill all voids and
crevices in the trench.
 Total air content of any FTB mix shall not exceed 2% by volume. Air entraining
admixtures are not acceptable.
 The Contractor’s submittal of a mix design shall contain a unique identification
for each mix design, and shall include the mix proportions per cubic meter, the
proposed sources, admixtures, the average 28-day compressive strength,
thermal resistivity testing including thermal dry graphs and the water cement
ratio.
 Test results for compressive strength and thermal resistivity included in the mix
design submittal shall not be more than 60 days old.
 The Contractor shall notify the engineer in writing of any mix design
modifications.
 FTB shall be delivered to site only using ready mix concrete trucks.
SECTION 24: FINISHES TO BUILDINGS
PART 4 SPECIAL WALL SURFACES

4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Scope
Add the following paragraph:
3 This Section includes the following:
(a) Limestone tile and related setting materials applied to walls.
Add the following sub-clauses:
4.1.3 Definitions
1 Dimension Stone Tile: Limestone units shall be 30 mm thick.
2 Colour: Light area: Aegean cream; dark bands: Royal Oyster Satin
3 Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width.
4 Honed Finish: Smooth, non-reflective finish similar to that produced by
grinding with a 400 to 1200-grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 0.13 mm
when faces are tested for flatness with a 600mm straightedge.
4.1.4 Submittals
1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
2 Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of stone tile and tile pattern.
Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control and
isolation joints in substrates and finished stone tile surfaces.
3 Samples for Verification:
(a) Full-size units of each type of stone tile in each finish required.
(b) Assembled Samples with grouted joints for each type of stone tile and
for each finish required, at least 900 mm square and mounted on a
rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color(s) approved for completed
Work.
(c) Range Samples consisting of at least three full-size units of each type
of stone tile, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other
visual characteristics expected. Range Samples establish the
standard by which individual tiles will be judged.
4 Qualification Data: For Installer.
5 Maintenance Data: For dimension stone tile to include in maintenance
manuals.
1 Supplier Qualifications: A firm experienced in supplying products similar to
those indicated for the Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
2 Source Limitations for Stone Tile: Obtain each type of stone product through
one source from a single producer.
(a) Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of product, size and finish
from same location in a single quarry with resources to provide
materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
3 Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products
specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer:
(a) Joint sealants.
4.1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1 Deliver materials to Project site in factory wrappings, clearly labeled with
identification of manufacturer and lot number.
2 Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover and
in a dry location.
3 Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be
maintained and contamination avoided.
4 Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and
protected from freezing.
4.1.7 Performance Requirements
1 Environmental Limitations: Do not install stone tile until construction in
spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are
maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's
written instructions.
2 Determine sizes and thickness of slabs, sizes, number and spacing of fixings,
configuration and location of support systems and incorporation of
accessories to ensure the cladding system will accommodate deflections and
thermal movements without damage.
3 Accuracy of erection:
(a) Elevation joint widths- Within joint lengths, including in-line
continuations across transverse joints as follows:
- Tolerance: Greatest width not to exceed least width by more than
10%.
- Variations: Evenly distribute with no sudden changes.
(b) Offset in elevation- Between nominally in-line edges across transverse
joints not to exceed 10% width of joint.
(c) Offset in plan or section - Between flat faces or adjacent panels
across joints not to exceed 10% width of joint.
(d) Sealant joints width limitations: To recommendations of sealant
manufacturer.
(e) Finished work- Square, regular, true to line and plane with
satisfactory fit at junctions.
4.1.8 Sequencing and Scheduling
1 Sequence stone tile installation with other work to minimize possibility of
damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.
2 Install stone tile and accessories only after other finishing operations including
painting have been completed.
4.1.9 Extra Materials
1 Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
(a) Dimension Stone Tile: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3
percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern,
and size indicated.
4.2 PRODUCTS
4.2.1 Stone Products
1 Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements for each
stone product type, provide stone varieties that match sample held by the
ENGINEER.
(a) Where two or more stone product types listed in the paragraphs below
are identical except for size or finish provide same variety from same
source for each type.
2 Abrasion Resistance: Provide stone with a value of not less than 10 as
determined per ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241.
3 Provide stone products that are free of defects impairing their function for use
indicated, including cracks, seams and starts.
4 Pattern Orientation: For stone varieties with a directional pattern, provide tile
with pattern oriented parallel to vertical side of tile.
(a) Match the ENGINEER's samples for color, finish and other stone
characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.
(b) Thickness: Not less than 30 mm unless otherwise indicated.
4.2.2 Elastomeric Sealants
1 Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of
base polymer and characteristics indicated below.
(a) Single-component, non-sag urethane sealant.
2 Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile
adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
4.2.3 Miscellaneous Materials
1 Protective Coating: Liquid grout-release coating that is formulated to protect
exposed surfaces of stone tile against adherence of mortar and grout;
compatible with stone, mortar and grout products; easily removable after
grouting is completed without damaging grout or stone tile; and
recommended for use as temporary protective coating for stone tile.
2 Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without
harming stone tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and
installations indicated by stone tile producers and grout manufacturers.
4.2.4 Fabrication
1 General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with
requirements indicated including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
2 Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless
otherwise indicated. Shape beds to fit supports.
3 Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports and
lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place.
4 Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements
indicated for finish and to match approved samples.
5 Quirk-miter corners, unless otherwise indicated; provide for anchorage in top
and bottom bed joints of corner pieces.
6 Cut stone to produce uniform joints 10 mm wide and in locations indicated.
7 Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings and similar
features as required to accommodate contiguous work.
8 Fabricate molded work, including washes and drips, to produce stone shapes
with a uniform profile throughout entire unit length and with matching profile at
joints between units.
(a) Produce moldings and molded edges with machines that use abrasive
shaping wheels made to reverse contour of molding shape.
9 Clean backs of stone to remove rust stains, iron particles and stone dust.
10 Inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with
requirements for appearance, material and fabrication. Replace defective
units.
(a) Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when
assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are
acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other
appearance characteristics represented in approved samples and
mockups.
11 Facial Dimensions of Stone Tiles with Polished or Honed Faces: Do not vary
facial dimensions from specified dimensions by more than plus or minus 0.4
mm.
12 Thickness of Stone Tiles with Polished or Honed Finish: Do not vary from
specified thickness by more than plus or minus 0.8 mm.
4.3 EXECUTION
4.3.1 Cutting of Stone
1 Standard: To BS 8298 for production generally.
2 Bedding: Appropriate to position.
3 Permissible deviations:
- Dimension Deviation
- Height + 2 mm
- Width + 2 mm
- Diagonal lesser of 0.5% or + 5 mm
- Thickness + 3 mm
- Kerf width + 1.5 mm
- Kerf position + 1.5 mm
- Hole position on face + 6 mm
- Undercut anchor on rear + 3 mm
4 Oversize stones: Leave selected stone units oversize to accommodate
deviations within building structure. Cut to precise dimensions taken on site.
4.3.2 Preparation
1 Remove coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials from
substrates including curing compounds and other substances that contain
soap, wax, oil or silicone.
2 Lay out tile patterns by marking joint lines on substrates to verify joint
placement at edges, corners, doors and other critical elements.
(a) Notify the ENGINEER seven days in advance of dates and times
when layout will be done.
(b) Obtain the ENGINEER's approval of layout before starting tile
installation.
4.3.3 Installation, General
1 ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with requirements of ANSI A108
that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated.
2 Wipe backs of tiles with a damp cloth to remove dirt and dust before units are
installed.
3 Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to
form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting
pattern or joint alignments.
4 Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile
without marring visible surfaces. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping,
fixtures and other penetrations so plates, collars or covers overlap tile.
5 Finish cut tile edges that will not be concealed by other construction by
grinding and honing cut surfaces to match factory-fabricated edges.
6 Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align
joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are same size. Lay
out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each
wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
7 Pattern Orientation: For stone varieties with directional pattern, orient pattern
as follows:
(a) Orient tiles that have pattern parallel to one side with pattern vertically.
4.3.4 Installation Tolerances
1 Variation from Plumb: For vertical joints, external corners and other
conspicuous lines do not exceed 3 mm in 2400 mm.
2 Variation in Level: For horizontal joints and other conspicuous lines do not
exceed 6 mm in 6 m or 12 mm maximum.
3 Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed the
following differences between faces of adjacent units as measured from a
straightedge parallel to tiled surface:
(a) Units with Polished Faces: 0.4 mm.
(b) Units with Honed Faces: 0.4 mm.
4 Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.6 mm or
one-fourth of nominal joint width whichever is less.
5 Hand-Tight Joints: Do not exceed 0.4 mm.
4.3.5 Setting Mechanically Anchored Stone Cladding
1 Attach anchors securely to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with
recommendations in ASTM C1242.
2 Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to
prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of
anchor holed and kerfs with sealant indicated for filling kerfs.
3 Set stone supported on clips or continuous angles on resilient setting shims.
Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths and to
prevent point loading of stone on anchors. Hold shims back from face of
stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.
4.3.6 Adjusting and Cleaning
1 Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged stone,
defective joints and dimension stone cladding that does not match approved
samples. Damaged stone may be repaired if the ENGINEER approves the
methods and results.
2 Replace in a manner which results in dimension stone cladding's matching
approved samples complying with other requirements and showing no
evidence of replacement.
3 In-Progress Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding as work progresses.
Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. Remove excess sealant
and smears as sealant is installed.
4 Final Cleaning: Clean dimension stone cladding no fewer than six days after
completion of pointing and sealing using clean water and stiff-bristle fiber
brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning
agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives or other materials or
methods that could damage stone.
PART 5 TILES
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.3 Submittals
2 Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile, tile pattern and
waterproofing details. Show widths, details and locations of expansion,
contraction, control and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile
surfaces.
3 Method statement for all Work specified in this section.
4 Samples for Verification:
(a) Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color
and finish required.
(b) Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition
of tile and for each color and finish required at least 300 mm square
and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or colors
approved for completed work.
(c) Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and
finish required.
5 Product Certificates: For each type of product signed by product
manufacturer.
6 Qualification Data: For Installer.
7 Material Test Reports: For each tile setting and grouting product and special-
purpose tile.
8 Performance Warranty:
(a) WORK under this section shall be covered by a written warranty valid
for ten (10) years from the date of completion and acceptance of the
project, supported by the manufacturer’s product warranty for the
same period of time.
(b) The warranty shall be insurance backed and shall be signed by the
applicator agreeing to repair any failure of the waterproofing due to
defects in materials or workmanship.
1 Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tiles of the same type and color or
finish from one source or producer.
(a) Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
2 Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a
uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive and grout component from a single
manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.
3 Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products
specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for
each product:
(a) Waterproofing.
(b) Joint sealants.
4 Waterproofing: Waterproofing works shall be carried out by a specialist firm
having not less than ten (10) years of continuous and proven experience in
the installation of the specified systems for projects of similar size. The
specialist firm shall be approved by the waterproofing system’s manufacturer.
5.1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals
unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in
ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
2 Store tile and cementtious materials on elevated platforms, under cover and
in a dry location.
3 Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be
maintained and contamination avoided.
4 Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and
protected from extreme heat.
5 Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to
prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If
coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile remove coating from bonding
surfaces before setting tile.
5.1.6 Project Conditions
1 Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is
complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at
the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written
instructions.
(a) Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3
percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern
and size indicated.
Delete the Clause 5.2 and substitute with the following:
5.2 PRODUCTS
5.2.1 General
1 ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1,
"Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions and other
characteristics indicated.
(a) Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless
otherwise indicated.
(b) For facial dimensions of tile comply with requirements relating to tile
sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
2 ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying
with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.
3 Colors, Textures and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are
indicated for tile, grout and other products requiring selection of colors,
surface textures, patterns and other appearance characteristics provide
specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:
(a) Match the ENGINEER's samples.
4 Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected
during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken
from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other
packages and match approved Samples.
5 Mounting: For factory-mounted tile provide back or edge-mounted tile
assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
(a) Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas do not use back or
edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in
writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated
and has a record of successful in-service performance.
5.2.2 Tile Products
1 Manufacturers: Graniti Fiandre or equal and approved.
2 Wall Tile: Flat tile as follows:
(a) Type & colour: Nuances beige.
(b) Module Size: As shown on drawings.
(c) Thickness: 10mm or as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
(d) Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges.
3 Floor Tile: Flat tile as follows:
(a) Type & colour: Nuances dark brown.
(b) Module Size: As shown on drawings.
(c) Thickness: 10 mm or as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
(d) Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges.
5.2.3 Setting and Grouting Materials
1 Manufacturers: FOSROC or SIKA or equal and approved.
2 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the
following:
(a) Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-
butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive.
(i) For wall applications, provide non-sagging mortar that
complies with other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
3 Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
4 Standard Un-sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6 color as indicated.
5 Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7 color as indicated.
(a) Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate in dry, re-dispersible
form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients or acrylic resin or
styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to
prepackaged dry-grout mix.
(i) Un-sanded grout mixture for joints 3.2 mm and narrower.
5.2.4 Elastomeric Sealants
1 Manufacturers: FOSROC or SIKA or equal and approved.
2 General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric
sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with
applicable requirements for Joint Sealants.
3 Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile
adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
4 One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920; Type S;
Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A and as applicable to nonporous joint
substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior
ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-
service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
5 Multipart Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C920; Type M; Grade
P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A and as applicable to joint substrates indicated O.
5.2.5 Miscellaneous Materials
1 Trowel-able Underlayment and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,
Portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of
tile-setting materials for installations indicated.
2 Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without
harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and
installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
3 Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout
joints that does not change color or appearance of grout.
5.2.6 Mixing Mortars and Grout
1 Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and
grout manufacturers' written instructions.
2 Add materials, water and additives in accurate proportions.
3 Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform
quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
5.3 CERAMIC TILES
Delete sub-clause 5.3.5 and substitute with the following:
5.3.5 Floor Tiles
1 Manufacturer:
(a) GRANITI FIANDRE (See local Qatar trading agent Al-Amodi
[email protected]).
2 Tiles shall be of porcelain type, minimum 10mm thick and vitrified. Tiles shall
be through-body coloured with a variegated appearance.
3 Tiles shall have the following properties:
(a) Material: Un-glazed full-body vitrified porcelain.
(b) Size: 600 x 600mm.
(c) Surface quality: To BS EN ISO 10545-2
(d) Water absorption: <0.05% in accordance with BS EN ISO 10545-3
(e) Slip resistance: Rz 20µm minimum
(f) Stain resistance: Class 5 minimum in accordance with BS EN ISO
10545-14
(g) Deep abrasion resistance: 140mm2 maximum loss in accordance with
BS EN ISO 10545-6
(h) Breaking strength: 50N/mm2 minimum in accordance with BS EN ISO
10545-4
5.3.8 Tile Grouting
1 Water-repellent grouting and waterproof liquid applied membrane in wet area:
All floor tiling in toilets must have their supporting base (cement sand leveling
screed laid to slope) waterproofed with a rubber polymer based liquid applied
waterproof membrane, and grouting shall be made with a water-repellent
grout having bactericide and fungicide properties.
2 Rubber polymer based liquid applied waterproof membrane:
(a) Primer: Type and application as recommended by the coating
manufacturer.
(b) Product reference: Fabric reinforced, load bearing waterproofing
system. The system shall consist of self curing liquid rubber polymer
and an integral reinforcing fabric which combined forms a seamless
waterproofing membrane meeting or exceeding the requirements of
ASTM C627.
(c) Number of coats: Two coats to achieve a wet film thickness of not less
than 0.5mm.
(d) Coverage per coat (minimum): 1L/m2, 0.5mm wet film thickness.
3 Reinforcement: As recommended by coating manufacturer.
4 Other requirements:
(a) Gypsum or asphalt based leveling compounds should not be used to
prepare floors or walls prior to application of the membrane.
(b) Precut the reinforcing fabric allowing for an overlap of 50mm at ends
and sides.
(c) Roll up the reinforcing fabric so that each piece can be placed when
ready.
(d) Spread a layer of waterproofing liquid at joints and cracks. Embed a
150mm wide strip of reinforcing fabric into the liquid and spread a coat
of liquid over the fabric to seal it.
(e) Use a paint roller to apply a liberal coat of the waterproofing liquid to
the floor or wall slightly wider than the fabric width. Include previously
reinforced joints and coves. While the surface is still wet unroll a
precut piece of reinforcing fabric into it. Then use a brush to embed
the fabric and smooth out any wrinkles. As the fabric is embedded the
liquid must bleed through.
(f) Immediately apply a liberal coat of waterproofing to completely cover
the fabric.
(g) Make a final application of waterproofing liquid to the entire surface to
completely seal the membrane.
(h) Allow the membrane to cure fully for 5 to 7 days before flood testing.
(i) Finishes shall be directly fixed to the waterproofing membrane with
adhesive. The adhesive shall be compatible with the waterproofing
membrane.
(j) If punctured the waterproofing membrane shall be repaired in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and subject to
the ENGINEER’s approval.
5.3.9 Cleaning and Protecting
1 Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile
surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
(a) Remove Latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as
possible.
(b) Clean grout, smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout
manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after
installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout
manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use
by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush
surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
2 When recommended by tile manufacturer apply coat of neutral protective
cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft
paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining,
damage and wear.
3 Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after
grouting is completed.
4 Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner
from tile surfaces.
PART 10 JOINTS, CAULKING AND SEALANTS

10.1 GENERAL
10.1.4 Submittals
1 Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
2 Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required,
provide Samples with joint sealants in 13-mm-wide joints formed between two
150-mm-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces
adjacent to joint sealants.
3 Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by
product manufacturer.
4 Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
5 Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint
preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based
on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
6 Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer
indicating the following:
(a) Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have
been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
(b) Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
7 Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.
8 Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product
formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants
comply with requirements.
9 Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
Delete Sub-clause 10.1.5 and substitute with the following:
10.1.5 Testing
1 Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates
as follows:
(a) Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as
follows:
(i) Perform 10 tests for the first 300 m of joint length for each type
of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.
(ii) Perform 1 test for each 300 m of joint length thereafter or 1 test
per each floor per elevation.
(b) Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied
Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 as
appropriate for type of joint-sealant application indicated.
(i) For joints with dissimilar substrates verify adhesion to each
substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side
verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for
opposite side.
(c) Inspect joints for complete fill for absence of voids and for joint
configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results
in a field-adhesion-test log.
(d) Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
(i) Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion
failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include
data on pull distance used to test each type of product and
joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if
adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-
pull test criteria.
(ii) Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
(iii) Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with
specified requirements.
(e) Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when
sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test
dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results,
percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration and sealant
dimensions.
(f) Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants
following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that
original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts
original sealant.
2 Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure
from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be
considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint
substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed
applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
10.1.6 Warranty
1 Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer
agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
(a) Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
2 Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of
elastomeric joint sealants from the following:
(a) Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant
exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant
elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors
attributable to design or construction.
(b) Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding
design specifications.
(c) Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools or other outside
agents.
(d) Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or
other atmospheric contaminants.
1 Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved
or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
2 Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source
from a single manufacturer.
3 Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant
manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will
contact or affect joint sealants.
(a) Use ASTM C1087 to determine whether priming and other specific
joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum
adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
(b) Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including
joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals and
miscellaneous materials.
(c) Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent
delaying the Work.
(d) For materials failing tests obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions for corrective measures including use of specially
formulated primers.
4 Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in
"Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current
sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the commencement
of the Work.
(a) Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency
qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated as
documented according to ASTM E548.
(b) Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements
specified by reference to ASTM C920 and where applicable to other
standard test methods.
(c) Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by
referencing standard specifications and test methods.
5 Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric
sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:
(a) Locate test joints where indicated on Project or if not indicated as
directed by the ENGINEER.
(b) Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
(i) Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
(ii) Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate
indicated.
(c) Notify the ENGINEER seven days in advance of dates and times
when test joints will be erected.
(d) Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's
technical representative present.
(i) Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-
Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in Appendix X1 in
ASTM C1193.
(1) For joints with dissimilar substrates verify adhesion to
each substrate separately; extend cut along one side
verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure
for opposite side.
(e) Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed
to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull
distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For
sealants that fail adhesively retest until satisfactory adhesion is
obtained.
(f) Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants
not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other
indications of noncompliance with requirements will be considered
satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates
during testing.
10.1.8 Project Condition
1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
(a) When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer 5°C.
(b) When joint substrates are wet.
(c) Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant
manufacturer for applications indicated.
(d) Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet
been removed from joint substrates.
10.5 WORKMANSHIP
10.5.1 Examination
1 Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration,
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint-sealant
performance.
2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
10.5.2 Preparation
1 Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before
installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's
written instructions and the following requirements:
(a) Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could
interfere with adhesion of joint sealant including dust, paints
(except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing,
water repellents, water, surface dirt and frost.
(b) Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding,
blast cleaning, mechanical abrading or a combination of these
methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining after cleaning operations above by
vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
(i) Concrete.
(ii) Masonry.
(iii) Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
(iv) Travertine.
(v) Granite.
(c) Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
(d) Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other
means that do not stain, harm substrates or leave residues
capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
(i) Metal.
(ii) Glass.
(iii) Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
2 Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by
joint-sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint-sealant-
substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-
sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
surfaces.
3 Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact
of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be
permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
10.5.3 Installation of Joint Sealants
1 General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation
instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more
stringent requirements apply.
2 Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in
ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials,
applications and conditions indicated.
3 Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with
recommendations in ASTM C919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical
applications as applicable to materials, applications and conditions
indicated.
4 Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during
application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes
and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
(a) Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
(b) Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear sealant backings.
(c) Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet
before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
5 Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are
not used between sealants and backs of joints.
6 Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following
and at the same time backings are installed:
(a) Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint
substrates.
(b) Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
(c) Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
7 Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application
and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to
requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact
and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
(a) Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
(b) Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant
manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent
surfaces.
(c) Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in
ASTM C1193, unless otherwise indicated.
(d) Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B
in ASTM C1193.
8 Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
10.5.4 Cleaning
1 Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the
Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in
writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which
joints occur.
10.5.5 Protection
1 Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with
contaminating substances and from damage resulting from
construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If despite
such protection damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations
with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
10.5.6 Joint-Sealant Schedule
1 Perimeter joints between concrete, CMU, or plaster and frames of
doors.
(a) Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant.
(b) Joint-Sealant Color: Match concrete, CMU, or plaster.
2 Interior ceramic and dimension stone tile expansion, control,
contraction and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
(a) Joint Sealant: Multicomponent pourable urethane sealant.
3 Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls and
floors.
(a) Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-
curing silicone sealant.
(b) Joint-Sealant Color: White.
4 Interior joints in wet areas.
(a) Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-
curing silicone sealant.
(b) Joint-Sealant Color: White.
PART 14 CEILINGS
14.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
14.1.1 Scope
1 This part shall include suspended ceilings of dry construction comprising tiles,
panels, trays, boards or tensioned synthetic, supported by exposed or
concealed metal suspension grids. Components are to be factory finished.
Lighting, ventilation, fire prevention and other services must be integrated
with the suspended ceilings. Fixings and suspension systems shall include all
hangers, fixings, main runners, cross members, primary channels, perimeter
trims, splines, noggins, clips, bracing, bridging, etc., which are necessary to
complete the installation and achieve the performance specified.
14.1.2 References
Add the following standards to paragraph 1:
BS EN 13279-1:2005 Gypsum building plasters. Definitions and requirement
BS EN 13279-2:2004 Gypsum building plasters. Test methods
BS EN 520:2004 Gypsum plasterboards. Definitions, requirements and test methods
BS EN 13914-2:2005 Design, preparation and application of external rendering and
internal plastering. Design considerations and essential principles for internal
plastering.
BS EN 13964:2004 Suspended ceilings - Requirements and test methods.
Add the following paragraphs:
5 Compliance with performance requirements
(a) Testing/assessment: Submit independent and accredited laboratory
reports for the following:
(i) Fire performance (where applicable)
(ii) Electrical continuity and earth bonding;
(b) Materials, components and details: Use those used in the
test/assessment reports. If discrepancies arise give notice.
6 Environment
(a) Environmental classification to BS EN 13964:2004: Normal.
7 Structural performance generally
(a) Loads: The ceiling system must safely support all imposed loads
including services fittings:
(i) ceiling system subject to wind pressure: No
(ii) uniform distributed loads: 0.6 kN/m² (maximum)
(iii) point loads: Not applicable
(iv) additional loads/pressures to be sustained by ceiling system:
Lighting, fire;
(v) detection, fire fighting, air conditioning and other building
services accessories as indicated on the CONTRACT
drawings;
(b) Deflection (maximum) between points of support:
(i) Span under 1200 mm: Span/400.
(ii) Span 1200-1800 mm: Span/500.
(iii) Span over 1800 mm: Span/600.
Delete Sub-clause 14.1.4 and substitute with the following:
14.1.4 Submittals
1 Shop drawings: Shop drawings showing panel layout and installation
details
2 Samples: Submit samples of each specified finished panel and
exposed framing and trim to Contractor and Engineer’s office.
Additionally, submit to site samples of framing, hangers and hanger
inserts.
3 Ceiling Assembly for Co-ordination: Submit a standard full grid ceiling
assembly to both the mechanical and electrical installation firms as the
Contractor and Engineer directs.
4 Co-operate with these firms to assist them in co-ordination of their
work with the ceiling installation.
5 Affidavits: Submit affidavits with applicable test reports that installed
ceiling system conform to specified requirements.
6 Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions.
1 Source Limitations:
(a) Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a
single manufacturer.
(b) Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a
single manufacturer.
2 Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply
with requirements in Section 1.
3 Mock – up:
(a) Install a mock-up at site of complete ceiling systems for approval in
area as designated on-site by the Engineer. Include in installation
lighting fixture with air handling unit, special panels for speaker,
sprinkler and air handling through perforated panel where applicable.
(b) Remove disapproved mock-ups and reconstruct until approval is
given.
(c) Retain approved mock-up to establish acceptable quality of
subsequent installations.
(d) Approved mock-up may be incorporated in the works.
1 Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components and accessories to
Project site in original unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed,
conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from
moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface
contamination and other causes.
2 Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against
damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic and
other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.
1 Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until
spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, work above ceilings is complete and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied
for its intended use. Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
2 Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
3 Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged and those
that are mold damaged.
(a) Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include but are
not limited to discoloration, sagging or irregular shape.
(b) Indications that panels are mold damaged include but are not limited
to fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
14.1.8 Coordination
1 Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension
system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by
them including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system and
partition assemblies.
(a) Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of
quantity installed.
(b) Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed
component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
(c) Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
14.3 GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS
14.3.1 Products
1 Interior Gypsum Board
(a) General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board
indicated and whichever is more stringent.
(b) Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-
resistant core and surfaces.
(i) Core: 16 mm, Type X.
(ii) Long Edges: Tapered.
2 Tile Backing Panels
(a) Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Core: 12.7 mm, regular type 16 mm,
Type X.
(b) Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. Thickness: 12.7 mm.
3 Trim Accessories
(a) Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
(i) Material: Galvanized.
(ii) Shapes:
(1) Cornerbead.
(2) Bullnose bead.
(3) LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint
compound.
(4) L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint
compound.
(5) U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not
receive joint compound.
(6) Expansion (control) joint.
(7) Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible
flanges.
4 Joint Treatment Materials
(a) General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
(b) Joint Tape:
(i) Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
(ii) Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel
manufacturer.
(c) Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
(i) Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type
taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
(ii) Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit
manufacturer.
5 Auxiliary Materials
(a) General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced
installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
(b) Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
(i) Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels
to steel members from 0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.
(ii) For fastening cementitious backer units use screws of type and
size recommended by panel manufacturer.
14.3.2 Execution
1 Examination:
(a) Examine areas and substrates with Installer present and including
welded hollow-metal frames and framing for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
(b) Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet,
moisture damaged and mold damaged.
(c) Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
2 Applying and Finishing Panels, General:
Comply with ASTM C 840.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end
joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger
abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at
edges and ends with not more than 1.5 mm of open space between panels.
Do not force into place.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications
where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided
behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints
other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces
(above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
(a) Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes and conduits.
(b) Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below
underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit
profile formed by structural members; allow 6.4- to 9.5-mm- wide joints
to install sealant.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each
panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
3 Protection:
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct
sunlight, construction and other causes during remainder of the construction
period.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged and mold
damaged.
(a) Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include but are
not limited to discoloration, sagging or irregular shape.
(b) Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited
to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
Add new Parts 15, 16 and 17 as follows:
PART 15 TOILET ACCESSORIES

15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 Summary
1 This Section includes the following:
(a) Sanitary appliances, e.g. WCs, wash basins, urinals and accessories.
(b) Waste fittings and traps.
(c) Sanitary fittings, e.g. soap dispensers, hand driers and grab bars.
15.1.2 Submittals
1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
(a) Construction details and dimensions.
(b) Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for
cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.
(c) Material and finish descriptions.
(d) Features that will be included for Project.
(d) Manufacturer's warranty.
2 Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation and
finish requirements.
(a) Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the
Work.
3 Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation
locations by room of each accessory required.
(a) Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
4 Maintenance Data: For toilet accessories to be included in maintenance
manuals.
1 Source Limitations: For products listed together provide products of same
manufacturer unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.
15.1.4 Coordination
1 Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with
clearances required for access by people with disabilities and for proper
installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning and servicing of accessories.
2 Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry required
to prevent delay in the Work.
1 The contractor shall examine all other sections of the specifications for
requirements which affect or are affected by this section. The contractor shall
coordinate all trades affected or affecting this section to assure steady
progress of all work.
2 All products shall be delivered to the job site in original factory shipping
containers. All products shall be new, prime quality, free from defects and
with structural properties to sustain safety or withstand strains and stresses to
which they are normally subjected.
3 Plumbing fixtures and trim specified hereinafter shall be provided free of flaws
and defects of any sort in material and workmanship and shall operate
perfectly when installed in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. The
manufacturer shall agree to replace all or any part of the fixtures which show
flaw or defect due to faulty manufacture.
4 In the event of damage the Contractor shall immediately make all necessary
replacements to the approval of the ENGINEER.
5 Furnish complete schedules with brochures and technical data of all items.
No partial submission of brochures will be accepted. The brochures shall be
bound in loose-leaf, hard cover booklets with an index page at the front. Each
item shall have a preceding page giving the correct item symbol, model,
accessory numbers and service connection requirements.
6 Following the ENGINEER's approval of schedules the Contractor shall submit
complete shop drawings indicating the exact location of each item. No
installation shall take place prior to the approval of the shop drawings.
7 At completion provide the following:
- Maintenance data for all items.
- Any special tools required for accessing, assembly, disassembly or
removal of appliances, fittings or accessories.
15.2 PRODUCTS
15.2.1 Materials
1 Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
2 Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled,
commercial steel), 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
3 Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc
coating.
4 Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
5 Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory
unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed and of galvanized steel
where concealed.
6 Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate
service).
15.2.2 Integrated Hand Wash/Dryer
1 Manufacturer: Wallgate or equal & approved.
2 Model: Thrii_ST- Stainless Steel Automatic Handwash Dryer.
3 Provide recessed automatic stainless steel wall mounted three-in-one
handwash/soap/dryer of size 450(W) X 830(H) from with the following
specification
(a) Electrical power requirements: 220-240V, 50Hz Single Phase, 2.6-3.1
Kw.
(b) Water supply requirements: Minimum pressure- 1.5 Bar/150KPa
Maximum pressure- 10 Bar/1000KPa
15.2.3 Sanitary Fittings
1 Manufacturers: Franke or equal and approved.
2 Washbasin (Accessible):
(a) Description: Accessible wall mounting, stainless steel, satin finished
washbasin with 1mm thick seamless welded bowl 500x 335 x 155mm,
oval shape, designed specifically to allow people using wheelchairs
access to the washbasin wash area.
(b) Mixer: Refer to Clause 15.2.4.
3 WC:
(a) Description: Wall mounted WC pan, stainless steel, satin finished
1.6mm flushing certificated to EN997 with concealed cistern 6/4 litre
dual flush and P trap.
(b) Flush plate shall be contemporary dual plate flush. WC dual flushing
device, panel mounted sensor complete with concealed valve and 4
litre/ 6 litre delay fill duct cistern.
(c) WC shall be fixed to support brackets with bolts. Support brackets to
be secured to floor within the duct. Joints to be sealed with waterproof
sealant.
4 WC (Accessible):
(a) Description: Wall mounted WC pan for disabled, stainless steel, satin
finished 1.6mm flushing certificated to EN997 with concealed cistern
6/4 litre dual flush and P trap.
(b) WC shall be without seat cover and with back support rail and
cushion.
(c) WC shall be fixed to support brackets with bolts. Support brackets to
be secured to floor within the duct. Joints to be sealed with waterproof
sealant.
(d) Flush: WC dual flushing device, panel mounted sensor complete with
concealed valve and 4 litre/ 6 litre delay fill duct cistern.
5 Urinal:
(a) Description: Satin finished stainless steel wall mounting urinal with
1.2mm bowl and concealed auto cistern 4.5 litre.
(b) Mounting and fixing shall conform to EN80 with hidden screws and
trap DN50 including mounting bracket and domed waste.
6 Urinal Divider:
(a) Description: 2mm thick wall mounting stainless steel, satin finished
urinal divider with hidden wall mounting.
15.2.4 Toilet Accessories
1 Manufacturers: Dolphin, UK or equal and approved.
2 Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser:
(a) Description: Stainless steel round cabinet shall be four-roll unit
providing access to 1 roll at a time.
(b) Mounting: Surface mounted as per Manufacturer’s instructions.
(c) Capacity: 254-mm diameter rolls.
(d) Material and Finish: 18-8S, type-304, 20-gauge Stainless steel with
satin finish.
(e) Lockset: Tumbler type.
3 Soap Dispenser:
(a) Mounting: As per Manufacturer’s instructions.
(b) Material and Finish: 18-8S, type-304, 22-gauge Stainless steel with
all welded construction; exposed surface shall have satin finish.
(c) Soap Dispenser: Minimum Capacity shall be 1,000ml soap.
4 ADA Dryer:
(a) Mounting: Surface mounted as per Manufacturer’s instructions. It
shall project no more than 100mm from the surface to comply with
barrier-free accessibility guidelines (ADAAG). Hand dryer shall be
installed at least 380mm above any projection which may interfere
with the operation of the automatic sensor.
(b) Material: Stainless steel, 18 gauge, type-304 with #4 satin finish
vertical grains.
(c) Product shall have a minimum 10-year warranty.
(d) Operation: Electronic sensor shall automatically turn dryer on when
hands are held under dual air-outlet openings and across path of
sensor. Electronic sensor shall automatically shut dryer off 1-1/2
minutes after dryer turns on.
5 Grab Bars:
(a) Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. Clearance between
panel and bar will be 38mm.
(b) Material: Stainless steel type-304, 1.2 mm thick.
(i) Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant
texture in grip area.
(ii) Concealed mounting flanges shall be 3mm stainless steel
plate.
(c) Outside Diameter: 32 mm.
(d) Length: 600mm.
6 Swing-up Grab Bar:
(a) Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. Clearance between
panel and bar will be 38mm.
(b) Material: Stainless steel type-304, 1.2 mm thick.
(i) Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant
texture in grip area.
(ii) Concealed mounting flanges shall be 3mm stainless steel
plate.
(c) Outside Diameter: 32 mm.
(d) Configuration and Length: 735mm Long swing-up bar shall be
manually raised for approach or departure and lowered to horizontal
position for support; counterweight shall prevent grab bar from falling
back down to full horizontal position once grab bar is raised to the
vertical position.
7 Touch free tap for Accessible wash basin:
(a) Description: Automatic power operated chrome plated brass infrared
mixer.
(b) Mounting: Panel mounted.
8 Coat Hook:
(a) Description: Surface mounted hat and coat hook.
(b) Mounting: As per Manufacturer’s specifications.
(c) Material and Finish: 22 Gauge type-304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish
(satin) with concealed stainless steel wall plate.
9 Waste Receptacle:
(a) Description: Stainless steel waste receptacle, 30 litres and 650mm
high.
(b) Material and Finish: 22 Gauge stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
15.2.5 Custodial Accessories
1 Mop and Broom Holder:
(a) Description: Surface mounted utility shelf with hooks and holders.
(b) Length: 915 mm.
(c) Material and Finish: 16 Gauge type-304 Stainless steel, No. 4 finish
(satin).
(i) Shelf: Not less than nominal 1.2-mm- thick stainless steel.
(ii) Rod: Approximately 6-mm-diameter stainless steel.
(iii) Rag hooks: Three.
(iv) Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber cams with
anti-slip coating.
15.2.6 IPS & Panel Cubicles
1 Product: Minima designer toilet cubicles from Amwell or equal and approved.
2 Materials:
(a) Frame: Satin polished stainless steel pilaster with radiused vertical
edges and matching headrail.
(b) Doors and panels: 13mm thick Trespa Athlon FR Series Solid grade
laminate, or equal and approved.
(c) Colour: Mercury AM274 to the approval of the ENGINEER.
(d) Edge detail: Black core machined to smooth profile edge; radiused
corners to doors and pilaster.
(e) Fixing:
(i) Edge fixing: Screw fix, as per manufacturer’s instructions.
(ii) Base fixing: Screw fixed down to tiles or upstand, NB slope on
tiles in some locations.
(iii) All screws to be anti-vandal and tamper-proof.
(f) Support system:
(i) Stainless steel headrail bracing width of cubicles.
(ii) Stainless steel cylindrical adjustable legs with through fixings.
(iii) Semi-circular brackets with discreet through fixings.
(iv) Multi-positional through-fixed pivot hinges.
(g) Ironmongery: DDA compliant emergency release function indicator
bolts, locks, channel bracket partition fixings stainless steel.
3 Protection:
(a) Do not remove protective packaging/coverings until just before
components are required for fixing.
(i) Stacks doors and panels flat on bearers and separated by
spacers where necessary to prevent damage to or from
projections.
(ii) Keep components and completed cubicles clean & dry and
adequately protect from damage until Practical Completion.
4 Installation of IPS:
(a) Fit in position floor and wall track to receive IPS frames as per
Manufacturer’s instructions.
(b) The cistern shall remain fixed to the frame. The IPS frame shall be
located in the floor channel centered on the soil pipe inlet. Adjust for
height, plumb and level, securely fix to floor and wall channels.
(c) Install decorative frame spacer panels, skirting wall and ceiling
scribes.
(d) Reposition the bottom decorative panel, refit sanitary-ware and
connect flexible water supply pipes. Contractor shall test the system
for leaks or non-conformities.
(e) After the installation is complete and tested, the decorative panels
shall be replaced and joints shall be silicon sealed where necessary.
5 Installation of cubicles:
(a) Do not install cubicles before wet trades have finished their work, wall
and floor finishes are complete and the building is well dried out.
(b) All dimensions to be checked on site prior to manufacture.
(c) Set out accurately to ensure frames and/or panels and doors are
plumb, level and accurately aligned.
(d) Do not cut, plane or sand pre-finished components. The Contractor
shall check room dimensions on site after all surface finishes have
been applied and prior to ordering the prefabricated panels. No cutting
of the panels is allowed on site and any adjustments necessary to
accommodate dimensional variations must be made before
fabrication.
(e) Fix cubicle components securely using methods and fasteners
recommended by the cubicle manufacturer and without causing
distortion to frames, panels and doors.
(f) Adjust hinges so that doors hang to open.
15.2.7 Fabrication
1 General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges
rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges.
Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing
plates.
2 Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing
and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to the ENGINEER.
15.3 EXECUTION
15.3.1 Installation
1 Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using
fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit
manufacturer. Install units level, plumb and firmly anchored in locations and at
heights indicated.
2 Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 1112 N, when
tested according to method in ASTM F 446.
15.3.2 Adjusting And Cleaning
1 Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged
or defective items.
2 Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
3 Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
PART 16 STRUCTURAL GLASS CANOPY

16.1 GENERAL
16.1.1 Summary
1 Section includes glass, glazing and connections for the Structural Glass
Canopy where shown on Drawings.
1 Sole Source Responsibility: Glass, glazing, system design and accessories
shall be obtained from a single source.
2 The installer of the system shall be responsible for supplying and erecting the
complete structural glazing system, coordinating and maintaining tolerances
between the structure and glazing system with individual suppliers and
manufacturers, and installation of glazing system.
16.1.3 System Description
1 Spring plate members are designed to prevent high stress concentration at
the hole positions and must cope with:
(a) Negative and positive wind loading
(b) Seismic loads
(c) Thermal movement
(d) Construction tolerances
(e) Live load and dead load movements
16.1.4 Submittals
1 Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall clearly indicate materials and methods
indicate coordination with other trades and bear signed approval of the
glazing system manufacturer and the glazing system installer.
2 Product Data: Material description and installation instructions for tapes,
compounds, gaskets and other materials.
3 Samples:
(a) Submit sample of glass and glazing materials required for the Project.
Samples of glass shall be 12" x 12", samples of sealant or gasket
shall be 12" long.
(b) Submit sample of spring plate complete with glass, bolt and
accessories.
4 Quality Assurance Compliance: Submit letters from Manufacturer and from
the project installer stating that they are in compliance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents.
5 Calculations: Submit calculations proving structural glazing systems
performance and compliance with specified loads.
16.1.5 Warranties
1 Manufacturer Warranty: Provide twelve year warranty for the design integrity,
weatherability and durability of the entire system on the letterhead of the
manufacturer. Warranties not written by the glass manufacturer for the entire
system will not be accepted. Separate warranties for fittings and glass or
warranties written by the glazing subcontractor will not be acceptable.
2 Installer Warranty: Warrant the installation for a period of five years for
installation and repairs of failures. Provide written requirements for notification
of installer and terms for maintaining warranty provisions. Do not contradict
the requirements of the Contract Documents.
3 The Warranties submitted under this Section shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights or remedies that the Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents and the laws of governing jurisdictions and is in
addition to and runs concurrently with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
16.2 PRODUCTS
16.2.1 Basis Of Design
1 Glass will be tempered to a minimum stress level of 16000 psi.
2 All tempered glass must be heat soak tested to convert nickel sulfide
inclusions from the alpha phase to the beta phase so that the glass will
fracture in the test. Heat soak must comply with the European Din standard
requiring a minimum 12 hour cycle at a temperature of between 280 and 300
degrees C and must be warranted for twelve years as part of the system
warranty.
3 All edges will be ground flat with a frosted appearance unless otherwise
noted. All edgework, holes and notches in the tempered glass panels will be
completed before tempering and shall comply with requirements stated
below:
(a) Dimensional tolerance on panel size will be ± 1 mm of the theoretical
dimension required.
(b) Squareness of each panel will be within 3 mm.
(c) Bow allowance is 0.1%.
(d) The positional tolerances on all holes will be ± 1 mm from a single
datum point.
4 Flatness of glass is a key element of this specification. Average tempered
glass rollerwave distortion must be certified not to exceed an average of
0.0007 inches peak to valley, with a maximum sag at the leading and trailing
edge of 0.25 mm. A site inspection if required for roller wave and bow
tolerances should be from a minimum distance of 3 meters.
5 All glass must be manufactured in a factory where the quality control
procedures are created under the terms of ISO 9000 and are independently
monitored.
6 Prestress glass around holes to a level which is compatible with the design
and use of the fittings. Check by differential surface refractometer on stress
level.
16.2.2 Fittings
1 Planar fittings shall be predominantly manufactured from stainless steel
Grade 316.
2 The subcontractor shall demonstrate to the Architect's satisfaction that the
stresses induced in the glass by these fittings are compatible with the
strength of the glass and the needs of the performance section of this
specification.
3 The finish of all fittings will be “as machined”.
4 Spring plates shall be designed to the Architect's specification. The design
shall be shown by the Subcontractor to be compatible with the performance
specification in all respects.
5 Spring plates shall provide a tolerance capability which will cope with the full
range of movements shown below:
(a) Thermal movements occurring as a result of differential coefficients of
thermal expansion within the range specified. The components used
within the system shall withstand noiselessly all thermal movements
without any buckling, distortion, cracking, failure of joint seals or
undue stress on the glass or fixing assemblies.
(b) Deflection of edge beams due to loading applied after erection of the
cladding to magnitude specified.
(c) Maximum side sway of structure due to wind load to the magnitude
specified or seismic movement to the degree specified.
(d) Deflection due to self weight of the Planar system.
(e) Inward and outward movements due to the design wind loads.
16.3 EXECUTION
16.3.1 Examination
1 Examine surfaces receiving the Work. Verify dimensions of in-place and
subsequent construction. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected. Installation of work shall constitute acceptance of the
related construction.
16.3.2 Preparation
1 Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at the project site with the representatives of
the glass and glazing materials manufacturers, architectural exposed
structural steel fabricator and erector, sealant manufacturer, the glazing
installer, Architect's representative and Owner's representative. Review the
glazing procedure and schedule including the method of delivering and
handling glass and installing glazing materials. The chemical compatibility of
all glazing materials and framing sealants with each other and with like
materials used in glass fabrication shall be established.
16.3.3 Installation of Glass
1 Install in accordance with Manufacturer’s requirements and the shop
drawings.
2 Employ only experienced glaziers who have had previous experience with the
materials and systems being applied. Use tools and equipment recommended
by the glass manufacturer.
3 Plate-to-plate joints of glass are to be sealed with silicone sealant. Joint
dimensions shall be designed to be compatible with sealant properties and
live load movement of the structure.
4 Maintain a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F during glazing unless the
manufacturer of the glazing material specifically agrees to application of this
material at lower temperature. If job progresses or other conditions require
glazing work when temperature is below 40 degrees F. (or below the
minimum temperature recommended by the manufacturer), consult the
manufacturer and establish the minimum provisions required to ensure
satisfactory work.
5 Clean glazing connectors receiving glazing materials of deleterious
substances which might impair the work. Remove protective coatings which
might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealants. Comply with
manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately before
application of primer and glazing sealants. Wipe metal surfaces with xylol or
toluol.
6 Inspect each unit of glass immediately before installation. Glass which has
significant impact damage at edges, scratches or abrasion of faces, or any
other evidence of damage shall not be installed.
7 Sealants: Prime surfaces to receive glazing sealants where required, in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using recommended
primers.
8 Locate setting blocks, if required by the drawings, at the quarter points of sill
but no closer than 6 inches to corners of glass. Use blocks of proper sizes to
support the glass in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
9 Provide spacers to separate glass from spring plates.
10 Set glass in a manner which produces greatest possible degree of uniformity
in appearance. Face all glass which has dissimilar faces with matching faces
in the same direction.
11 Use masking tape or other suitable protection to limit coverage of glazing
materials to the surfaces intended for sealants.
12 Tool exposed surfaces of glazing materials.
13 Clean excess sealant from glass and support members immediately after
application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.
16.3.4 Curing, Protection and Cleaning
1 Cure sealants in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to attain
maximum durability and adhesion to glass.
2 Clean all surfaces after installation leaving all in a clean and workmanlike
manner.
3 Final cleaning and protection after installation is the responsibility of others.
PART 17 SIGNAGE
17.1 GENERAL
17.1.1 Scope
1 This Section includes the following specification of signage works. It
describes the requirements for furnishing and installing the following types of
signs:
(a) Accessibility entrance signs.
(b) Toilet room entry signage.
2 Related Sections and Parts are as follows:
This Section
Part 1 General
Section 16 Structural Metalwork
Section 26 Painting and Decorating
17.1.2 Submittals
2 Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.
(a) Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to
be provided by others and accessories.
(b) Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements including tactile
characters and Braille and layout for each sign.
3 Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full
range of color, texture and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:
(a) Aluminum: For each form, finish and color on squares of sheet at
least 100 by 100 mm.
(b) Acrylic Sheet: 200 by 250 mm for each color required.
(c) Panel Signs: Not less than 305 mm square including border.
(d) Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit.
4 Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
5 Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
6 Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
7 Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1 Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by
manufacturer.
2 Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-
fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose
products have a record of successful in-service performance.
3 Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one
source from a single manufacturer.
4 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1 Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations
to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty
requirements.
17.1.5 Warranty
1 Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
(a) Failures include but are not limited to the following:
(i) Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal
weathering.
(ii) Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign
lamination.
(b) Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
17.2 PRODUCTS
17.2.1 Materials
1 Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish
indicated and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-
H32.
2 Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish
indicated and with at least the strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-
T5.
3 Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV
absorbing).
4 Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 0.076
mm with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for exterior
applications.
17.2.2 Panel Sign
1 Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to
remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5
mm measured diagonally from corner to corner complying with the following
requirements:
(a) Painted Acrylic Sheet: 8 mm thick.
(b) ICC/ANSI A117.1 require tactile and Braille characters to be raised a
minimum of 0.8 mm from face of sign.
(c) Laminated, Etched Photopolymer: Raised graphics with Braille 0.8
mm above surface with contrasting colors in finishes and color
combinations indicated and laminated to acrylic back.
(d) Laminated, Sandblasted Polymer: Raised graphics with Braille 0.8
mm above surface with contrasting colors in finishes and color
combinations indicated and laminated to acrylic back.
(e) Edge Condition: Square cut.
(f) Corner Condition: Rounded to radius indicated.
(g) Mounting: Unframed.
(i) Wall mounted with concealed anchors.
(ii) Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.
(h) Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system.
(i) Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 0.8 mm
above surface with contrasting colors.
2 Exterior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to
remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5
mm measured diagonally from corner to corner complying with the following
requirements:
(a) Aluminum Sheet: 2.03 mm thick.
(b) Edge Condition: Square cut.
(c) Corner Condition: Rounded.
(d) Mounting: Unframed.
(i) Wall mounted.
(ii) Manufacturer's standard non-corroding anchors for substrates
encountered.
(e) Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system.
3 Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text
and symbols complying with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied
by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut
edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded
shape.
(a) Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet /Photopolymer/ Clear acrylic
sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied.
(b) Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 0.8 mm.
4 Applied Vinyl: Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 0.076
mm with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing.
5 Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide
colored coatings, including inks, dyes and paints that are recommended by
acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV
and water resistant for five years for application intended.
(a) Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system.
17.2.3 Accessories
1 Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors
and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion
resistance.
17.2.4 Fabrication
1 General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.
(a) Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they
will be inconspicuous.
17.2.5 Finishes, General
1 Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2 Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable temporary protective covering before shipping.
3 Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or
adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of
approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if
they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
17.2.6 Aluminum Finishes
1 Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with
inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate
conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked
enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating and painting.
(a) Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel
primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.04 mm medium gloss.
2 Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating
0.018 mm or thicker over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish
complying with AAMA 611.
(a) Use on aluminum bar.
17.3 SIGNAGE
17.3.1 Signage Details
1 Entrance Signs: All entrances shall be identified with at least one standard
accessibility symbol sign and with additional directional signs as required, to
be visible to persons along approaching pedestrian ways and driveways.
2 Toilet Entry Signage: Provide clear matte acrylic plastic with symbols. Colors
as selected by the ENGINEER.
17.3.2 Shapes and Colours
1 Prohibition signs shall be circular or as shown on drawings with the symbol in
black on a white background together with a circular band in red with an
oblique crossbar in red.
2 Mandatory signs shall be circular or as shown on drawings with the wording in
white on a blue background.
3 Informational signs shall be of appropriate colours for the application.
17.4 EXECUTION
17.4.1 Examination
1 Examine substrates, areas and conditions with Installer present for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
2 Verify that items including anchor inserts are sized and located to
accommodate signs.
3 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
17.4.2 Installation
1 Locate signs and accessories where indicated using mounting methods of
types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
(a) Install signs level, plumb and at heights indicated with sign surfaces
free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
(b) Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls where shown on drawings.
Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without
encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.
2 Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions
except where more stringent requirements apply.
(a) Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners.
Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure
attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign
manufacturer.
17.4.3 Cleaning and Protection
1 After installation clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
SECTION 27: EXTERNAL WORKS
PART 2 BLOCK PAVED AREAS

2.1.2 References
Add the following at the end of paragraph 1:
BS 5931:1980 Code of practice for machine laid in situ edge details for
paved areas.
BS 7533-1:2001 Pavement constructed with clay, natural stone or concrete
pavers. Guide for the structural design of heavy duty
pavements constructed of clay pavers or precast concrete
paving blocks.
pavers. Guide for the structural design of lightly trafficked
pavements constructed of clay pavers or precast concrete
paving blocks.
pavers. Code of practice for laying precast concrete paving
blocks and clay pavers for flexible pavements.
pavers. Code of practice for the construction of pavements
of precast concrete flags or natural stone slabs.
pavers. Code of practice for laying natural stone, precast
concrete paving blocks and clay pavers for flexible
pavements.
pavers. Code of practice for the construction of pavements
of natural stone setts and cobbles.
pavers. Guide for the structural design of lightly trafficked
pavements of precast concrete flags and natural stone
flags.
pavers. Guide for the structural design of trafficked
pavements constructed of natural stone setts.
pavers. Code of practice of opening, maintenance and
reinstatement of pavements of concrete, clay and natural
stone.
pavers. Guide to the design of trafficked pavement
constructed on a bound base using concrete paving flags
and natural stone slabs.
BS 7932:2003. Determination of the unpolished and polished pendulum
test value of surfacing units.
BS EN 771-1:2003 Specification for masonry units. Clay Masonry units.
BS EN 772-3:1998 Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of net
volume and % of voids of clay masonry units by hydrolic
weighing.
BS EN 772-7:1998 Methods of test for masonry units. Determination of water
absorption of clay masonry DPC units in boiling water.
BS EN 1338:2003 Concrete paving blocks. Requirements and test methods.
BS EN 1339:2003 Concrete paving flags. Requirements and test methods.
BS EN 1340:2003 Concrete kerb units. Requirements and test methods.
BS EN 1342:2001 Setts of natural stone for external paving. Reqts and test
methods.
BS EN 1343:2001 Kerbs of natural stone for external paving. Requirements
and test methods.
BS EN 1467:2003 Natural stone. Rough blocks requirements.
BS EN 1468:2003 Natural stone. Rough slabs requirements.
BS EN 13373:2003 Natural stone test methods. Determination of geometric
characteristics on units.
BS EN 14066:2003 Natural stone test methods. Determination of resistance to
ageing by thermal shock.
Add following new Parts after Part 2.1.5:
2.1.6 Definitions
1 For the purpose of this Specification the definitions given by the British
Standards, as appropriate, shall apply.
2 Where materials used in this section (e.g. concrete and reinforcement) have
been specified elsewhere in this specification document, the relevant clauses
shall apply to this section.
3 The apparent silence of the Specification, Drawings or other Contract
Documents as to any or the omission from them of a detailed description
concerning any point, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best
general practice is to be used.
4 Materials that have not been individually specified, shall as a minimum
standard, be in accordance with the relevant British standard where
applicable.
2.1.7 Submittals
1 The Contractor shall produce large scale shop drawings reflecting fabrication
and installation of all kerb and paving work to include plans and details
showing exact size, shape, profile, curvature, jointing, finish and installation
method and submit to the Engineer for comments.
2 Requirements, size and frequency of control joints are to be established by
the paving supplier and submitted as part of shop drawing submittals for
review by the Engineer.
3 The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's product data, installation
instructions, use limitations and recommendations. Provide certifications
stating that materials comply with requirements.
4 The Contractor shall submit representative samples of each element that is to
be used in the finished work, showing the full range of colour and finish
variations expected. Provide at least four unmounted units to locations
agreed with the Engineer for comment.
5 Provide wrapped, packaged and labelled extra material consisting of three (3)
pieces of each type, size and configuration of kerb and paving materials used
on the project. Deliver to the location designated by the Engineer.
6 The samples provided must also meet the technical aspects of the
specification.
1 The Contractor shall employ, at his own expense, a qualified independent
testing laboratory to conduct tests and submit reports for kerb and paving
materials.
2 The Installer shall be trained and licensed by the supplier or manufacturer in
the use the materials and equipment to be used in the work
3 All materials shall be the product of one supplier as specified and shall
comply with the relevant Standards.
2 Deliver, store and handle all materials in strict compliance with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Store above ground and
protect from damage and soiling.
2.1.10 Project / Site Conditions
1 Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are
within the limits established by International Masonry All-Weather Council
Guide Specification and the mortar admixture manufacturer.
2 The works are to be set out from primary datum levels and setting out points
indicated on the drawings or from information provided by the Engineer.
3 The Contractor shall submit his proposals, for setting out and controlling the
alignment of the Works, to the Engineer and obtain his approval prior to the
start of construction. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer details of
the value and location of all temporary benchmarks and reference points he
establishes.
4 Should the Contractor dispute the original ground levels shown on the
Drawings he shall agree these with the Engineer before disturbing the original
ground.
5 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring all horizontal site
dimensions and levels are taken and recorded on shop drawings before
starting fabrication of any ‘special’ stone material.
6 Particular care is to be taken to avoid damage to any underground services
during the progress of the works. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
damage caused to building works, supplies or services and shall fully
indemnify. The owner of the services, or his representatives shall decide the
method of execution of repairs.
2.1.11 Maintenance
1 Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices, and procedures
to be followed in operating and maintaining the work. This will include current
manufacturer’s brochures and spare parts (materials) lists describing the
actual materials used in the work, including stone, paving materials, sealants
and other major components. The Contractor will also assemble manuals for
component parts into single binders and CD’s for each system.
Delete entire Part 2.5 and replace with the following:
2.5 GRANITE PAVING BLOCKS
1 Products shall be natural stone selected for consistency of appearance and
colour, free from drill holes, chisel and other tooling marks. All finishing edges
to be chamfered to Engineer’s approval.
2 Granite sett paving within vehicular areas shall be 80 millimetres thick.
3 Granite paving within pedestrian areas shall be 50mm thick
4 Granite kerbs shall be 200mm thick.
5 Provenance, colour, sizes and finish: Products for use in the works shall be
as described on the drawings and as listed below:
2.5.1 Granite Tests
1 Historic test data shall be provided upon request. The Contractor shall hire
and pay an independent testing laboratory to perform tests that will be typical
of the granite specified for the project.
2 All structural granite supplied shall meet or exceed the standard ASTM
specifications.
Test Description English Metric

ASTM C 97 Absorption by weight 0.40% max.
ASTM C 97 Density, Min: 160 lbs/cu Ft. 2,560 kg/m³
ASTM C 99 Modulus of Rupture, Min: 1,500 psi 10.34 Mpa
ASTM C 170 Compressive Strength, Min: 19,000 psi 131 Mpa
ASTM C 241 Abrasion Resistance, Min: Ha=25.0
ASTM C 880 Flexural Strength, Min: 1,200 psi 8.27 Mpa
(a) The physical characteristics listed above represent strengths and

abrasion resistance of granites tested dry on their strongest plane and
have been historically used for building and structural use.
Depending on the specific installation, there are many ways to test for
the physical characteristics of granite including wet samples, dry
samples and applying loads both perpendicular and parallel to the
strongest plane. See ASTM 615, Standard Specifications for
Dimension Granite.
(b) Granite with strength or abrasion resistance less than the minimum
values listed above may be used provided that competent engineering
testing authority has evaluated relevant characteristics of the granite.
This evaluation shall consider both structural effects and material
characteristics such as durability, permanent volume change,
modulus of elasticity, thermal expansion and the like.
(c) There is currently no test method recognised by ASTM for evaluation
of the durability or performance over life cycle of natural stone
product. Existing installations of the granite proposed by the
Contractor shall be used as a measure of the material’s ability to
withstand the effects of environmental elements. The condition of the
product after many years in actual service is a far more reliable
indication of its ability to perform than an accelerated laboratory test.
2.5.2 Surface Finish
1 Surface Finish shall be within the range of samples non-objected by the
Engineer. The surfaces and joints shall straight and true in all directions.
2.5.3 Facing Thickness
1 Granite shall be to the thickness as shown on Contract Drawings.
2.5.4 Packing and Loading
1 Finished granite shall be carefully palletised, loaded and delivered to the site,
in a manner to prevent damage and to prevent possible delays due to
replacement of pieces.
2 No material known to stain or discolour will be used for blocking or packing.
3 Granite shall be delivered promptly and in proper sequence for setting.
2.5.5 Site Storage
1 The granite shall be stacked on timber or platforms at a minimum of 3” above
ground upon receipt at the building site or storage yard.
2 Care should be taken to prevent staining during storage. If the granite will be
stored for a lengthy period, then polyethylene or other suitable plastic should
be placed between anything facing the granites finished surfaces as well as
used as an overall protective covering.
2.5.6 Mortar bedding
1 Granite to be bedded on mortar bed as shown on the contract drawings,
mortar mixes to manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.5.7 Grout Materials
1 Provide pigment free colour fast epoxy grout.
2.5.8 Mortar / Grout Materials for granite paving

1 Portland Cement: Provide ASTM C -150 Portland Cement, Type I or II, of
natural colour or white as needed to produce colour selected. All mortar to be
sulphate resistant.
2 Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
3 Aggregates: ASTM C 144 and as indicated below:
(a) For joints narrower than 6mm use aggregate graded with 100 %
passing the No. 8 sieve and 95 % the 16 sieve.
(b) For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 % passing the
No. 16 sieve.
4 Coloured Mortar / Grout Pigments - Natural and synthetic oxides and
chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments
with record of satisfactory performance in stone mortars. Colour shall be
selected from the full range of manufacturer's standard colours and shall be
to Engineers approval.
5 Water - Clean, non-alkaline, potable. Do not use water in latex modified grout
or mortar mixes.
6 Mortar Materials - Provide latex modified Portland cement thick-bed mortar to
comply with directions of latex additive manufacturer and as necessary to
produce stiff mixture with a moist surface at time stone is set.
7 Grout Materials: Provide pigment free colour fast epoxy grout.
2.6 INSTALLATION OF PAVING BLOCKS
Add the following new Parts after Part 2.6.1:
2.6.2 Examination
A. Verification of conditions.
1 Examine areas to receive the work and the conditions under which the work
would be performed.
2 Identify conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work.
3 Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Base surfaces:
1 Examine surfaces to receive paving materials specified under this section,
and conditions under which they will be installed, with installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the work.
2 Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3 The installer shall be fully responsible for accepting the condition of such
surfaces prior to initiation of work.
4 Ensure that surfaces to receive paving materials are firm, dry, clean, and free
of oily or greasy films, mortar, soil, and other foreign substances.
2.6.3 Preparation
A. Pavement construction – Sand Bedding
1) The sub grade shall be prepared in accordance with this specification and
SECTION 6 – Part 3 – Earthworks.
2) The laying course shall consist of sharp sand to BS EN 12620:2002+A1:2008
with a particle size of 4 mm containing not more than 3% silt and/or clay by
weight. The sand shall be obtained from a single source, allowed to drain
before use, and shall be covered with suitable sheeting to minimise moisture
changes. Permissible sulphate and chloride contents shall not exceed 0.4%
and 0.06% respectively (expressed only as SO3 and C1 by weight).
3) During laying the sand (or laying course) shall be carefully screeded to a
smooth surface to receive paving units. No compaction of the sand layer and
no traffic, including pedestrian is to be permitted before the paving units are
laid. The laying course shall be laid to a thickness of 50mm (unless otherwise
specified) plus a surcharge necessary to provide the specified final bed
thickness after vibration of the installed unit paving.
4) The profile of the laying course shall be similar to that of the finished surface.
The maximum deviation from the design levels shall be in accordance with
the Code of Practice. The edge restraints to the paved area shall be laid in
advance of the laying course and all obstacles within the area, such as
manhole covers, shall be constructed to the correct finished levels.
B. Pavement Construction – Mortar bedding
The sub grade shall be prepared in accordance with this specification and SECTION
6 – Part 3 – Earthworks. Concrete Sub-base shall be as shown on the drawings.
1) Prepare setting bed over bases. Mix and prepare mortar in compliance with
mortar/ grout manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Compact
setting bed and screed to proper depth so that tops of paving will be level
with grades and as indicated on the drawings.
2) Saturate concrete sub-base with clean water several hours before placing
setting bed. Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting
bed.
3) Spread and screed setting bed to a uniform thickness at sub-base elevations
required for accurate setting of stone paving to finish grades indicated. Mix
and place only that amount that can be covered with stone prior to initial set.
Cut back, level edge, and remove and discard mortar that has reached initial
set prior to placing stone
2.6.4 Installation
A. Concrete paving units on sand laying course
1 The concrete paving slabs/setts shall be laid on the sand laying course in
such a manner as not to disturb the blocks already laid.
2 Each block/slab shall be placed firmly against its neighbour so that they fit
closely together.
3 The joints between slabs/setts shall not exceed 3mm.
B. Granite paving units on sand laying course
1 Apply a uniform coat of the proprietary stone sealant to the back and side
joints of stone with a flat brush prior to placing stones, in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The sealant shall be dry at the time the paving
units are laid.
2 The granite paving slabs/setts shall be laid on the sand laying course in such
a manner as not to disturb the blocks already laid.
3 Each block/slab shall be placed firmly against its neighbour so that they fit
closely together.
4 The joints between slabs/setts shall not exceed 3mm.
C. On mortar bed
1 Strictly comply with suppliers and manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, except where more restrictive requirements are specified
in this section.
2 Apply a uniform coat of the proprietary stone sealant to the back and side
joints of stone with a flat brush prior to placing stones, in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The sealant shall be dry at the time the paving
units are laid.
3 Wet stones thoroughly before setting.
4 Set stone slabs/setts in patterns non-objected by Engineer. Lay
symmetrically about centrelines.
5 Provide no larger joints between units than the dimensions on the contract
Drawings.
6 Set stone paving before initial set of mortar bed occurs. Do not set paving on
a completely dry bed.
7 Apply uniform 1.6mm thick slurry bond coat to back of stone with a flat brush
just prior to placing stones on semi-dry or wet setting bed.
8 Pound paving into place with heavy rubber mallet to obtain full contact and
adhesion with setting bed. Do not disturb paving after setting.
D. Un-sanded grout for joints in polished granite surfaces
1 Mix, install and cure un-sanded Portland cement grout in strict compliance
with mortar/grout admixture manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
2 Colouring agent to be added to the grout to the approval of the Engineer.
3 Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout
into joints, taking care to clean grout before it sets from adjoining exposed
stone surfaces.
4 After grout initially sets, tool the grouted joints slightly concave or as
described on the contract drawings.
5 Cure grout by maintaining in damp condition for 7 days except as otherwise
indicated by latex additive manufacturer.
6 Pointing shall be recessed unless otherwise specified.
E. Sanded grout for joints in unpolished granite surfaces
1 Mix, install and cure sanded Portland cement grout in strict compliance with
mortar/grout admixture manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
2 Colouring agent to be added to the grout to the approval of the Engineer.
3 Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout
into joints, taking care to clean smeared grout from adjoining exposed stone
surfaces.
4 After grout initially sets tool joints slightly concave or as described on the
Contract drawings.
5 Cure grout by maintaining in damp condition for 7 days except as otherwise
indicated by latex additive manufacturer.
6 Pointing shall be recessed unless otherwise specified.
F. Expansion and control joints
1 Provide non-objected sealant filled joints where stone abuts a restraining
surface such as walls, columns, planters, and dissimilar walking surfaces, to
the Engineers approval.
2.6.5 Application
2.6.5.1 Installation
1 Where slabs/setts do not fit at the edge, restraints or other obstructions such
as manholes or up stands the gaps shall be filled using cut blocks/slabs.
2 Slabs/setts shall only be cut using a diamond bladed rotary saw, no guillotine
cutters shall be used on the site.
3 Any damaged or broken slabs/setts shall not be laid. Any paving damaged
during compaction shall be replaced at the discretion of the Engineer.
4 Due allowance shall be made in the final levels of the base for the
compaction of the laying course above, which occurs when paving is being
vibrated.
5 The amount of surcharge required for the laying course shall be determined
by site trials prior to the commencement of the actual surfacing and shall be
repeated when the laying or bedding materials specification is amended due
to a change of weather conditions.
2.6.6 Construction
A. Compaction of concrete and stone paving on a sand laying course
1 After each 20 sq m or such area that has been agreed with the Engineer, has
been laid the paving units shall be compacted to the required levels using a
plate vibrator with a rubber underside.
2 The plate vibrator shall have a plate area of 0.20 to 0.35m² and have a
compaction force of 12-24 kN and a frequency of approximately 75-100Hz.
3 A minimum of two passes of the plate vibrator shall be made in each
direction, i.e. at 90 degrees to each other. Vibration shall continue until no
further compaction of the sand layer is apparent. Fine dry sand with particle
size of 0.3 mm shall then be brushed over the paving, and further passes of
the plate vibrator made in each direction, until the sand is no longer absorbed
into the joints.
4 The plate vibrator shall not pass closer than 1m to a temporarily unrestrained
edge during laying.
5 No paving shall be left uncompacted overnight except for the one metre strip
at the temporarily uncompacted edge, which shall be covered and protected
from rain.
A. Accuracy
1 On completion, the finished surface level shall be within 5mm of the design
level and the maximum deviation within the compacted surface, measured by
a 3m straight edge, shall not exceed 5mm. The level of any two adjacent
blocks/slabs shall not differ by more than 2mm. Any areas of paving which do
not comply with these tolerances shall be removed the sand laying course
lifted and re-laid and the paving blocks/slabs re-laid to the correct levels.
2 Dimensional accuracy, uniformity of joint gaps, alignment and squareness
shall be checked after paving the first three rows of blocks/slabs and
thereafter at regular intervals. If joints begin to open the blocks/slabs shall be
knocked together using a hide mallet.
B. Tolerances:
1 Maintain an allowable installed tolerance of +3 mm in 3 m. No ponding of
water will be permitted.
2 Stone edge to edge alignment: + 0.8mm at any location.
3 Face width of joints: + 0.6 mm at any location.
2.6.8 Cleaning
A. Repairing and cleaning
1 Remove and replace loose, chipped, broken or damaged paving or surfacing.
2 Clean exposed surfaces using materials and methods recommended by the
paving supplier. (The Contractor is required to provide a method statement
on cleaning of joints, to be submitted for approval prior to commencement of
paving works).
3 Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned.
4 Upon completion of the work, remove unused materials, debris, containers
and equipment from the project site.
2.6.9 Protection
A. Protection of paving
1 Prohibit traffic on paving during setting or within 24 hours after initial grouting
of joints.
2 The Contractor shall adequately protect all surfaces to the satisfaction of the
Engineer until Substantial Completion of the whole of the Works.
B. Sealer
1 Paving surface shall be treated with two coats of premium, no-sheen, natural
look, water based penetrating sealer/ impregnator, applied in accordance with
the manufacturers printed instructions.
Add new Part 2.9:
2.9 PRODUCTS
2.9.1 Natural Stone Materials
A. Gravelled surfaces – Gravel Edge
1 Type: Local crushed Gravel
2 Colour: as indicated
3 Finish: Crushed
4 Size(s): 25mm - 40mm sieve size
5 Construction: Loose laid to finished depth as indicated over geo textile onto
compacted formation layer, all to Engineer’s details and specifications.
6 Special Requirements: Gravel should be evenly mixed so no one size
dominates.
2.9.2 Precast Concrete Materials
A. Tactile Paving
1 Type: Pressed Precast Concrete units; blistered
2 Finish: sandblasted
3 Colour: S 20 (from Transgulf)
4 Size(s): 60mm thick, 300 x 300mm
5 Construction: laid to pattern as indicated, 3mm max wide joints filled with joint
filling sand and bedded on 25mm thick full mortar bed on concrete base and
compacted sub-base to Engineer's details/approval.
6 Special Requirements: Shall confirm to concerned authority regulations and
requirements.
B. Maintenance Edge Type 1
1 Type: Pressed Precast Concrete units
3 Colour: Tan (S 140 from Transgulf)
5 Construction: laid to pattern as indicated, 3mm max wide joints with colour
matched grout, bedded on 25mm thick full mortar bed to Engineer’s details
and approval.
C. Maintenance Edge Type 2
3 Colour: Tan ( S 140 from Transgulf)
5 Construction: laid to pattern as indicated, 3mm max wide joints with colour
matched grout, bedded on 25mm thick full mortar bed to Engineer’s details
and approval.
D. Paving - Pedestrian / Cycle Path Type 1, 2, 3
3 Colour:
(a) Paver: 50% (S 90 from Transgulf) + 50% (S 140 from Transgulf)
(i) Size(s): 60mm thick, 250 x 250mm
(ii) Construction: laid to pattern as indicated, butt jointed, with all
joints filled with joint filling sand and bedded on 50mm thick
compacted sharp sand bed to Engineer’s details and approval.
(b) Paving Band: Light Tan (S 90 from Transgulf)
(ii) Construction: laid to pattern as indicated, 3mm max wide joints
with colour matched grout, bedded on 25mm thick full mortar
bed to Engineer’s details and approval.
(c) Paver: Light Tan (S 90 from Transgulf)
E. Paving - Pedestrian / Cycle Path Type 4
3 Colour:
(a) Paving Band: Light Tan (S 90 from Transgulf)
(b) Paver: 50% (S 90 from Transgulf) + 50% (S 140 from Transgulf)
F. Paving – Feature Paving Type 1
3 Colour:
(a) Paving Band: Light Tan (S 90 from Trans gulf)
(b) Paver: 50% (S 06 from Trans gulf) + 25% (S 90 from Trans gulf) +
25% (S 140 from Trans gulf)
(c) Paver: Tan (S 140 from Trans gulf)
G. Paving – Feature Paving Type 2
3 Colour: colour as indicated
(a) Paving Band:
(b) Paver:
H. Block Wall – Feature Wall
1 Type: Pressed Precast Concrete units forming free standing wall
3 Colour: Light Grey (S06, Transgulf)
4 Size(s): as indicated
5 Construction: Block work laid using mortar over one another in the pattern as
indicated, over concrete foundation, all to Engineer’s details and approval
and following standards:
(a) BS 6073 (part 1 & 2), BS 4551, BS 4721, BS 12, BS 890, BS 882.
6 Special requirements: block wall shall be finished with Signage lettering to
signage specialist’s details and accent strip to Engineer’s approval.
I. Up stand Kerb
1 To Engineer’s details and specifications.
J. Flush Kerb
1 To Engineer’s details and specifications.
2.9.3 Other Materials
A. Asphalt Paving- Pedestrian / Cycle Path Type 1, 2, 3
1 30mm thick black asphalt wearing course on compacted aggregate road base
to specialist’s details and specifications. Shall be provided with Road marker
with white coloured reflective surface paint, all to specialist’s details and
specifications.
B. Items which belong to structure package
1 RC Barrier with Cast in Decorative Pattern
2 Precast Concrete Decorative concrete panels / units
3 RC Column with Cast in Decorative Pattern
4 Special requirements: Finishes, out of following as indicated:
(a) Acrylic coatings:
(i) Primer : Silane – siloxane hydrophobic primer
(ii) Top coat: two coats of aliphatic Acrylic coating - high
performance elastomeric, breathable crack bridging system
(withstand crack bridging up to 2mm, cyclic movement up to
1mm). RAL 1013, Oyster White, unless otherwise indicated in
the drawings.
(b) Alternative finishes: Ceramic tiles, as selected
(c) Decorative pattern to be shown for the panels and any additional add-
ons such as coloured discs etc shall be as indicated in the drawings.
2.9.4 Sundry Materials
A. Movement joint filler and sealant
1 Type: Flexible joint filler/sealant
2 Finish: Smooth as per manufacturer recommendations and best practices
3 Size(s): Joint to be nominal 10mm width and of sufficient depth take
polysulphide sealant (nominal 10mm)
4 Filler: Closed cell polyethylene joint filler Fosroc Expancell, or equal and non-
objected.
5 Sealant: Gun grade polysulphide sealant, Fostroc Thioflex 600, colour Grey
as standard, or equal and non-objected. Filling and sealing to be carried out
in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and best practices.
6 Special Requirements: Special paving units 50mm thick x 400 x 400mm are
required to be factory water jet cut to take Architectural lighting units
(approximate diameter 240mm)
B. Paving Sealer: shall be applied to all types of natural stone
1 Non-sheen, colourless, slip and stain resistant sealer, acrylic/ silicone resin,
with pH factor 7 - 10 that does not affect colour or physical properties of
paver surface.
(a) Sealer (stain-blocker type, high performance acrylic emulsion bonding
aid and sealer), X-Shield BondSeal (X-Calibur) or non-objected equal,
shall be applied prior to laying on undersides and sides of natural
stone. The sealer shall not affect the adhesion of the mortar with the
stone in any way.
(b) Sealer (oil block, water penetrating reactive silicone resin integral
coating) X-Shield StoneSeal (X-Calibur) or non-objected equal, shall
be applied after laying, finishing and cleaning of stone.
C. Mortar Materials
1 Thick-set mortar: Laticrete 3701 Fortified Mortar or equal and non-objected
2 Adhesive coat / Bond Coat/ Thin Set Mortar / Wet area tiles: Laticrete 254
Platinum or equal and non-objected
3 Grouting mortars: stainless pigment free colour fast epoxy grout. Shall be
Latapoxy SP-100, or equal and non-objected
4 Thick bed mortar reinforcing mesh: to Engineer’s approval.
PART 5 SITE FURNISHINGS

Add the following new Parts after Part 5.1.2:
5.1.3 Definitions
A. For the purpose of this Specification the definitions given by the British
B. Related work
1 Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements, which
affect the work of this section.
C. Silence of Specification
applicable.
5.1.4 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings
and installation of all site furnishing work to include plans and details showing
exact size, shape, profile, curvature, jointing, finish and installation method
and submit to the Engineer for comments.
B. Product Data
1 Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations
and recommendations. Provide certifications stating that materials comply
with requirements.
C. Samples
1 Submit representative samples of each element that is to be used in the
finished work, showing the full range of colour and finish variations expected.
Provide at least four (4) unmounted units to locations agreed with the
Engineer for comment.
2 Provide wrapped, packaged and labelled extra material consisting of three (3)
pieces of each type, size and configuration of materials used on the project.
Deliver to the location designated by the Engineer.
specification.
4 Any materials which do not comply with the specification, are not non-
objected or are not to the satisfaction of the Engineer may be rejected and
the Contractor shall replace them at his own cost, with acceptable items.
D. Closeout Submittals
1 The Contractor shall maintain one set of Contract Drawings for the sole
purpose of recording “As-Built” conditions of the site furnishing works as a
whole. All changes, previously non-objected, and all completed work shall be
recorded on these drawings.
2 The As-Built drawings shall be supplied to the Engineer for approval prior to
the issue of the Completion Certificate.
3 On approval of the as-built drawings the Contractor shall forward the
following for the Engineers retention:
(a) Three complete sets of As-Built drawings properly folded and
provided in the plastic folders as part of the Operations and
Maintenance Manuals.
(b) One re-writable CD of the drawings properly labelled and titled.
A. Contractors testing laboratory
testing laboratory to conduct tests and submit reports for materials.
B. Qualified Installer
C. Mock-ups
1 Before beginning primary work of this section, provide mock-ups of
representative installations at locations acceptable to Engineer and obtain
Engineer's approval.
2 Protect and maintain acceptable mock-ups throughout the work of this
section to serve as criteria for acceptance of this work.
3 Mock ups are to be constructed as standalone project samples and should
not be included as part of the finished work.
4 Mock-ups shall incorporate details of specified items as required.
D. Source
comply with the relevant British Standards.
2 Contractor to submit for Engineers review and comments, information on the
supplier of all materials furnishing used on the project.
5.1.6 Delivery, Storage And Handling
A. Delivery
A. Weather
within the limits established by International Masonry All-Weather Council
Guide Specification and the mortar admixture manufacturer.
B. Levels, ref. points and setting out
indicated on the drawings or from information provided by the Engineer.
alignment of the Works, to the Engineer and obtain his approval prior to the
start of construction. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer details of
establishes.
Drawings he shall agree these with the Engineer before disturbing the original
ground.
C. Substrates
1 Proceed with work only when substrate construction work is complete.
D. Site Investigation/Dimensions
starting fabrication of site furnishings.
5.1.8 Maintenance
A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for employer’s
documentation.
to be followed in operating and maintaining the work.
2 Include current manufacturer’s brochures and spare parts lists describing the
actual materials used in the work, including all major components.
3 Assemble manuals for component parts into single binders and CD’s for each
system.
Add the following after Part 5.2.1:
5.2.2 Furnishings
A. General
1 Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes.
2 Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes.
3 Wood: Surfaced smooth on four sides with eased edges; kiln dried, free of
knots, solid stock.
4 Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Stainless steel, Galvanised
steel, corrosion-resistant-coated or noncorrodible materials; commercial
quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant, concealed, recessed, and
capped or plugged.
5 Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107;
recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
6 Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory- packaged, non-shrink, non-
staining, hydraulic- controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with
potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and
grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing
protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.
B. Galvanising
1 Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a
minimum of 0.27 kg/sq. m of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion
coating, and a clear, polymer film. Internal, same as external or consisting of
81 percent zinc pigmented coating, not less than 0.0076 mm thick.
2 Hot-Dip Galvanising: According to ASTM A 123/ A 123M, ASTM A 153/
A 153M, or ASTM A 924/ A 924M.
C. Identity Marker with top Lantern
1 Type: Custom made Decorative Pillars with following components, in
indicated design and finishes:
(a) concrete foundation.
(b) Galvanised Steel structure.
(c) ACP (4mm thick) cladding (filled with silicone sealant and fixed to
structure as per structure package).
(d) stainless steel accessories.
(e) Topped with lantern as per lighting design.
(f) Base filled with local crushed stone (50-75mm dia). Loose laid to
specified depth over geotextile.
2 Colour / Finish/ Size(s): as indicated on the drawings
3 Construction: Shall be anchor-bolted to the concrete substrate below using
manufacturers standard stainless steel accessories, as per manufacturer’s
details and specifications and as non-objected by the Engineer.
4 Special requirements: Contractor to submit shop drawings and structure
calculations for Engineer’s approval.
D. Feature Pot
1 Type: GRC Planter pot in indicated design and profile; proprietary item,
matching design intent
2 Colour: Corten Finish
3 Finish: painted
4 Size(s): as indicated in the drawings
5 Construction: Planter pot, water proofed, placed at designated locations on
the site. Shall be lined with geotextile from inside and have bottom layer of
drainage gravel and sweet soil above.
6 Special requirements: Top layer of pebble mulch, loose laid over the top of
the soil, if indicated on the drawings (as per the details mentioned).
(a) Pots shall come with predrilled holes for irrigation piping (inlet and
outlet). In case the holes are drilled on the site, contractor shall be
responsible and liable to make good if any defect or breakage
happens during the drilling of holes.
E. Column light and Lantern
1 Contractor to propose based on indicated design. All fixing to manufacturers
details.
F. Bicycle Racks
1 Type: Custom made Steel (powder coated) Bicycle Racks with accent strips,
or as per Architect’s design intent. Matching stainless steel accessories.
2 Colour / Finish/ Size(s): as indicated on the Drawings
3 Construction: to be anchored to the concrete substrate below using
G. Bench
1 Type: Custom made precast light weight Concrete benches with formed steel
sheet seating and backrest, all with stainless steel accessories, or as per
landscape and public realm design intent.
3 Construction: shall be anchored to the concrete substrate below using
H. Seat
1 Type: Custom made precast light weight Concrete seats with stainless steel
accessories or as per the landscape and public realm design intent.
3 Construction: Either embedded in to the ground or shall be anchored to the
concrete substrate below using manufacturers standard stainless steel
accessories, as per manufacturer’s details and specifications and as non-
I. Litter Bin
1 Type: Custom made Litter bin made of powder coated steel and accent strips,
all in indicated design and finishes, stainless steel accessories, or as per the
landscape and public realm design intent.
2 Colour/ finish/ Size(s): as indicated on the Drawings
3 Construction: fixed on to concrete foundation or placed on the site at
designated locations, all as per suppliers recommended specifications and
best practices. Bin shall be provided with plastic liner.
J. Totem
1 Type: Custom made Decorative Pillars with concrete base, steel structure
and powder coated steel/ aluminium sheet cladding; in indicated design and
finishes; stainless steel accessories, or as per the Architect’s design intent.
3 Construction: Shall be anchored to the concrete substrate below using
K. Shade / Rest Stop
1 Type: Custom made shade structures with following components, in indicated
design and finishes:
(a) concrete walled structure
(b) steel canopy with powder coated steel members and safety glass
covering (toughened, laminated glass)
(c) perforated sheet panels
(d) Bench as specified above
(e) Stainless steel accessories.
3 Construction: as per manufacturer’s details and specifications and as non-
Delete entire Part 5.3 and replace with the following:
5.3 EXECUTION
5.3.1 Examination
A. Verification of conditions.
would be performed.
work.
5.3.2 Preparation
A. Post setting (as required)
1 Coordinate setting of any support posts in concrete footing if required. To be
set plumb or at correct angle and aligned and at the correct height and
spacing.
B. Pipe sleeves (as required)
1 Coordinate setting of any steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into
concrete for installing posts.
2 After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post
and sleeve with anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
5.3.3 Installation, Generally
A. Generally
1 Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
2 Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
A. Site Damage Repair / Replacement
1 Any damage to elements caused during handling and installation, or by
subsequent site operations, is to be rectified immediately. Obtain approval
from the Engineer before commencing extensive repairs or replacements.
2 Replace components with damage considered unacceptable for repair.
B. Maintenance
1 After removal of protective coverings, clean and maintain all surfaces at
regular intervals until Practical Completion.
2 All maintenance is to be in accordance with procedures detailed in the site
furnishings manufacturer’s technical literature and the guarantee.
3 At practical completion, maintenance details must be passed on to the
Engineer..
4 Maintenance records should be kept until the end of the Maintenance Period.
5.3.5 Cleaning
1 Remove and replace loose, broken or damaged site furnishings.
site furnishing manufacturer. (The Contractor is required to provide a method
statement of cleaning site furnishings, to be submitted for approval prior to
commencement of installation of site furnishings.)
5.3.6 Protection
A. Protection of site furnishings
1 All surfaces of site furnishings vulnerable to damage during handling and
installation, or by subsequent site operations, are to be fully protected
throughout the course of the works.
2 The Contractor shall, adequately protect all surfaces to the satisfaction of the
Engineer until Substantial Completion of the whole of the Works.
Add the following new Part 10:

PART 10 METAL FABRICATIONS
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 Summary
A. General
1 Provide architectural metalwork in accordance with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
10.1.2 References
A. Related British Standards and Other References
1 Latest editions of all relevant British Standards shall be used including those
inter alia listed with current amendments and additions.
2 Any differences between their requirements and this specification shall be
submitted to the Consultant for his ruling.
BS 1161:1977 Specification for aluminium alloy sections for
structural purposes.
BS 1449 Standard mill surface finishes.
BS 6180:1999 Barriers in and about buildings. Code of practice
BS EN 10088-3:2005 Stainless steels. Technical delivery conditions for
semi-finished products, bars, rods, wire, sections
and bright products of corrosion resisting steels for
general purposes.
BS EN ISO 1461:1999 Hot dipped galvanised coatings on fabricated iron
and steel articles – Specifications and test
methods.
10.1.3 Definitions
A. British Standards
4 For the purpose of this Specification the definitions given by the British
B. Related Work
1 Carefully examine all of the Contract Documents for requirements, which
affect the work of this section.
C. Silence of Specification
applicable.
10.1.4 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings
and installation of all metal fabrication work to include plans and details
showing exact size, shape, profile, curvature, jointing, finish and installation
method and submit to the Consultant for comments.
B. Product Data
1 Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations
and recommendations. Provide certifications stating that materials comply
with requirements.
C. Samples
1 Submit representative samples of each element that is to be used in the
finished work, showing the full range of colour and finish variations expected.
Provide at least four unmounted units to locations agreed with the consultant
for comment.
specification.
3 Any materials which do not comply with the specification, are not non-
objected or are not to the satisfaction of the Consultant may be rejected and
the Contractor shall replace them at his own cost, with acceptable items.
D. Closeout Submittals
1 The Contractor shall maintain one set of Contract Drawings for the sole
purpose of recording “As-Built” conditions of the installed metal fabrication
works as a whole. All changes, previously non-objected, and all completed
work shall be recorded on these drawings.
2 The As-Built drawings shall be supplied to the Engineer for approval prior to
the issue of the Completion Certificate.
3 On approval of the as-built drawings the Contractor shall forward the
following for the Engineer’s retention:
(a) Three complete sets of As-Built drawings properly folded and
provided in the plastic folders as part of the Operations and
Maintenance Manuals.
(b) One re-writable CD of the drawings properly labelled and titled.
A. Contractors testing laboratory
testing laboratory to conduct tests and submit reports for metal fabrication
materials.
B. Qualified Installer
C. Mock-ups
1 Before beginning primary work of this section, provide mock-ups of
representative installations at locations acceptable to Engineer and obtain the
2 Protect and maintain acceptable mock-ups throughout the work of this
section to serve as criteria for acceptance of this work.
3 Mock ups are to be constructed as standalone project samples and should
not be included as part of the finished work.
4 Mock-ups shall incorporate other Consultants details of specified items as
required.
D. Source
comply with the relevant British Standards.
2 Contractor to submit for Consultants review and comments, information on
the supplier of all materials furnishing used on the project.
A. Weather
within the limits established by the mortar admixture manufacturer relevant to
the work being carried out.
B. Levels, ref. points and setting out
indicated on the drawings or from information provided by the Consultant.
alignment of the Works, to the Consultant and obtain his approval prior to the
start of construction. The Contractor shall supply to the Consultant details of
establishes.
Drawings he shall agree these with the Consultant before disturbing the
original ground.
C. Substrates
1 Proceed with work only when substrate construction and work is complete.
D. Site Investigation/Dimensions
starting fabrication of the architectural metalwork.
E. Protection of Existing Services
1 Particular care is to be taken to avoid damage to any underground services
during the progress of the works. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
damage caused to building works, supplies or services and shall fully
indemnify. The owner of the services or his representatives shall decide the
method of execution of repairs.
10.1.8 Maintenance
A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for employer’s
documentation.
2 Include current manufacturer’s brochures and spare parts lists describing the
actual materials used in the work, including metal alloys, glass sealants and
other major components.
system.
10.2 PRODUCTS
10.2.1 Materials
A. Mowing Edge
1 Type: Aluminium Edging in indicated profile
2 Colour / Finish: natural colour brushed finish, unless otherwise indicated on
the drawings
3 Size(s): manufacturers standard sizes for indicated function and as indicated
4 Fixings: 10mm thick metal edging, embedded in to the ground, all to the
manufacturer's details and Engineer’s approval.
B. Recessed manhole / service covers, if applicable
1 The Contractor is to refer to the Drawings for manhole locations, details and
sizes. The required Loading Class ratings (heavy load) are to be determined
by the Engineer’s specification.
2 Chamber covers and fames to manholes shall be recessed, stainless steel
(316-L)/ ductile Iron covers to take the proposed adjacent finishes, set to suit
the finished levels and manufactured in accordance with BS EN 124:1994.
The contractor is required to submit full shop drawings, as well as standalone
samples of the cover and frame for acceptance prior to final orders being
placed.
3 Any necessary locking and lifting mechanisms should be accommodated
within corner sections with squared edge on internal side.
4 Paved finishes are to be cut to suit the depth of the cover and are to be
installed on 25mm full depth mortar in accordance with the Specification.
10.2.2 Accessories
A. Fixings and fastenings
1 Fastenings to be the appropriate British standard and unless specified
otherwise, to be of the same metal as component with matching coating or
finish.
10.2.3 Fabrication
A. General
1 Fabricate components carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with
design and performance requirements.
2 Do not permit contact between dissimilar metals in components which are to
be fixed where moisture may be present or occur.
3 Finished components to be rigid and free from distortion, cracks, burrs and
sharp arise.
B. Welding Generally
1 Thoroughly clean surfaces to be joined. Ensure accurate fit using clamps
and jigs where practicable. Use tack welds only for temporary attachment.
2 Make joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no
inclusions holes, porosity or cracks.
3 Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials which will be self-
finished and visible in complete work.
4 Remove all traces of flux residue, slag and weld spatter.
C. Fixings
1 Any exposed metal fixings to be in stainless steel 316 L unless otherwise
stated in the drawings.
10.2.4 Finishes
A. Stainless steel
1 All steel components to be 316 L stainless steel, Brushed finish unless stated
otherwise in the detail drawings.
2 Galvanised steel components to be PU coated, unless otherwise indicated on
the drawings.
10.3 EXECUTION
10.3.1 Examination
A. Verification of conditions
would be performed.
work.
B. Base surfaces
1 Examine surfaces to receive metal fabrication materials specified under this
section, and conditions under which they will be installed, with installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the work.
2 Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3 The installer shall be fully responsible for accepting the condition of such
surfaces prior to initiation of work.
4 Ensure that surfaces to receive metal fabrication materials are firm, dry,
clean, and free of oily or greasy films, mortar, soil, and other foreign
substances.
10.3.2 Preparation
A. Coordination
1 Coordinate post setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions for installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to
be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of
such items to project site.
10.3.3 Installation
A. Generally
1 Do not modify, cut, notch or make holes in structural members except as
shown on drawings or as non-objected.
2 Do not use stairs, walkways, balustrades etc., as temporary support or
strutting for other work.
B. Fastenings
1 Fastenings for materials and components forming part of external
construction to be of corrosion resistant material or have a corrosion resistant
finish.
C. Packing
1 Any packing used at fixing points to take up tolerances and prevent distortion
is to be non-compressible, rot proof, non-corrodible materials positioned
adjacent to fixing points.
2 Ensure that packing do not intrude into zones which are to be filled with
sealants.
D. Movement Joints
1 Movement joints, where necessary shall be of the sleeve type within the
horizontal rails with screw fixings through slotted holes.
E. Connections
1 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight joints, except as
necessary for expansion. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installations.
2 Set components accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured
from established lines and levels.
F. Fastening to In-Place Construction
1 Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing to in-
place construction.
A. Site Damage Repair / Replacement
1 Any damage to stainless steel elements caused during handling and
installation, or by subsequent site operations, is to be rectified immediately.
Obtain approval from the Engineer before commencing extensive repairs or
replacements.
2 Replace components with damage considered unacceptable for repair.
B. Maintenance
1 After removal of protective coverings, clean and maintain all stainless steel
surfaces at regular intervals until Practical Completion.
2 All maintenance is to be in accordance with procedures detailed in the
powder coating manufacturer’s technical literature and the guarantee.
3 At practical completion, maintenance details must be passed on to the
Engineer..
4 Maintenance records should be kept until the end of the Maintenance Period.
10.3.5 Cleaning
1 Remove and replace loose, broken or damaged metal fabrications.
metal fabrication manufacturer. (The Contractor is required to provide a
method statement of cleaning metal fabrications, to be submitted for approval
prior to commencement of installation of metal fabrications.)
10.3.6 Protection
A. Protection of metal fabrications
1 All stainless steel surfaces of components vulnerable to damage during
handling and installation, or by subsequent site operations, are to be fully
protected throughout the course of the works.
2 The Contractor shall include in his rates for Metal Fabrications, adequately
protecting all surfaces to the satisfaction of the Consultant until Substantial
Completion of the whole of the works.
B. Protective coatings
1 Shall be resistant to all weathers, removable from areas inaccessible after
installation and partially removable and replaceable for access to fixing points
during installation or subsequent site operations.
C. Protective Tapes
1 Any protective tapes used in direct contact with Stainless Steel are to be low
tack, self-adhesive type and light in colour. Their use in application to
stainless steel must be non-objected by the powder manufacturer. Apply and
remove in accordance with the tape manufacturer’s requirements and the
powder coating manufacturer’s recommendations.
SECTION 31: HIGHWAY STRUCTURES
SECTION 28: LANDSCAPING
PART 1 LANDSCAPE PLANTING

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
5 Qualified Installer
(a) Contractor shall engage an experienced installer who has completed
landscaping work similar in material, design, and similar scale, and with
a successful record of landscaping experience. The installer’s field
supervisor shall be experienced, and shall be present full time on the
project site during the implementation of the landscaping works.
6 Nursery
(a) The Contractor shall establish and maintain a suitable holding /
acclimatisation nursery of an appropriate size on or adjacent to the
site to the consultants approval, within the first month of the contract
period. It shall be protected from construction works, shaded from sun
and wind and shall be provided with an adequate supply of irrigation
water.
7 Pre-Installation Meetings
(a) Coordinate installation of planting materials during adequate planting
seasons for each type of plant material required. Special care to be
taken for all imported plant material, especially ornamental palms.
(b) The inspection and selection of palms, trees, and shrubs will be made
by the Consultant, who will tag the stock at their place of growth prior
to transplanting to the site nursery.
1.1.4 Submittals
10 Shop Drawings
(a) The Contractor shall produce large scale shop drawings of the
planting plans, details and Installation method and submit to the
Consultant for comments.
11 Product Data
(a) Submit manufacturers certified data analysis of all standard products,
including fertilizers, soil amendments, herbicides, pesticides,
fungicides, showing description of ingredients, and recommendations
for usage and application rates for each material to be used. Provide
certification stating that materials comply with requirements.
12 Samples
(a) Submit representative samples of all materials that are to be used in
the finished work. The non-objected samples shall be the quality
standard for the material and its placement.
(b) The Landscape Consultant shall inspect all plant material at the onsite
or holding nursery prior to planting.
(c) The samples provided must also meet the technical aspects of the
specification.
(d) Any materials which do not comply with the specification, are not non-
objected or are not to the satisfaction of Consultant shall be rejected
and shall be replaced at contractors cost.
13 Certifications: Submit the following for approval:
(a) A certified analysis by a non-objected laboratory for non-standard
products (soil, fertilizer, compost).
(b) Certificates confirming the origin, size and age of all plant material.
(c) Health certificates for all imported plant material.
(d) Sod: Furnish certification by the grower for the type, and trueness to
the grass variety or strain.
14 Quality Control Submittals: Provide the following for approval:
(a) Schedules showing program of implementation for each type of
landscape work, indicating anticipated dates and locations for each
type of planting.
(b) If necessary revised planting schedules with documentation of
reasons for the revision.
(c) Landscape Maintenance instructions and manual to be established by
the landscaping contractor and performed during an entire contract
year.
15 Closeout Submittals:
(a) The Contractor shall provide record documents to furnish an accurate
record of the final planting installation, including but not limited to:
(b) Plant material substitutions with size, genus, and species
(c) Material substitution
(d) Revisions to the scope of work
Add the following Parts after Part 1.1.5 accordingly:
1.1.6 Horticultural Supervisor
A. Contractor’s Horticultural Supervisor
1 The written approval of the Consultant shall be obtained for the Contractor‘s
proposed Horticultural Specialist.
2 The written approval of the Consultant shall be obtained for any temporary or
permanent replacements.
B. Inspection and supervision
1 The Consultant shall supervise the planting of all accents and ornamental
palms.
1.1.7 Sequencing And Scheduling
A. Notify the Consultant in writing, allowing at least three working days’ notice for
the following:
1 Initial meeting at site prior to start of any work
2 Plant material inspection for approval at source or on site
3 Final location of plants prior to preparation of planting pits.
4 Finish grades prior to laying sod in the lawn areas.
5 Check inspection of completion of all work, to establish beginning of
maintenance period.
6 Final inspection
1.1.8 Commissioning
A. Substantial completion
1 At the date of Substantial Completion all plants shall be in their specified
position and condition.
B. Failure of Plants
1 Any plants that are found to be missing, defective or not in good condition at
any time during the contract period and maintenance period shall be
immediately replaced by the Contractor.
2 In the case of replacement of palms, a 400 ton mobile crane will have
sufficient boom reach to access all areas. The Contractor will liaise with the
Clients Engineer to ensure correct positioning of the crane before proceeding
with any work.
1.2 SHIPPING DELIVERY AND HANDLING
1.2.1 Shipping and Delivery
Add the following paragraphs after paragraph number 4:
5 Root systems of all plants shall not be allowed to dry out at any time and shall
not be exposed to excessive or artificial heat or to freezing temperatures.
6 During transportation all plants shall be packed adequately to ensure
protection for climatic or physical injuries. Tarpaulins or other covers shall be
placed over plants when they are transported by trucks or in open freight
cars.
7. All plants shall be treated with anti-desiccant prior to transportation.
1.2.3 Handling
3 Plant material shall be lifted or moved in such a manner that the roots are not
disturbed.
4 Plant material shall be lifted or moved by holding the container and not the
above ground portion of the plant.
5 Immediately prior to lifting, date palm trees shall have their fronds reduced in
length by 30%, sprayed with anti-desiccant and tied up with 3 layers of
Hessian to enclose the growing tip. The roots shall be pruned and the root
ball protected with three layers of Hessian tied up with wire and kept moist
constantly with wet shingle, moss, straw or other suitable material.
6 Ornamental Palms / Imported stock
(a) Special care and attention shall be given to all imported ornamental
palms/plant stock. It is absolutely essential that all imported stock be
subjected to an acclimatisation period of at least 9 months in the site
nursery.
(b) Contractor shall investigate the specific species requirements of
handling, transplanting, delivering, storing, planting and maintaining
prior to performing any works.
1.3 PRODUCTS
1.3.2 Plants
15 All plants shall be of the size specified by the Landscape Consultant in the
Plant Schedule at the time of delivery to the site and shall be obtained from a
non-objected source. The Contractor shall allow for all imported and locally
sourced plants to be “grown-on” in the holding nursery in order to meet the
required specifications at time of planting.
16 Shrubs and ground covers shall be twin or multi-stemmed. All plants shall be
supplied as specified in tender documents and the Contractor is expected to
obtain stock from outside the country if it is not available locally. All imported
plant material must be sourced from a reputable Nursery to be non-objected
by the Consultant prior to purchase. Plants shall be true to and supplied
under Latin names. Synonyms must be checked with the Consultant.
17 All planting stock shall be well-balanced and well formed, sound, vigorous,
healthy and free from disease, sunscald, abrasion, harmful insects or insect
eggs and with a healthy, unbroken root system filling their containers but not
root-bound. All planting shall be certified free of pests, viruses etc.
18 Unless otherwise specified only nursery-grown plants will be used. All plants
shall be container grown, with the exception of date palms.
19 Consultant shall inspect and approve all imported and locally sourced plant
material at place of origin. Samples from all plant material shall be made
available for approval by the Consultant.
20 The Tender must be based, without exception, upon plants that are specified.
If plants are subsequently found to be unobtainable, alternatives may be
submitted, stating how they differ from the Specification. Such substitutions
may not be acceptable and submission of further alternatives may be
required. Approval in writing shall be obtained from the Consultant for any
substitution.
21 Nomenclature of trees and plants shall conform to the scientific names given
in:
(a) Royal Horticultural Society, "Directory of Gardening" Oxford University
Press, reprinted 1974 and Supplement 1969
(b) Hortus 3.
(c) Exotica
22 Alternative names can be checked in these books. All plants must agree with
the botanical description in these books. Hortus 3 and Exotica are the only
authorities for plants that are not listed in the RHS Directory.
23 All trees and particularly palms forming avenues or formal planting lines shall
be selected to be of the same size and appearance all to the approval of the
Consultant. Clear stem height, overall height, and girth size shall be
consistent and standardised among selected trees/palms stock.
After Part 1.3.24 add the following new Parts:
1.3.25 Trees
1 Tree stock shall be container grown. All specifications for container grown
plants shall indicate the plant size (girth, clear stem height, overall height, and
container size). Trees shall have a minimum girth of 10cm unless otherwise
specified in the planting schedule (girth / trunk circumference shall be
measured at 1.0m above the soil level, excluding container height).
2 The tree trunk shall be free of wounds, sunburned areas, conks (fungal
fruiting bodies), wood cracks, bleeding areas, signs of boring insects, galls,
cankers, and girdling ties.
3 The tree trunk shall be straight and vertical. There should not be any abrupt
changes in girth of the trunk (girth is the measurement of the circumference of
the trunk, measured at one meter from ground soil level).
4 The form or shape of the crown shall be typical for the specimen of the
species. The crown shall not significantly be deformed by wind, pruning
practices, pests or other factors.
5 Trees shall have a single, straight central leader, and tapered trunk, free of
overriding stems and strong, upright branches that compete with the central
leader.
6 Branches should be distributed radially around and vertically along the trunk,
forming a generally symmetrical crown typical for the tree. Branching of the
specified tree species shall start at 1.8m above ground level.
7 The size, colour and appearance of leaves shall be typical for the time of year
and stage of growth of the tree species. Leaves shall not be not stunted,
misshapen, tattered, or discolored.
8 Main branches shall be well spaced, with the branches diameter no greater
than 2/3 the diameter of the trunk. The specified tree shall have a minimum of
four main branches at planting.
9 The root system shall be free of injury from biotic (insects, pathogens)
infestation and shall be uniform throughout the soil mix or growth media.
Container grown nursery stock shall have a well-established root system
reaching the sides of the container to maintain a firm ball when the container
is removed.
1.3.26 Grass Stolons
1 Grass stolons shall be vigorous, and healthy, free from disease, insect pests,
weeds, other grasses and any other harmful or deleterious material
2 Grass stolons shall be 75mm to 150mm length, with 3 to 6 buds.
3 Grass stolons shall be Paspalum vaginatum or as identified on the Planting
plans.
1.3.27 Palms
1 Palms shall be container or field grown.
2 Offshoots will not be acceptable. They shall have a vigorous root system,
crown of new leaves, proper colour of leaves of an adult palm and sufficient
hardiness.
3 Prior to transporting for transplanting, all suckers, flowering and fruiting parts
and approximately thirty percent of fronds shall be removed. The remaining
fronds shall be sprayed with an anti-desiccant 24 hours prior to lifting. The
fronds are to be lifted to enclose and protect the growing tip, wrapped in
Hessian and securely tied in position. The roots shall be balled and the
Hessian securely tied. The root ball is to be secured using wire mesh and
Hessian to contain the soil and retain maximum soil moisture.
4 The Contractor shall take whatever steps he deems necessary and to the
approval of the Consultant to ensure the verticality and stability of all palms.
No additional payments shall be made for providing guys, stakes or any other
necessary anchorages.
5 Verticality shall be maintained within a tolerance of 1:25 unless instructed by
consultant.
6 The supplied stock of palms shall be consistent and uniform in species, trunk
height, form, shape, and caliper size. Caliper shall be minimum 500mm at
1.0m from ground level.
7 The height of palms is measured in ‘clear brown trunk’ from the ground to the
base of the crownshaft.
8 Protect all imported ornamental palms from winds and direct hot sun during
handling and transporting to the site nursery. Water as necessary to prevent
water stress.
9 A final inspection of the ornamental palm stock shall exhibit the following palm
characteristics:
(a) No sign of pests, diseases or infection; shall not show signs of nutrient
deficiencies or toxicities, and shall be not be mechanically damaged.
(b) Trunk specification
Uniform girth specification as specified in the planting schedule.
Clear straight single trunk, free of ragged or torn boots, scarring of
main trunks caused by tearing off boots prematurely.
Well formed, no abrupt constrictions along the trunk diameter
No holes, cavities, gouges, depressed areas or other defects
Petioles cut clean and symmetrically at the trunk on any old leaf bases
remaining.
(c) Fronds specifications:
Heavy dense canopy with all petioles in ascending position
75% excellent leaves (dark healthy leaf with a strong healthy petiole
and completely free of damage, defects and deformities)
No live insects or symptoms of plant disease
No chlorosis resulting from element deficiencies, physiological
problem, or presence of plant pests.
No extreme succulence (soft tender growth at base of trunk, caused
by over fertilization, over irrigation, or overcrowding).
(d) Root ball
A root balled plant has a root system which has been grown in the
ground, and that on transplanting requires soil to be firmly attached
and supported with a suitable porous material such as hessian.
Date palm root balls must be wrapped with burlap to preserve the
integrity of the root ball during transport.
1.4 SITE PREPARATION FOR PLANTING AREAS
After Part 1.4.5 add the following new Parts:
1.4.6 Existing services
1 The Contractor shall determine the location of all existing underground
services prior to commencing excavation works.
2 Any work in confined spaces, around existing trees or in the vicinity of major
utility services shall be executed by hand, where existing service lines
interfere with the planting, the contractor shall get the direct approval of the
landscape consultant on the shifting of the trees or palms pits prior to
planting.
1.4.7 Weather conditions:
1 All work shall be carried out during the appropriate season and in weather
conditions suitable for the operation.
2 An exception will be the planting of large palms and grass, which shall be
planted during the period optimum of root growth i.e. Mid April to the end of
September.
3 No planting shall be carried out between the months of June to September
without the specific approval of the Consultant.
1.4.8 Rubbish
1 All rubbish and litter accumulated within the landscape boundary shall be
cleared and removed daily. The areas shall be kept in a clean and tidy
condition with all driveways, paths, edges, kerbs, gutters and gullies swept
and kept clear of debris at all times.
2 All rubbish and debris shall be removed from site.
1.4.9 Oil and Petrol Storage
1 All oil and petrol containers are to be kept in suitable sheds provided by the
Contractor who is to observe all regulations regarding the storage of
inflammable liquids. If any areas of soil are affected by oil or petrol spillage,
the contaminated soil is to be dug up until uncontaminated ground is reached
and removed from site and such areas made good as directed by the
Consultant.
1.4.10 Non-objected Chemicals
1 Only chemicals non-objected and listed by the Local Municipality and Ministry
of Agriculture and Fisheries will be used.
2 All chemicals shall be non-toxic to human beings, birds and animals and
subject to the approval of a qualified specialist.
3 The Contractor shall be liable for ensuring that all chemicals are stored
separately and handled and supplied in strict accordance with the
manufacturer‘s printed instructions.
1.12 MAINTENANCE AND HANDOVER
After Part 1.12.3 add the following new Part:
1.12.4 Operations and Maintenance Manual:
Submit for employer’s documentation:
system.
3 Include following information in comprehensive format:
(a) Pesticide/fungicide/herbicide applications - including safety application
rates and procedure, schedules of pesticides/fungicides/herbicides
(b) Irrigation L and Drainage and Storm water Drainage -including water
application rates and maintenance procedures
(c) Fertilization -including fertilizer descriptions, application rates and
programs
(d) Maintenance manual for ornamental palms including special
fertilization program and pest control management.
(e) Salinity Control -including leaching methods, and leaching program
monitoring
(f) Turf Grass Management -including mowing procedure, replacement of
turf grass by stolons and sods and routine management procedures;
aeration, top dressing, vertical mowing thatch removal, rolling and
overseeding.
(g) Propagation and seasonal replacement (max. every 3 months) of all
flowers
(h) General Maintenance -including pruning, thinning out of shrub s and
succulents, stakes and ties, bermwork , replacement’s and clean-up,
protective fencing etc.
(i) Equipment Inventory, maintenance procedures and full manufacturer’s
maintenance manual.
(j) Specify in detail a maintenance schedule of daily, weekly, monthly and
annual horticultural activities for the Consultant‘s information and
approval.
SECTION 31 HIGHWAY STRUCTURES
The following paragraphs delete, substitute, amend, supplement, or are additional to the paragraphs
in the various sections of QCS 2014, as amended or added to by the IANs
SECTION 31/10
PART 1 GENERAL
Clause 1.1 Related Documents & Regulations

1 The work shall be executed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following Interim Advice Notices published by the PWA:
IAN
Title
No
02 Safety Barrier Performance Levels and Selection Criteria
Specification for Waterproofing of Cut and Cover Tunnel and
04
Underpass Highway Structures
05 Specification for the Excavation and Backfill of Highway Structures
06 Specification for Bridge Bearings
07 Approval in Principle Documents for Highway Structures
09 Design Criteria for Highway Structures
11 Cycleway Design Guidelines
12 Amendments to QCS 2014
14 Traffic Signs and Road Marking Guidance
15 Fibre Optic Ducts for Drainage Services
16 Pavement Design Guidelines
17 Traffic Signals Standard Details and Drawing Requirements
Kerb Inlet Gullies: This IAN has been amended by memorandum
18
reference no. EXW-GENL-0000-PE-KBR-ME-00208
20 Road Tunnel Fire and Life Safety Systems
21 Cycleways and Footways Pavement Design Guidelines
22 Technical Approval of Highway Structures
23 Tunnel and Underpass Drainage
24 Specification for Mechanically Stabilised Earth Structures
25 Amendments to the TSE System Design Guidelines
Specification for Protective Coating for Above Ground Concrete
27
Surfaces of Highway Structures
Specification for Waterproofing of Concrete Decks on Highway
28 Structures: This IAN has been amended by memorandum reference
no. EXW-GENL-0000-PE-KBR-ME-00190
31 Expansion Joints for Highway Structures
100 Amendments to QCS section 6
101 Amendments to QHDM
Should there be any conflict between the requirements of these Interim Advice
Notices and this Project Specification, then the Interim Advice Notices shall take
precedence.
SECTION 31/30 BRIDGE BEARINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 Bridge bearings shall be in accordance with Interim Advice Note 006
“Specification for Bridge Bearings” and Interim Advice Note 009 “Design
Criteria for Highway Structures ”published by the Public Works Authority.
Should there be any conflict between the requirements of IAN 006 and this
Particular Specification, then IAN 006 shall take precedence.
SECTION 31/40 BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 Bridge deck expansion joints, and sealing gaps in bridges and structures shall
be as described in drawings respectively and shall be in accordance with
Interim Advice Note 0031 “Expansion Joints for Highway Structures” and
Interim Advice Note 009 “Design Criteria for highway Structures” published by
the Public Works Authority. Should there be any conflict between the
requirements of IAN 009 and this Particular Specification, then IAN 0031 shall
take precedence.
2 Only bridge deck expansion joints which are in accordance with the
requirements of BD 33/94 and acceptable to the Engineer shall be
incorporated into the Works.
3 Storage and installation of joints, jointing materials, sealants and other
associated items shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4 The same joint system, seal or sealant shall continue across the full width of
the deck including footway, verge, hard strip, hard shoulder and central
reserve. Different joint systems shall not be combined at one end of a deck.
PART 2 INSTALLATION OF BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINTS
1 The positioning of holding down bolts and anchorage systems shall be
checked for accuracy before the casting of concrete commences. Templates
or shuttering shall be fixed to box out the concrete for the joint and to locate
holding down bolts or anchorage pockets. Threaded parts shall be protected,
kept clean and free from rust.
2 Where the surfacing is to be removed to accommodate the bridge joint these
shall be cut to a clean straight line for the full depth of the surfacing without
damage to the concrete substrate.
3 Before installation of the joint, the concrete surfaces shall be free from
laitance, sound, clean and comply with the manufacturer’s requirements.
4 The expansion joint and the bridge deck waterproofing shall be formed so that
a watertight seal is provided. Where prefabricated units are used, the seal
between each unit shall be made watertight and in addition a secondary
waterproofing system in the form of a continuous membrane shall be
installed.
5 The gap width shall be set, in relation to the prevailing deck temperature, with
the joint gap sides parallel as shown on drawings. Seals which are not held in
metal runners shall remain in compression for the full range of joint
movement.
6 Expansion joints shall be of uniform width and straight alignment and shall be
accurately set and finished and aligned with the finished surface.
7 During the placing and hardening of the bedding and bonding materials,
movement between the joint and the substrate shall be prevented.
8 Subsurface and below-joint drainage systems shall be designed, provided
and installed in accordance with the joint manufacturer’s recommendations.
The complete drainage system shall be accessible for cleaning and, on
completion of the joint, the drainage system shall be checked and cleared of
any obstructions.
9 Before vehicles traffic the joints, temporary covers capable of withstanding
vehicular loading shall be provided over expansion joints during and after
their installation as appropriate for protection.
SECTION 31/60 REINFORCED SOIL AND ANCHORED EARTH STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Reinforced soil (i.e. Mechanically Stabilised Earth) or anchored earth
structures shall be constructed using a proprietary system complying with this
Part of the specification. The system shall be designed by a recognised
specialist non-objected by the Engineer. The system shall be backed by a
current quality certificate non-objected by the Engineer. The design shall also
be checked and certified by an independent qualified engineer (ie a Category
3 Check).
The design and construction of the reinforced soil or anchored earth
structures shall be in accordance with Standard BD70 and Interim Advice
Note 024 “Specification for Mechanically Stabilised Earth Structures”
published by the Public Works Authority Should there be any conflict between
the requirements of IAN 024 and this Particular Specification, then IAN 024
shall take precedence.
1.2 The Contractor shall provide a maintenance manual for the system. This shall
include in particular proposals for monitoring the condition of the elements of
the system.
1.3 The work for Reinforced Soil Walls shall also include the design and
construction of: suitable lateral restraint (additional mechanical stabilisation)
to support the loads from the concrete barrier above the Reinforced Soil wall
together with its counterbalancing slab as defined on the drawings.
1.4 IAN 024 Section 4.2.8 Clause 1. (vi) : Replace 356 degrees with 35 degrees.
1.5 IAN 024 Section 4.1.5 Clause 5. (v) : Replace paragraph with “Construction of
the concrete barrier and counterbalancing slab as detailed on the drawings”.
1.6 IAN 024 Section 4.1.6.2 Clause 1 (ii) : Replace paragraph with “Detailed
design calculations for the proposed wall system and the lateral restraint
protruding from the barrier footings.”
1.7 IAN 024 Section 4.1.6.3 Clause 1: Delete “coping”
1.8 IAN 024 Section 4.2.3 Clause 1: Delete “coping”
PART 2 EARTHWORKS
2.1 Earthworks for reinforced soil and anchored earth structures shall comply with
QCS Section 6 and IAN 024: Specification for Mechanically Stabilised Earth
Structures.
PART 3 REINFORCEMENT ELEMENTS FOR REINFORCED SOIL AND ANCHOR
ELEMENTS FOR ANCHORED EARTH
3.1 Reinforcement elements shall be in accordance with IAN 024: Specification
for Mechanically Stabilised Earth Structures.
3.2 Reinforcing and anchor elements shall be prefabricated and delivered to Site
ready for installation into the Works. The elements shall be:
(i) Loaded, unloaded and handles in such a manner that:
(a) no permanent set or other structural damage is caused;
(b) the protective coating is not damaged.
(ii) Stored flat and clearly marked to identify items having different lengths
and cross-sectional dimensions.
PART 4 FASTENERS
4.1 Connection and associated fasteners shall be in accordance with IAN 024:
Specification for Mechanically Stabilised Earth Structures.
PART 5 PREFABRICATED AND PRECAST FACING
5.1 Prefabricated and Precast facing panels shall be in accordance with IAN 024:
Specification for Mechanically Stabilised Earth Structures.
SECTION 31/70 PROTECTIVE COATING FOR CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Clause 1.1 Summary
1.1.1 Work Included
(a) Provide and apply protective coating on all exposed surfaces of
bridge/tunnel construction, as specified herein or as required to
complete the Work.
(b) The coating system shall be used for the protection of reinforced
concrete structures against carbonation or chloride induced corrosion.
The protective coating is to be provided to all exposed concrete
surfaces. Work includes, but not necessarily limited to:
(i) Exposed pier columns.
(ii) Abutments, wing walls and retaining walls.
(iii) Bridge deck soffit and sides and other exposed surfaces of deck
including soffit and sides of diaphragm beams and internal
surfaces of box girders.
(iv) Precast fascia elements.
(v) Underpass walls, roof and bottom slab
(vi) Exposed faces of traffic barriers.
1.1.2 Related Work
(a) Cast-in-Place Concrete is specified in QCS Section 5 and the
supplementary Project Specification.
1.1.3 Related Documents
(a) Drawings, general and supplementary conditions, applicable provisions
of the front end documents apply to this Section.
(b) Protective coatings on all exposed surfaces of highway structures shall
be in accordance with Interim Advice Note 027 “Specification for
Protective Coating for Above Ground Concrete Surfaces of Highway
Structures” and IAN 009 “Design Criteria of Highway Structures” as
published by the Public Works Authority. Should there be any conflict
between the requirements of IAN 027 and this Particular Specification,
then IAN 027 shall take precedence.
1.2 Clause 1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 GENERAL: Submit the following according to General Conditions of Contract
and the front end documents.
1.2.2 PROPRIETARY COATING SYSTEM: Proprietary special coating system for
the protection of exposed concrete surfaces shall be proposed by the
Contractor and is subject to the Engineer's non-objection. Submittal shall
include the coating type and coating manufacturer. When submitting for the
approval of the coating system to be used, the Contractor shall enclose a list
of projects, executed in environmental conditions similar to those experienced
in Qatar, in which the same coating system was successfully used.
1.2.3 The Contractor's application shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's
detailed product specifications together with application instructions, and
guarantee that the product is suitable for use at the operating temperatures in
Qatar.
1.2.4 Trial Panels as specified in Clause 1.4 A.
1.3 Clause 1.3 Performance Requirements
The coating system is required to provide in-depth protection against carbonation
and chloride penetration while permitting water vapour transmission from the
concrete.
1.4 Clause 1.4 Quality Assurance
1.4.1 Trial Panels
(a) Trial panels shall be carried out in accordance with IAN 027
Specification for Protective Coating for Above Ground Concrete
Surfaces of Highway Structures.
1.4.2 Testing
Performance Test Requirement shall be in accordance with IAN 027:
Specification for Protective Coating for Above Ground Concrete Surfaces of
Highway Structures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Clause 2.1 Materials
Coating systems for different applications (Coating system A, B, C and D) shall be in
accordance with IAN 027 Specification for Protective Coating for Above Ground
Concrete Structures of Highway Structures.
2.1.1 Final colour shall be as detailed on the urban design construction drawings
and non-objected to by the Engineer. Colour selection shall comply with the
project colour palette.
1.5 Clause 2.2 Specifications
2.2.1 The material employed for the coating system shall comply with EXW-GENL-
0000-PE-KBR-IP-00009 Design Criteria for Highway Structures and EXW-
GENL-0000-PE-KBR-IP-00027 Specification for Protective Coating for Above
Ground Concrete Surfaces of Highway Structures.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1.6 Clause 3.1 General
3.1.1 The Contractor is required to adhere strictly to the manufacturer's
recommendations regarding the use, storage, application and safety rules in
respect of the non-objected to materials.
3.1.2 In all operations of storage, mixing and application, the Contractor shall
comply with the health and safety recommendations of the manufacturer and
governing authorities.
1.7 Clause 3.2 Inspection of Concrete
The Contractor shall not proceed with the surface finish or making good of concrete
surfaces until he has received the Engineer's non-objection to do so and he shall not
apply cement slurry or mortar or any other coating to the concrete surfaces from
which the formwork has been struck until the Engineer has inspected and non-
objected to the concrete.
1.8 Clause 3.3 Surface Preparation
3.3.1 Contractor shall carry out the surface preparation work in accordance with
IAN 027 Specification for Protective Coating for Above Ground Concrete
Surfaces of Highway Structures.
1.9 Clause 3.4 Approval prior to Coating Application in the Works
The Engineer's non-objection must be obtained prior to applying the coating system
in the works. Before giving the non-objection, the Engineer shall be satisfied as to the
following:
(a) All construction work in the immediate vicinity of the structure to be coated
has been completed.
(b) The surface preparation of the structure has been completed.
(c) The whole of the structure has been coated in a continuous operation.
(d) Adequate measures have been taken to protect the property of third parties,
including vehicles, from coating splatters. he weather conditions accord with
the coating manufacturer's directions for coating application.
1.10 Clause 5.3 Application
3.5.1 The exposed concrete surfaces as defined in the documents or as non-
objected by the Engineer shall be conditioned by the application of the
penetrating hydrophobic primer. The primer shall be allowed to dry in
accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
3.5.2 The Contractor shall then apply two coats of the pigmented topcoat in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The finished coating shall be
pinhole free. The colour and finish shall be non-objected by the Engineer.
3.5.3 The coating shall be applied by spray, roller or brush to achieve a finish
acceptable to the Engineer.
SECTION 31/80 APPROVAL IN PRINCIPLE DOCUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Approval in Principle (AIP) documents shall be in accordance to EXW-GENL-
0000-PE-KBR-IP-00007.
(b)
SECTION 31/90 BRIDGE LOAD TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Load testing of bridges shall be carried out when instructed by the Engineer.
1.2 The cost of load testing shall be borne by the Contractor if the load test or
other subsequent tests identify deficiencies in the bridge construction. The
Engineer shall decide, based on the test results, if the bridge is considered to
be deficient.
1.3 The bridge superstructure loading tests shall be carried out for at least 2
critical spans of each bridge as directed by the Engineer. Additional spans
shall be tested if instructed by the Engineer.
1.4 The purpose of the load testing is to evaluate the structural performance and
functional adequacy of the bridge tested as an exact full-sized model with an
appropriate margin of safety.
PART 2 DEFINITIONS
2.1 "Design Live Load" means the governing live load for the design of each
section.
2.2 "Test Load" means the actual loads used for testing producing equivalent
internal forces and reactions as the corresponding Design Live Load.
PART 3 LOADING REQUIREMENTS
1.11 Design Live Load
3.1 The Design Live Load to be simulated in the test shall be defined by the
Engineer.
3.2 This may include any load case defined in Ashghal’s Interim Advice Note
(IAN) 009 - Design Criteria for Highway Structures. This may include HA
loading and/or 45 Units of HB loading as defined in BD37/01 Loads for
Highway Bridges published by the Highways Agency (UK).
3.3 Loads may be required across the full width of the deck between parapets as
defined stated in IAN 009.
3.4 Design Live Loads shall be applied as required for load Combination 1 only
as defined in BD 37/01.
3.5 The Design Live Loads shall include the load factor γfL for the Serviceability
Limit State only.
3.6 The Design Live Loads shall not include for γf3.
1.12 Test Load
3.1 Test Loads shall be determined by the Contractor upon receipt of the Design
Test Load requirements from the Engineer. The Test Loads shall replicate as
closely as possible the Design Live Loads.
3.2 The Contractors proposals for the Test Loads shall be submitted to the
Engineer for non-objection prior to tests commencing. Tests shall not
commence without the Engineers written non-objection of the Test Load
proposals.
3.3 In order to ensure the safety of the structure, the following calculations shall
be prepared by the Contractor prior to load testing:
(i) The theoretical bending moment, shear diagrams and reactions for each
Test Load case. The maximum values shall not exceed the
corresponding values under Design Live Loads.
(ii) The theoretical deflections at all MRPs for each Test Load increment.
These values shall not exceed the corresponding values under Design
Live Loads.
PART 4 GENERAL TEST REQUIREMENTS
4.1 On receipt of an instruction from the Engineer to carry out load tests and
details of the Design Live Loads, the Contractor shall prepare a Method
Statement for the non-objection of the Engineer.
4.2 Load tests on bridges shall not be carried out sooner than 28 days after
completion of the bridge. These tests shall be completed in accordance with
the requirements below.
4.3 The load testing shall be performed after the bridge construction is completed
and all the superimposed dead loads (pavement layers, parapets, footway,
etc.) are applied.
4.4 The general and structural safety of the bridge during the testing is the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor must ensure that the elastic
limit of the bridge is not exceeded and that no damage is done to the bridge
or any of its components.
4.5 The Contractor shall set up on site a calibrated weighing bridge and confirm
the weight of all vehicles used in the test.
4.6 The Contractor shall supply all necessary facilities, access, measuring and
photographic equipment to enable the Engineer to inspect critical locations
during the test.
4.7 The Test Load patterns and positions on the bridge deck should be
predetermined so as to simulate load effects due to the Design Live Load.
The amount and configuration of the Test Load applied during the test must
produce internal forces (bending moments, shear and axial forces) and
reactions at critical sections, equal to the corresponding Design Live Load
values used in the bridge design. The Test Load shall mutually be placed in
standard width design traffic lanes, spaced across the entire bridge roadway
width measured between curbs, at pre-marked locations.
4.8 Sufficient supporting calculations shall be provided for selected Test Load
values, patterns and positions for simulation of the most critical cases.
4.9 During the test, the Test Load shall be increased (at least in four increments),
to achieve the predetermined design maximum live longitudinal sagging and
hogging (if any) moments in mid· spans, design maximum live longitudinal
hogging at internal supports, and maximum live reactions at supports.
4.10 Pre-cast concrete blocks may be used as truck loads to achieve the required
axle loads. Lorries loaded with aggregates may also be used if the required
axle loads can be achieved. Concentrated loads can be applied to the deck
by jacking against dead weight. The load testing shall be carried out for
selected spans, piers and abutments.
4.11 Deflections shall be measured accurately and at a sufficient number of
Measurement Reference Points (MRPs), to produce sufficient data to plot the
theoretical and measured deflected shapes of the structure. Measurements
shall be carried out at least at mid span, one fourth of middle spans and at
one fifth of exterior spans and at top of piers and abutments. At each section,
at least two measurement points, one at the center line and one at the edge
of bridge deck slab, shall be carried out.
4.12 After completion of Load Testing, a bearing performance inspection shall be
carried out to show that no additional restraint is present. The vertical
deflections and compression of bearings and differential translations, i.e.
temperature Induced movements at expansion joints, should be proved to be
well below the design (or manufacturer) limits.
PART 5 LOAD TESTING PROCEDURE
5.1 Three days prior to load testing, hourly temperature measurements shall be
carried out at top as well as at the underside of the bridge deck slab (or
underside of steel or concrete girder). Temperature measurement shall be at
a location which will produce average values for the whole bridge.
5.2 Loads on the bridge shall be moved or stored in a manner which does not
cause permanent damage to the bridge nor overstress any of its components.
5.3 The Test Load shall be applied gradually, at least in four increments. before
reaching the final total amount. At each Test Load increment, the loading
shall be sustained for a minimum period of one hour before commencement
of deflections reading. The maximum Test load must be applied for a
minimum period of twelve hours.
5.4 After each load increment, deflection measurements must be taken at all
MRPs, Including above and at piers and abutments. These shall not exceed
the corresponding theoretical values calculated for the same loading.
5.5 After each load increment, a visual Inspection shall be carried out at critical
locations to check for appearance or widening of cracks and any other
unwanted consequences.
5.6 After each deflection reading and visual inspection, the Contractor and
Engineer shall verify and determine that the bridge is performing as expected
and consequently shall decide regarding continuation or postponement of
testing.
5.7 Deflections shall also be measured after removal of each Test Load to check
recovery such that any permanent deflection is minimal and within acceptable
limits.
5.8 At each stage, during reading of deflections, the temperature at top and
bottom of bridge deck shall be measured. In case of significant temperature
effects, the theoretical deflections due to temperature shall be calculated and
considered in comparing of theoretical and measured deflections.
5.9 The test shall be monitored in two ways as detailed below:
(i) Monitoring Type A: Deflection measuring devices with an accuracy of
±2mm shall be placed at mid span and over supports of the span being
monitored, as directed by the Engineer. Readings shall be taken at the
start of each stage, on achievement of the maximum load for the stage
and at the end of the stage. Temperature readings shall be taken
throughout the test on the deck surface and on concrete in the shade at
locations non-objected by the Engineer.
(ii) Monitoring Type B: Visual inspection of key elements, including bearings,
shall be carried out.
5.10 At all stages, the Contractor shall report to the Engineer any unanticipated
event or delay and the Engineer will, if appropriate, provide further
instructions for proceeding with the test.
PART 6 LOAD TESTING METHOD STATEMENT
6.1 A Load Testing Method Statement shall be submitted to Engineer at least 30
days before the testing date. It shall include, but not be limited to the
following:
(i) The current status of the bridge to be tested.
(ii) Traffic management during the test.
(iii) Load testing procedure.
(iv) Position of Measurement Reference Points.
(v) Dial gauges types, locations, sensitivities, etc.
(vi) Details of vehicle(s) used in the test, load capacity, type of load,
maximum and incremental loads and their corresponding axle loads with
justification for assumed axle loads.
(vii) Test vehicle configurations in the longitudinal and transverse directions
for each test load case including supporting calculations for their
selection.
(viii) The bending moment, shear force and theoretical deflection diagrams
and support reactions due to the Test Load.
(ix) A comparison between designs live load moments, shears, reactions and
deflections and their corresponding theoretical Test Load values at all
MRPs. The comparison of deflections shall be carried out for each test
load increment.
(x) Any additional information the consultant may find useful for the
execution of the load testing.
6.2 The load test shall not commence until the Engineer has issued written non-
objection of the Load Testing Method Statement.
PART 7 LOAD TESTING ANALYSIS REPORT

7.1 A comprehensive Load Testing Analysis Report shall be prepared by the
Contractor. This report shall include, but not be limited to the following;
(i) A summary of all items mentioned above in the Method Statement.
(ii) The Interpretation of the test results.
(iii) A table containing theoretical (design live load and test load) deflections
and measured deflections for all MRPs and for each test load increment.
The measured deflections after removal of each Test Load increment
shall also be included in this table.
(iv) Longitudinal theoretical (design live load and test load) deflections and
measured deflection curves along the bridge centerline for each test load
increment.
(v) Graphs showing measured vs. theoretical deflections at major MRPs (i.e.
along bridge at mid-span and support locations) to determine the slope of
the compatibility line.
(vi) Any local effects observed during the test.
(vii) Final analysis, conclusions and recommendations.
(viii) Results of bearings performance inspection.
(ix) Statement of approval of bridge Load Testing.
(x) Statement of opinion on compliance of bridge with the design
requirements based on Load Testing results.
7.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, three copies of the Load Testing
Analysis Report within 14 days of the load test being completed.

02d.2 Schedule A Part 3 Annex1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

02d.2 Schedule A Part 3 Annex1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

02d.2 Schedule A Part 3 Annex1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STATE OF QATAR SCHEDULE A: PROJECT BRIEF

ASHGHAL PART 3: PROJECT DATA

Project ID: IA 2018 C 075 G Schedule A: Part 3: Annexure 1 Rev. 0

PROJECT SPECIFIC SPECIFICATIONS

Project ID: IA 2018 C 075 G Schedule A: Part 3: Annexure 1: Contents Rev. 0

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

IAN 20 Road Tunnel Fire and Life Safety Systems Rev A2

PWA IAN 006 14 Rev A1 - Specification for Bridge Bearings

PWA IAN 009 14 Rev A2 - Design Criteria for Highway Structures

PWA IAN 011 Rev A1 - Cycleway Design Guidelines

PWA IAN 013 14 Rev A1 - Amendments to QCS 2014

PWA IAN 015 Rev A1 - Fibre Optic Ducts for Drainage

PWA IAN 016 Rev A1 - Pavement Design Guidelines

PWA IAN 018 Rev A1 - Kerb Inlet Gullies

PWA IAN 022 Rev A1 - Technical Approval of Highway Structures

PWA IAN 023 Rev A2 - Tunnel and Underpass Drainage

PWA IAN 031 14 Rev A1 - Expansion Joints for Highway Structures

PWA IAN 100 Rev 0 - Amendments to Section 6 Parts 4 5 6 8 of QCS 2014

PWA IAN 101 Rev 1 - Amendments to QHDM

1.4.7 The Engineer

PART 1A GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES FOR UTILITY WORKS

PART 3 SITE ACCESS AND ENTRY ONTO THE SITE

PART 10 HEALTH AND SAFETY

Part 11 ENGINEER’S SITE FACILITIES

11.4 PROVISIONS OF EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES

PART 13 SETTING OUT OF THE WORKS

PART 21 FINAL INSPECTION AND HANDOVER PROCEDURES

VISUAL DESIGN OF BRANDED-HOARDING AND SIGNBOARDS SPECIFICATION

1.1.1 Visual Design Requirements for Branded-Hoarding – Construction Site

B C075 M001 Y039 K000

C C013 M018 Y038 K000

D C000 M000 Y000 K000

Panel 2: Qatar Deserves The Best

Panel 3: Image, website and project name

Panel 4: Safety Messages

Pattern continues as necessary – depending on the number of images.

1.1.2 Visual Design Requirements for Branded-Hoarding – Site Office

C C013 M018 Y038 K000

D C000 M000 Y000 K000

Panel Panel 1 ASHGHAL logo and 3D rendered project image #A

1.2 Visual Design of Signboards Specification

ASSET AFFAIRS PROJECT HANDOVER PROCEDURAL DOCUMENT

PART 3 PITS AND TRENCHES

PART 4 SOIL SAMPLING

PART 5 IN-SITU TESTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING

S.NO Recommended Tests Testing Standard Remarks

S.NO Strata Recommended Tests Testing Standard Remarks

PART 3 CONCRETE PLANTS

PART 6 PROPERTY REQUIREMENTS

PART 7 BATCHING AND MIXING

PART 8 TRANSPORTATION AND PLACING OF CONCRETE

PART 14 PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS FOR CONCRETE

PART 18 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE

PART 5 ASPHALT WORKS

PART 11 KERBS, FOOTWAYS AND PAVED AREAS

PART 13 TRAFFIC SIGNS, MARKINGS AND STUDS

1. Qatar Construction Specifications

PART 14 WORKS IN RELATION TO SERVICES

PART 15 ROAD LIGHTING